tour plan england

Finding the Universe

Travel tales, photography and a dash of humor

Cotswold252520village252520Castle252520Combe252520clouds_by_Laurence252520Norah25255B1125255D

2 Weeks in the UK – My Perfect UK Trip Itinerary

Last updated: March 10, 2024 . Written by Laurence Norah - 219 Comments

If you are looking for a two week UK itinerary which includes Ireland, you have come to the right place. This UK road trip itinerary has you starting in London, and using a rental car as the transportation method. It covers some of our highlights in the UK, including cities, castles, and stunning natural scenery.

I have spent a great deal of time living in and exploring the UK. I’ve drawn on my experiences travelling here to put together my perfect two week UK trip to help you plan your own trip.

This UK itinerary (which also includes Ireland) covers England, Scotland, Northern Ireland and Wales. It’s a self-drive road-trip, although could also be modified to support travel by public transport if you prefer.

If you haven’t driven in the UK before, do check out my guide to driving in the UK for helpful tips. We also have a guide to how much it costs to travel in the UK if you need budget planning help.

UK Two Week Itinerary - Alnwick Castle UK

Without further ado, allow me to present my two-week UK itinerary.

A 2 week UK Trip itinerary

This itinerary is very busy and fits a lot in, including time in Ireland. It is doable, but just be aware that it will be fast paced with quite a lot of driving. Naturally, you are welcome to take the itinerary and adjust it to meet your own interests and pace.

For example, many folks prefer to focus on the UK with their two weeks, and skip the island of Ireland, returning instead via the Lake District and Wales. However, if you want to see as much as possible, this itinerary is how to do it.

Days 1 & 2: London

The UK’s capital is one of my favourite cities in the world. It’s been hanging around for over 2000 years on the banks of the Thames, and there is just an incredible wealth of things to see, from historical sights, to amazing museums, to crazy street markets.

It’s a wonderfully walk-able capital, and you can easily take in the major central sights in a day or so, leaving you the second day to explore museums, art galleries, or go a little further afield and take in some of the other sights, from crumbling cemeteries to massive parks. And if all else fails, you will never be short on an incredible pub to while away some time before heading on.

For inspiration for your visit, take a look at our 2 day London itinerary , which covers the major highlights of the city, and also links to lots of other information about visiting, including tips on finding Harry Potter locations in London through to Winston Churchill locations in London – something for everyone!

My advice for London is to invest in an Oyster card to save money on your transport (don’t hire a car until you leave the capital – and check here for great rates on car hire ), and if you think you’re going to use it, look into buying a London Pass to save money on London’s top attractions.

Available in 1, 3 and 6 day versions, as well as a version with an included Oyster card, the savings can really be quite impressive if you plan on visiting a few locations. You can read a full break down on when the London Pass is worth buying here , and buy one yourself here .

Finally, London is probably going to be the most expensive city in the UK for your accommodation. We recommend booking well in advance to get a good deal.

Some of our recommended accommodation options in London are:

The Walrus Bar and Hostel , The Z hotel in Shoreditch , Point A Hotel , Lime Tree Hotel and the Resident Victoria Hotel . You can see more London hotel listings here on booking.com . We also love the curated apartments available on Plum Guide .

Days 3 & 4: Oxford & the Cotswolds

One of the stipulations of the original question was the wish to avoid feeling too much like a tourist. Unfortunately, this is nearly impossible in Oxford , as nearly everyone there is either a tourist or a student. I lived in and around Oxford for a number of years, and generally felt like a tourist most of that time too.

Part of the reason for that is that this tiny city is absolutely jam packed with incredible buildings, largely in the form of the Oxford Colleges. These are seriously wealthy establishments, who clearly had no problem flaunting that wealth in an architectural fashion back in the day.

This means that yes, it is full of people wandering around, mouths agape, at quite how pretty the whole thing is. Yes, it’s jam packed with tourists. But for good reason!

So strap that camera on and snap away. Then go for a punt on the river, and enjoy some Pimms or a cream tea. Seek out the Harry Potter filming locations . Take a walking tour of the Universities . There’s no shortage of way to fill your time!

Read more tips for spending a day in Oxford, here .

From Oxford you are also well located to take in the incredibly picturesque Cotswolds area – all quaint villages and rolling countryside. The England that everyone imagines England to be like, with country pubs, village greens and cricket ovals. Lovely stuff. Check out hotel prices for Oxford here .

Days 5 & 6: Peak District and Manchester

From Oxford I’m going to suggest heading “up north”, towards the Peak District national park. Think rolling hills, quaint villages, and beautiful walks.

There are also some fabulous stately homes to visit , not to mention that on the way from Oxford you can stop off at Warwick Castle – one of the UK’s best-preserved castles.

If you’re interested in the industrial revolution in the UK I can highly recommend a visit to the city of Manchester.

Of course, if the industrial revolution isn’t your thing there are plenty of other reasons to visit Manchester, including excellent retail therapy, an awesome food scene, and a variety of architectural highlights. Not to mention the music scene!

You can see my guide to things to do in Manchester for lots more ideas, and you can see hotel prices for Manchester here .

One other thing you might consider as you pass through the Peak District and Manchester is a visit to Alton Towers . This is arguably the UK’s best known theme park, and would make for a great thrilling day out for those of you who like that sort of thing.

Day 7: York

Not that far from Manchester (England is so quaintly explorable!), the city of York is another of my favourite UK cities.

From the incredible Gothic York Minster (a climb to the top is highly recommended) to the winding, tumbled down alleyways of the shambles, to the Viking history – this is a city that just cries out for exploration.

York St Marys Abbey ruin church monastery

It’s also an awesome place if you’re into ghost stories. There are a whole number of ghost walks that take in the spooky past of York, so if you want an evening of entertainment and intrigue, likely accompanied with a number of fine drinking establishments, an evening ghost walk is a great bit of fun.

I’m not a great believer in this sort of thing usually, but I took a tour and thoroughly enjoyed it!

If you do plan on seeing a few things in York, you might save money with a York City Pass , which includes most of the attractions in the city as well as access to the York Sightseeing bus or York City Cruises. You can buy that in advance here .

For more York ideas, see our guide to spending two days in York , which has a comprehensive itinerary as well as tips on where to stay and how to get around.

For accommodation, you can check out and book the best York hotels here .

Days 8 & 9: Edinburgh via Northumberland

From York we’re going to wave farewell to England, and head up to Scotland’s capital city, Edinburgh. On the way though, you’ll be passing through some of England’s least travelled, yet stunningly beautiful, landscapes.

I am of course talking about Northumbria. From miles of deserted beach, to crumbling castles, to the Roman equivalent of the great wall of China, Northumbria really has a lot to offer someone looking for a slightly off the beaten track England experience. The rolling landscapes are breath-taking and you’ll find yourself alone much of the time. Worth taking a bit of time to explore, in my opinion.

Then of course, it’s up to Edinburgh , where you’ll not be short of amazing things to look at. From Edinburgh castle, to Arthurs Seat, from fine whiskys, to Princes Street, there really is enough here for a number of days of entertainment. And if you visit during the Fringe festival… well… plan on being entertained for a good many weeks!

See more ideas on spending some time in Edinburgh in this detailed two day Edinburgh itinerary that I put together, as well as our guide to things to do in Edinburgh , our tips on visiting Edinburgh in winter , and our guide to finding Harry Potter in Edinburgh .

Then check and book your Edinburgh hotels here.

Days 10 – 12: Ireland

Because the UK is an easily explorable place with decent roads and relatively short distances to drive, it is totally possible to include another country – Ireland! – in a trip like this if you’re up for it.

Do be aware that if you are renting a car, some car rental companies have restrictions on taking cars on ferries, or into other countries – so make sure you check before you go as there may be an additional fee to pay.

Of course, you could also fly to Ireland (Edinburgh to Belfast or Dublin for example), and use different rentals for different parts of your adventure!

If all that sounds like too much hard work, you could extend your time in Scotland, or alternatively, you could take in the west coast of the UK, including Glasgow , the Lake District, and Liverpool, as well as popping into Wales for the stunning Snowdonia national park, and rejoin this itinerary in South Wales or Bristol . The choice is yours!

If it is Ireland you want though, it’s a short ferry ride from Scotland (Cairnryan to be precise, which is 2-3 hour drive from Edinburgh) across to Belfast in Northern Ireland, from where you can spend a few days exploring the Emerald Isle.

We have travelled from Cairnryan with both Stena Line and P&O Ferries, both of which have been a fast, comfortable and efficient service. We normally use Direct Ferries for ferry booking as they compare prices across all the providers and support payment in multple currencies. You can book your ferry tickets here .

This part of the world has a lot to offer, and three days is quite a short amount of time. We can recommend spending some time in Belfast and driving north along the causeway coastal route to see such highlights as the Giant’s Causeway, ruined castles and spectacular coastline. Then, head south into Ireland, and see fabulous Dublin.

I’ve explored Dublin and her surroundings, taken a trip down to the Dingle Peninsula , kissed the Blarney Stone at Blarney Castle, gazed at the Cliffs of Moher , and visited the Dark Hedges of Game of Thrones fame – to name but a few of our wonderful experience on the Irish Isle.

In Dublin there’s the Guinness Factory, of course, as a popular highlight, but also oodles of Gaelic history and culture to get excited about.

There are also of course the Irish people, well known for their love of a good time! Personally, I’d head on down the coast from Belfast, through Dublin and down to the port of Rosslare, where after three exciting days in Ireland another ferry service will whisk you across to the last of the four countries to make up the UK: Wales!

Day 13: South Wales and Cardiff

In Wales you will arrive either at Fishguard or Pembroke – both excellent places to explore the Pembrokeshire Coast national park . Here you will find beautiful beaches, rugged cliffs, and fabulous opportunities for walking.

You’re also not too far a drive from Cardiff, the Welsh capital. Four capitals in a fortnight – not bad going! Here you’ll find castles, sporting venues and more Welsh based culture than you can shake a stick at. Plus, arrive at the right time of year and you’ll find the Great British Cheese festival in full swing. What’s not to be excited about? For more about travelling in Wales and highlights along this route, see our detailed Wales road trip itinerary .

Find and book your Cardiff hotels here .

Day 14: Bristol & Bath

From Cardiff you’ll cross the enormous Severn estuary over the impress Severn road bridge and be back in the UK, or Bristol to be precise. Here you’ll find all sorts of interesting items of historical interest, largely running on a nautical theme, as well as some of the best street art in Britain .

For over a thousand years Bristol has been an important English port. From early explorers and traders, to the dark years of the African slave vessels, to filling Australia with immigrants, it is hard to understate the role that Bristol has played in Britain’s sea faring history. There is, after all, a reason for the expression “ship-shape and Bristol fashion” having a place in the English language.

I can highly recommend taking a trip round the SS Great Britain when you’re in Bristol. Built in 1843, and designed by the engineering genius who was Isambard Kingdom Brunel – the man who almost single-handedly revolutionised both engineering and public transport in the UK.

The SS Great Britain is notable as being the first steamer to cross the Atlantic – setting a record pace for the time of 14 days. An amazing bit of history. Note that tickets are slightly cheaper if you book them online, which you can do online here .

For more ideas in Bristol, check out our guide to things to do in Bristol , which should give you plenty of ideas to fill your time. Find the best prices on Bristol hotels and book here .

From Bristol it’s on to the Roman spa city of Bath, a world heritage site. Like Oxford , this is a difficult place to be anything other than a tourist, but it is so worth it all the same!

Day 15: Back to London, via Stonehenge!

Our last day of our just over two week UK itinerary takes us back to London. No trip to the UK though would really be complete without taking in perhaps our most famous monument – the circle of rocks known as Stonehenge.

There is just something about the place that makes you wonder. A circle of rocks, built by a people who had nothing but their hands and some bits of wood to help them out, in the middle of the Wiltshire countryside, hundreds of miles from an actual quarry, is just mind blowing.

Add in the pagan ritualism, the relationship between the rocks and the sun, and the sheer mystery of the place, and you have somewhere that is capable of really capturing the imagination. Worth your time to visit (see more thoughts from a trip to Stonehenge here ).

Plus, while you’re there you can pop into Salisbury and enjoy the cathedral, which boasts the highest cathedral spire of any church in the UK.

And then… back to London, where this tour finishes!

2 Weeks in the UK: Road Trip Map

Here’s a map of the route , for your reference.

2 Week UK Itinerary Summary

Days 1 & 2 : London
Days 3 & 4 : Oxford & the Cotswolds
Days 5 & 6 : Peak District and Manchester
Day 7 : York
Days 8 & 9 : Edinburgh via Northumberland
Days 10 – 12 : Ireland
Day 13 : South Wales and Cardiff
Day 14 : Bristol & Bath
Day 15 : Back to London, via Stonehenge!

Can you do this 2 Week UK itinerary by public transport?

A popular question from readers is whether or not this itinerary can be done by public transport. I appreciate that of course not everyone wants to drive in the UK, and the answer, for the most part, is yes.

Certainly, between the major cities on the itinerary there are good rail and/or bus links, with the train usually being a little faster. The main challenge is the rural sections of the route – for example, exploring the Cotswolds, Northumbria or the Peak District. This is possible using local buses of course, but it can definitely slow you down a fair bit, and so you would need to adjust the itinerary a little to fit the schedule.

Another option is to add in some days in London or Edinburgh, and doing some specific day trips from these cities to take in the out of town attractions.

For example, there is this day trip from London that takes in highlights such as Bath and Stonehenge. Then, for Northumbria and the Scottish Borders, including beautiful Alnwick Castle, consider this tour from Edinburgh .

If you are interested in doing this itinerary by public transport, check out my guide to taking a 10 day UK trip by public transport, which as well as a route, has lots of ideas for how to book different forms of transport in the most effective and cost-efficient way.

What About Touring the UK With A Tour Company?

Another popular question is whether or not this sort of trip can be done with a tour company, and if we have any companies we would recommend for this.

So you have a few options for doing this which I have outlined below.

The first option is to take a group tour of the UK. There are a number of companies offering small group tours – we’d recommend finding a service which operates tours of 15 people or less. We usually use and recommend Rabbie’s Trail Burners , who operate trips around the UK and Ireland, and have a number of tour options to choose from.

We haven’t found a tour that exactly matches our UK wide itinerary, but we still have a solution for those of you wanting the do a similar trip as part of a guided tour.

First, we recommend you spend two or three days in London, following our suggested London itinerary .

Next, we recommend you take something similar to this small group tour , which takes eight days to take you from London to Edinburgh.

In Edinburgh, you can spend a couple of days following our Edinburgh itinerary , after which you can easily fly to either Belfast or Dublin direct from Edinburgh.

Here you can either explore these lovely cities, or take a tour to explore more of the country, we’d recommend either this three day tour of Northern Ireland or this three day tour of the southern and western coast .

Alternatively, if you’d prefer to skip Ireland, you could take something like this five day tour of the Scottish Highlands and Skye .

Finally, you can either return to London, or have your flights home depart from Dublin or Edinburgh, depending on your tour choice.

The other option is a bespoke tour company and/or a private tour guide, who will be able to put a tour together for you, including guiding, transport and accommodation.

Of all the options, this will generally be the most expensive way to travel, but it will also give you total flexibility in terms of your trip and schedule, plus you’ll have a guide with you every step of the way, taking all the hassle out of your trip.

For this sort of tour, we recommend the services of Robina Brown, who is a blue-badge guide offering tours across the UK. See her website here .

When to Visit the UK

You can visit the UK at any time of year, although for the best weather and longer daylight hours, we’d definitely suggest visiting in the warmer months – from May to September. May is probably our favourite time of year, the weather is usually quite reasonable but the tourist crowds are not too intense.

Christmas, and the period leading up to Christmas, can also be a wonderful time to visit, when the streets and shops are all brightly lit and decorated for the festive season. For a good example of this, check out our guide to visiting Edinburgh at Christmas .

Where to Stay in the UK:

For accommodation , there are a great many options to choose from, ranging from cosy B&B’s through to upmarket hotels, and everything in between. Finding the best deal on your accommodation is an important part of trip planning – helping you to get the most from your budget, as well as find the property that is right for you.

We’ve tried a lot of booking sites, and nearly always find ourselves using Booking.com. They have an extensive selection of properties, many with no-fee cancellation policies, and often run discounts and special offers. Click on each city title to see their listings: London , Oxford , Manchester , York , Edinburgh , Dublin , Cardiff and Bristol .
If you prefer an apartment or more of a hosted stay, then we recommend Plum Guide . We’ve tried all the others, and in our experience Plum Guide consistently has the highest quality options for the locations they are available.
If you can’t find what you want on Plum Guide, or you want some new options to try out, we wrote a whole post on the best alternatives to AirBnB , as well as a guide to our favourite holiday cottage accommodation in the UK , which you should check out!

Between these options, you should find the best prices and places to stay for your trip, as well as a good selection of reviews and feedback to help you make an informed decision.

How to Get Around the UK

For this kind of trip I also obviously recommend that you look into renting a car. We have used and can recommend Enterprise Car Rental , they usually have great rates, especially for one way rentals. We also recommend comparing car prices using a service like Discover Cars , which compares prices across a range of providers to help you find the best deal.

A hire car will give you a lot more flexibility than public transport, and prices are generally fairly reasonable. However, if you would prefer to do a trip like this by public transport instead of driving yourself, check out our UK itinerary by public transport for ideas.

Another option for travelling in the UK is to hire a motorhome. Whilst this might not be practical for a city focused trip, you might prefer it if you are planning on visiting more rural locations.

For campervan rental we suggest checking out Motorhome Republic . They offer a campervans from a range of companies at different price points, so you can find the right one for you. You can see their UK listings here .

There are 219 comments on this post

Please scroll to the end to leave a comment

25th February 2024 at 6:30 pm

Hello, we are planning a trip this summer. On my list is scotch tasting in Islay. How many days should we add? Do you have any recommendations?

Laurence Norah says

25th February 2024 at 9:28 pm

Sure thing. Islay is beautiful and very much worth a visit. I’d suggest spending a couple of day at least if you can spare it as it takes a bit of time to get to and from the island and there is plenty to see and do there. I have a guide to things to do on Islay which might help. In terms of whisky distilleries, if you have a favourite whisky that I’d obviously recommend going to that distillery. My favourite whisky is Laphroaig, so I enjoyed visiting that distillery particularly. However my guide to Islay lists all the currently active ones so you can make a choice as to which one you prefer.

Have a great trip!

Marcelo Gurgel says

18th January 2024 at 11:52 pm

Hello ! Your post is very good ! I would like to do a similar tour, but on a motorcycle. Including Isle of Man where the TT Isle of Man race will take place. Please for I leave the bike on the London side and take the Ferry by foot and the best option? Cheaper in this case? How much do ferries generally cost? Where do I search for tickets and itineraries? Thanks a lot for the help !

19th January 2024 at 12:02 am

Hi Marcelo,

Thank you! So the only company which operates ferries to the Isle of Man is the Isle of Man Steam Packet Company, and the best way to book a ferry is directly on their website here . They operate services from Heysham, Liverpool, Belfast and Dublin.

If you plan on visiting during the TT race then you should book as soon as you can as this is a very popular event.

The price will vary depennding on when you go but it is definitely less expensive to go as a foot passenger. Looking at a route, it’s around £40 – £50 one way for a foot passenger, and £120 – £140 for a passenger with a bike. However, remember that you will need to pay to park your bike somewhere secure, and you will also need to have transport on the Isle of Man. Also, at more popular times, such as during the TT races, prices can be higher.

I hope this helps, let me know if you have any more questions! Safe travels!

PAUL BASILE says

10th December 2023 at 10:20 pm

stumbled across your blog and was pleasantly surprised! my wife and I will arrive in London on 6/19/24 in advance of Wimbledon where we’ll be staying from 7/5 though 7/10. we want to sorta do your route in reverse, heading out of London straight away renting a car, and heading out. we have around 2 weeks and want to start heading to Ireleand, then Scotland, then visiting cousins in Durham in northern GB, returning car in London before wimbeldon.

would love to get some advice on that reverse route, forgoing the London stuff until later, but wanting your insights on anything else! thanks in advance!

13th December 2023 at 12:19 am

It’s great to hear from you. So you can do the route either way without any issue. The main thing if you do decide to include Ireland is to be sure to check if the car rental company you choose allows you to take the car on a ferry to Ireland. Some will and some won’t, you’ll just want to confirm before booking. Otherwise I think you have the structure of a good itinerary. You can follow my route and just adjust it to suit your interests and available time. I’d definitely recommend booking in advance for places to stay and the ferries as you are coming at a popular time for travel so things will start to book up. Otherwise, just have a great time and let me know if you have any questions!

13th December 2023 at 2:38 am

Lawrence….thanks so much…great info on the ferry and booking places….do you have a fav booking site for places to stay?

13th December 2023 at 3:37 am

It’s my pleasure! We primarily use Booking.com when we travel because we like the filters. We usually filter by rating (8+) and then depending on the trip things like having free parking (handy for a road trip). Then things like WiFi, laundry, free breakfast, free cancellation, depending on what we are doing. Also like that you can apply the filters to the map view (again, handy for road trips). You can also book apartments. We also use various other sites depending on where we are going, some places have more AirBnB options. In the UK we also book holiday cottages but for a trip like yours which will likely have more shorter stops I’d say hotels or B&Bs are likely to be an easier option as apartments often have the extra overhead of needing to arrange check in and check out times.

Let me know if I can help any further 🙂

Linda Haddock says

2nd December 2023 at 7:38 am

Hello, thank you for this helpful blog! Do you have any recommendations on when, where and what to include for sites for a JRR Tolkien fan?

2nd December 2023 at 8:46 pm

It’s my pleasure. So Oxford would be my main recommendation as it was here that Tolkien studied and worked. Fun side story, a dear friend of mine was Tolkien’s Doctor and knew him well, although he has now passed. Anyway, Tolkien studied at Exeter Collge in Oxford and was also a fellow at Pembroke College and Merton College, so many of the sights in Oxford like the Radcliffe Camera and Ashmolean museum would be of interest. The Bodeleian Library in Oxford (the Radcliffe Camera is part of this) does have the originals of many of his works but these are not usually on display unfortunately.

I hope this helps a bit! Have a lovely time in the UK and do let me know if you need any more input 🙂

Ingrid Ermanovics says

24th May 2022 at 3:45 pm

Hi, Love your blog. I hear that the traffic in July can be daunting and cause very long delays. As such, would you still recommend a private car hire (car rental)? Or have other suggestions to avoid the issue? Thanks!!

24th May 2022 at 4:33 pm

Thanks very much! So in my experience, the main factors that contribute to traffic in the UK are road works, which can happen at any time, and travelling at specific times. For example, when there is a public holiday on a Monday or Friday, this tends to lead to a lot of holiday traffic. So avoiding those dates makes a lot of sense. July is not particularly worse in my experience, it can be a bit heavier, but it’s not normally awful unless you are unlucky and encounter an accident, or there are road works. I would advise against trips on Friday or Sunday afternoons, as this is when the traffic can be quite bad at any time of year as people go away for or come back from the weekends.

I’d also advise using an app like Google maps with real time traffic, and trying to plan your travel times so they don’t align with the busier times of day. In general though, i would still recommend using a car rental even in July 🙂

I hope this helps!

Debbie Hebert says

16th May 2022 at 12:16 am

Hi Laurence and Jessica, this trip looks super fun and we are looking to visit July-Aug of this year starting in Dublin (as the airfare is best to there from our home in New Orleans). Just a few questions. Would you suggest going North or South from Dublin? How many miles is the entire itinerary? Is there is a stretch where we could ditch the rental car and take the train and then pick up another car? And/or if we drop off the car before and after London and train in which cities would be best to do that? Thank you so much!

16th May 2022 at 3:11 pm

Thanks Debbie!

So I’d probably recommend dropping the rental car in Belfast or Dublin and then flying across to Cardiff or Edinburgh, depending which way you go. Many car rental firms don’t allow for rentals to be taken on the ferry, plus you have to pay more to transport a car, so this would likely save you money.

Direction wise in Ireland, it really depends what you want to see. In the Republic of Ireland you have lovely landscapes and places like the Dingle peninsula and Ring of Kerry. If you head north to Belfast (also a lovely city), then you can visit places like the Giant’s Causeway and the Coastal Causeway route.

Putting a mileage total on the entire itinerary is tricky as there are likely to be many detours but I’d say a ballpark of 1500 – 2000 miles seems about right. In terms of areas where you can drop the car and take public transport, a lot of this will depend on what you want to see. If you are happy with primarily cities, then you can easily get around between cities with a train instead of a car. So for example, Edinburgh to York, York to Manchester, Manchester to Bath and Bath to Oxford would all work. Then if there were specific day trips you wanted to do there’s the option to either rent a car for that day, or take a day tour. But if you are thinking of spending more time in the countryside and smaller towns, then a car would be a lot less useful. I’d definitely recommend against taking a car into London, and dropping it off somewhere like Oxford or Reading before taking the train into London.

Farooq Ghouri says

6th May 2022 at 2:56 am

Hi Laurence and Jessica We are visiting UK this summer for two weeks. Your two weeks itinerary is great resource for us. I wonder how we can squeeze Wales in it . Any suggestions will be much appreciated We will be using rental car Sincerely Farooq Ghouri from Chicago USA

6th May 2022 at 9:44 am

Thanks very much! So the southern part of Wales is included in this trip on the return from Ireland. However, if you wanted to add Wales your main option would be to do it as you drive north, or to consider skipping Ireland and to drive back down through Wales to Bath. The second option might be easier as it cuts down having to think about a ferry / flight across to Ireland, but it’s up to you. This itinerary is already very busy, so adding more to it as it exists would be a bit of a challenge in my opinion.

Let me know if I can offer any further advice, and have a great time in the UK!

6th May 2022 at 5:06 pm

Thank you much Laurence I will keep your suggestion in mind when finalizing the itinerary

Heather says

28th April 2022 at 2:35 am

I noticed your recommended the The Resident Victoria and I was wondering if I could ask you a few questions. I will be travelling with 3 people, one of which is a full time wheelchair user. Do you think the room size is adequate for a 5 day visit? Did you happen to notice if the showers were roll in or a wet room with chair? I realize most hotels only have accessible showers and whatnot in certain rooms so will understand if you don’t know. I found your travel blog a month ago and love it. Thanks from Canada

28th April 2022 at 12:01 pm

Hi Heather,

Sure thing. So, the first thing to be aware of is that rooms in central London tend to be quite small, especially if you are used to the size of hotel rooms in North America. Another thing to be aware of is that baths are quite common, and having a shower over the bath rather than a separate stall is also fairly common. So if looking for an accessible room it’s really important to specify that, and it’s always worth checking with the hotel what that actually means.

I would say that none of the rooms in the Resident Victoria would really be suitable for three adults to share for a longer stay, if that was what you were thinking. The superior rooms do have the option for three single beds, but these are not accessible rooms. In general, the rooms are fairly compact and I think a wheelchair user in particular would struggle in their standard rooms.

If you were thinking of separate rooms, some of their King Rooms are accessible so that would be an option. I called the hotel this morning and they confirmed that it is their King rooms which are accessible and the showers in these rooms are fully roll in. The toilets and sinks are also accessible. They can also provide a chair in the shower if you want. However these are definitely rooms for two people.

I hope this answers your question! The property is very well located for sure. Let me know if I can offer any further advice. I also have a full guide to where to stay in London which has a lot more options 🙂

13th April 2022 at 11:47 pm

Hi Laurence,

Was very interesting to read this trip. But it’s more suitable for adults without kids to travell to Ireland within two weeks. Can you please look for following trip plan: We are 2 adults + 2 kids (12 and 10) for 14 days. My daughter likes Harry Potter, so preference on these kind of attractions. So i wanted to divided for following parts: 1. London 5 days –>>> museums, parks and so on. 2. Warner Bros. Studio Tour London 1 day 3. Oxford or Cambridge .. yet not decided… for one day + Windsor Castle 4. Rent a car(or by train) and drive to the north >> York 1 day Manchester + Alton Towers – 1 day 5. Drive to south Birmingham (Cadbury world + other attractions) – 1 day Costwolds area – 1 day Bath + Stonehenge – 1 day Total 12 + 2 days (driving + bufffer for other changes during the trip)

Do you think is it good? What to add or remove? Or continue to Edinburgh and cancel some places in current trip? Thanks in advance Sam

14th April 2022 at 11:23 am

Great to hear from you. I agree, trying to include Ireland on the trip would be challenging with family. I think your itinerary sounds good, spending more time focusing on a smaller number of areas is a good choice. For your options, I think I might suggest Oxford over Cambridge if your daughter likes Harry Potter as there are quite a few filming locations in Oxford (see the Oxford section of our Harry Potter guide here ). I would also probably allocate a whole day to Oxford and maybe do Windsor Castle on one of your days in London. Oxford is very easy to reach by train from London so makes an easy day trip, but the day might feel rushed if you include Windsor as well.

I think otherwise your itinerary sounds good. A car will make things easier for sure, especially for things like exploring the Cotswolds and getting to Alton Towers. These are doable by public transport but it will take up valuable time. I also think focusing on England is a good idea. Depending on how much of a Harry Potter fan your daughter is you might consider stopping at Gloucester as well to see Gloucester Cathedral, which was used for various Hogwarts scenes .It’s a spectacular cathedral and lovely city in its own right as well, easy to see in 2-3 hours between Birmingham and Bath before dipping into the Cotswolds.

Have a great trip – let me know if you have any questions!

Vincent Choo says

12th April 2022 at 11:04 am

Laurence, My family and I ( 4 of us intend to tour Great Britain for 2 weeks before joining our friends in Belfast to continue another 10 days covering the island of Ireland. We intend to travel with a combination of car, train , ferry and air and hope to have your recommendation on which sectors should I use the above modes of transport. The intineary is roughly the same as your 2 weeks ( loop from London and ends there ) Thank You

12th April 2022 at 2:43 pm

Hi Vincent!

This is a great question, and the answer will come down to both budget and your interests.

If you are primarily interested in cities and larger towns, then travelling by rail might be easier for the majority of your trip. You can get between most cities and towns quite easily by train, and if you book well in advance you can also get cheap fares. You can also use a Friends & Family railcard to save even more. Travelling by train has the advantage that you don’t have to worry about car rental costs, fuel costs and finding car parking, the latter of which can be a challenge in many cities. I’d definitely advise against a car in London at the very least.

If you prefer a mix of city sightseeing and countryside, then a car is going to be more useful as most countryside sights and places like the Lake District are going to be a lot easier to get to and around with your own vehicle. I’d just suggest leaving the car out of the London part of the trip, and remembering to think about parking and fuel prices as part of your budget. I think a car might end up being slightly more expensive than public transport, but honestly the car rental market is so turbulent these days it’s hard to know without doing the math.

My recommendation would be to fly to Ireland – low cost flights with budget airlines will likely be the best option, and most car rental companies actually don’t allow for their vehicles to go on a ferry. Then you could pick up a hire car in Ireland on arrival.

It sounds like you have a great trip planned – let me know if I can offer any more input!

Sanchay says

7th April 2022 at 8:05 pm

Hello, Im planning a 2 week trip which shall include England, Wales, Ireland and Scotland during the month of October 2022. Is it feasible to cover all the places in 2 weeks considering that we are a group of 6 adults and 2 children ( 11 and 12 yrs) or shall we skip any of the destinations. We shall use Public transport in London and prefer Self drive cars / Trains / Ferries elsewhere. I also want to know if you could share some ranch stays where in we can stay and enjoy the country side instead of hotels. Awaiting your kind suggestion

Thanks and Regards 🙂

8th April 2022 at 11:04 am

Hi Sanchay,

Thanks for your comment. So I would probably recommend that you focus on maybe a couple of countries so you can enjoy yourself a bit more. I would probably recommend perhaps the mainland UK, as the extra effort required to get across to Ireland will eat into your time with two weeks. So perhaps a trip which includes London and Edinburgh, and then areas like the Lake District and / or Wales. One thing to be aware of is that the weather in October can be a bit variable, so spending more time in the cities might be more appealing rather than the country side where the weather might not be suitable for a lot of outdoor activities. Of course, you might be lucky and get good weather, but this is not guaranteed.

For ranch stays, probably the closest in the UK would be countryside B&Bs. Some farms do have accommodation option, and there are some lovely self catering options in the country as well.

Have a great trip and let me know if you have any further questions!

Derek Bowen says

2nd June 2021 at 5:16 pm

A really good trip, but I would skip Manchester and head right up through Rawtenstall, up through Burnley and Nelson. This would be a really good look at the cotton industry as well a real feel of northern England, as well as the best fish and chips. Then carry on up through Skipton, trying to time market day, and over to York, which is a must.

3rd June 2021 at 12:53 pm

Thank you Derek! For sure, there are so many ways to change this route depending on interests, and your suggestion is a good one 😀

Patrick Russell says

22nd March 2021 at 5:18 pm

This is absolutely amazing itinerary. What would a rough cost be for a trip like this? Minus airfare, and passports.

Thank you, Patrick

22nd March 2021 at 5:23 pm

Thanks Patrick! So it will vary quite a bit depending on your travel style. The main costs on a trip like this are transport, accommodation, food and attraction entry. Accommodation will obviously depend on how comfortable you like to travel, and food will also vary a lot depending on if you prefer fine dining or simpler fare.

To help cost a trip like this I put a guide to the costs of travelling in the UK in a post, which should give you some guidance 🙂

https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/cost-travel-uk/

Hope this helps!

Matthew says

8th December 2020 at 2:51 pm

Interesting itinerary. As a British person, rather than a traveller, my comment would be it doesn’t have much of the coast in, though I understand the time constraints. But a trip to the UK with no seaside towns! At least add Brighton, easy to reach from London. Dorset isn’t too far either, and has a fantastic coast. Also, Chester is beautiful and well worth inclusion.

8th December 2020 at 2:52 pm

Hey Matthew,

Great feedback. When I wrote this guide initially it was in response to a specific request, but of course there is so much of the UK that it doesn’t cover for various reasons (including time restraints!). I always encourage folks to use it as a rough guide, but to modify it for their own interests 🙂

Thanks for stopping by!

Tammy Howard says

25th February 2020 at 11:07 pm

Dear Laurence,

Thank you so much for this itinerary. It is fabulous!! We would like to sleep in a castle while on our trip. Are there any that you know of that allow this along this route?

26th February 2020 at 11:20 am

Dear Tammy,

My pleasure! So yes, there are quite a few options along the route, depending on your budget. Some options to consider:

Thornbury Castle – just north of Bristol

Glenapp Castle – just south of the Scotland – Ireland ferry crossing. We’ve stayed here and it’s wonderful

Kilkea Castle Hotel – south of Dublin. We’ve also stayed here.

Cringletie Castle Hotel – about a 40 minute drive south of Edinburgh. Another of our favourites.

Of course, this is just a small selection – there are many more across the UK to choose from, at a range of budgets. One tip when staying in a castle hotel – some of them have built more rooms outside the castle itself. So make sure when booking that you get a room that inside the castle (I think otherwise it sort of defeats the point!).

Have a great trip, let me know if you have any more questions!

Abdiaziz says

29th February 2020 at 8:27 am

How much will I pay if I want to travel next month

29th February 2020 at 10:14 am

Hi Abdiaziz,

March is not too busy a month for travel in the UK, so prices should be reasonable. To figure out your costs for this trip, see our guide to how much it costs to travel in the UK 🙂

Dhaval says

3rd February 2020 at 9:17 am

Hi Laurence, Thanks a lot for this amazing itinerary. We are a group of 4 adults + 4 kids (1Y,3Y,5Y,7Y) and are planning a 15 days trip to the UK. This will be our first time. Can you please assist us with the below queries:-

1. Considering we have small kids, what is the best mode of transport to travel from London to Edinburgh to Dublin? Should we keep one separate day for travelling in our itinerary? We will also have Kids Strollers everywhere we travel. 2. We want to do Day tours from London to Oxford, Cotswold, Stonehenge, Bath etc keeping our base in London. But few of my friends suggested that the Local operators don’t include kids below 5Years and we will be forced to take a rent a car. Any suggestions? 3. Also if we follow your above itinerary, can you guide us the exact cities in which we need to book our apartments/hotels to avoid hassle-free travelling.

Thanks a lot in Advance. Cheers 🙂

3rd February 2020 at 2:45 pm

My pleasure 🙂 I will do my best to help of course. To answer your questions:

1 – From London to Edinburgh I would recommend the train. This takes around 4.5 hours and will be a lot quicker than driving / taking a bus, plus you will have more space for your stroller / bags etc. You could fly too, but as it will take time to check everything in, go through security etc, I think the train will be easier. Just be sure to book your train well in advance to get a good price, and be aware that if you book a ticket in advance, you must take the booked train, the ticket will not work on a different train, even on the same day.

For Edinburgh to Dublin, your only option is realistically to fly.

2 – This is correct, for safety reasons most group tours do not accept children under a certain age, which is often 5. However, you can instead book a private tour. For a group of eight of you this should not work out much more expensive than a normal tour, plus you will be able to customise the itinerary. So I would advise reaching out to private tour operators who should be able to assist.

3 – All the cities are in the itinerary, you would need to stay in whichever ones you want to visit that don’t fall within the day tours you wish to take from London.

I hope this helps – have a great trip and let me know if I can help any further,

Serafina Macdonald says

11th January 2020 at 9:09 pm

Hi there, we are planning a trip to England, Scotland, and Ireland at the beginning of July. We are thinking about 16-18 days. I looked at your itinerary and love your suggestions! My husband does want to spend a half-day in Liverpool and I think we can tweak your itinerary to fit it in and try to do Isle of Skye as well. Since we do have the few extra days at the end of the trip, do you think it would be worthwhile to travel over to the other coast of Ireland to explore that side? (Galway, Aran Islands). Would love some suggestions.

11th January 2020 at 9:18 pm

Hi Serafina!

So Liverpool would definitely be an easy addition to the itinerary. The Isle of Skye is a bit more of a trek, as it’s a five hour drive each way from Edinburgh, so I’d suggest allocating at least 3 days for that, one day each for the drive and one day to actually explore. So do keep that in mind.

For Ireland, absolutely. The west coast is stunning, and if you can find time to head over there I would definitely suggest doing so. There’s a lot to see over there, so the hardest part will be choosing, but certainly the Cliffs of Moher, Dingle Peninsula and Ring of Kerry are some good candidates for your shortlist 🙂

Have a great time, and let me know if you have any more questions!

12th January 2020 at 2:15 pm

Thanks so much! Looking forward to this trip!

3rd December 2019 at 9:40 am

Dear Laurence, This is the first time I visit UK so could you help give a good advice to have plan visit UK during time 24th Dec- 08th Jan

Thanks Duong

3rd December 2019 at 6:11 pm

Thanks for your message. The majority of the information you need should be available on the site, both in this post and in the posts I link to. I am happy to try and help answer any specific questions you might have – is there anything in particular you are worried about?

The main things I would suggest, depending on where you are travelling from, are to plan what you want to see, to plan your accommodation and transport, and to pack properly for winter. Obviously you are visiting over Christmas and New Year, which is a busy time of year, so if you have not booked your accommodation yet you will definitely want to look into that, especially over New Year as that can be a busy time for both travel and accommodation.

Let me know if I can offer any more specific help for your trip,

Hang Tran says

26th November 2019 at 3:59 pm

Hi Laurence, Thank you for your advice and emails. I was able to put together our 2-week itinerary in England. I changed our lodging to London instead of Heathrow and booked different places when we travel around with our Britrail passes. I can’t say thank you enough. It’s very helpful for us. We will stay in London (3 days), Edinburgh (3 days:Edinburgh and York), Bristol for 5 days, Bath for 2 days and travel to other nearby cities (Stonehenge, Oxford, Cardiff) by train to make one-day trip. Is it right time to visit Cardiff in winter? If not, do you have any other places to spend a day? We’re thinking about Liverpool but it takes about 3-hours ride. If so, what should we can see in such a short time in Liverpool? We never ride a train before so we don’t mind riding the train everyday and enjoy the view together.

26th November 2019 at 5:20 pm

I am so pleased to have been able to help you and to hopefully make your trip a memorable one. It sounds like you have a wonderful itinerary planned now.

I would say that Cardiff is fine to visit in winter. Like many cities in the UK, lots of the attractions are indoors, so you can visit at any time of year and have a good time. Obviously you’ll want to dress warmly, but this will be the same all around the UK. Cardiff will definitely be one of the easier places to visit given its proximity. Another option would be Birmingham. I think I would probably not do Liverpool from Bristol – the 3 hour trip each way would be 6 hours on a train, so I don’t think you’d really have enough time to enjoy the city.

Let me know if I can be of any further help! We actually live in Bath too, so maybe we’ll see you 😉

28th November 2019 at 5:30 am

Hi Laurence, Thank you for the suggestion. We will look into Birmingham instead of Liverpool. We might be able to meet you for breakfast or lunch in Bath on Dec 22 or 23. I was able to find a place to stay that we can walk up or down the street to get to Bath Spa. Everything is in walking distance. Thanks to you again.

Sincerely, Hang

28th November 2019 at 7:22 pm

My pleasure – have a lovely trip. Do pop a comment here or send me an e-mail if you have some free time!

Laurel says

9th October 2019 at 7:23 am

Hi, love your itinerary of the UK. It includes much of what we want to see. Howev r, we are a senior couple of nomads from Australia and we are trying to organise a four week trip of the UK and Ireland including the islands off Scotland but we are steam train buffs and have the 10 best day trips on steam trains to try to include. Do you help with itinerary planning to include as many of these as we can but in some sort of order? If not can you head us in the right direction? We don’t need London as we have a couple of days there prior to a cruise of Norway. Is it feasible to do this trip in September and will he days still be long and fairly warm? Thanks in anticipation for your advice.

9th October 2019 at 6:16 pm

Thanks very much! So we don’t offer custom itinerary planning as it’s quite a time intensive process. We’re happy to answer specific questions and help where we can of course. Steam trains aren’t really an area of expertise though!

I can definitely answer your questions about September – I’d say September is a great month to travel. If you are lucky it might still be reasonably warm (recent years have been lovely in September), but you skip the crowds of the summer months and the schools will have gone back as well. September and May are our favourite months to travel. Of course, this is the UK, so rain and cooler weather is certainly possible (although you can get this in July and August as well!), so it’s always best to be prepared with layers of clothing, but you should be fine generally. The days will still be long, light until around 8pm depending on which part of the month you visit 🙂

Have a great trip, and let me know if I can answer any more specifics!

Kevin Ortyl says

19th September 2019 at 6:51 pm

Love the website and your two-week itinerary. Very easy to follow.. So glad we found your site. Need advice please… (Coming from Boston, USA) Thinking of a two-week vacation late August 2020 (family of 4… 2 college age kids) flying into London and out of Dublin. So similar trip you outlined but not returning to Heathrow once in Ireland. Planning on rental car and driving everywhere. Can the one way car rental work in this scenario (London, Scotland, ferry to the Emerald Isle, drop rental at Dublin)? Second Q… if we were to eliminate the Wales back to London segment how would you fill in that itinerary staying in Ireland?

19th September 2019 at 7:20 pm

Thanks very much. So dropping off the car in a different country might be a challenge. Most car rental companies will let you drop the car off in a different part of the same country, but as the Republic of Ireland is separate from the UK, that would likely be a challenge. So your best option is probably to rent the car in the UK, then drop it off at Edinburgh airport and fly to Dublin, then pick up a new rental there.

For your time in Ireland, you have a lot of options! If you are looking for a road trip the Causeway Coastal Route in northern Ireland is a favourite of ours, and the Wild Atlantic Way is also a great drive. Of course there is so much to see in Ireland and Northern Ireland depending on what you are interested in, with both Dublin and Belfast being worth a visit. It would just depend if you wanted to do more city or more country 🙂

Let me know if I can be of any more help – we have quite a few posts on Ireland as well on the site with some ideas!

19th September 2019 at 9:58 pm

Thank you for the reply, and the good information regarding rental cars.

To follow up, once in Ireland probably interested in seeing some of the quaint cities/towns, visit the pubs, little urban culture, castles, etc and those types of places in lieu of say hiking and biking. Hoping of course between destinations to see beautiful countryside and such!

20th September 2019 at 9:02 am

My pleasure 🙂 So I would suggest that driving the Causeway Coastal Route ( https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/causeway-coastal-route-northern-ireland/ ) Might be a good option 🙂

4th September 2019 at 2:13 am

Hi Laurence, I really like the two week trip itenerary. We’ll will be driving and are experienced with that. We’d like to see some worthy gardens along the suggested route. Any ideas?

4th September 2019 at 7:02 pm

Certainly. The gardens at Alnwick Castle are wonderful, as are the gardens at many of the stately homes in the UK (you can see our list of good stately homes in England here ). Not all of them have gardens of course, but that’s a good starting point. Many cities also have botanic gardens, including Edinburgh and Kew Gardens in London, which are well worth the visit.

I hope this helps a little 🙂

Rachel Sales says

16th August 2019 at 5:15 am

Hi! This post gave me lots of ideas. However, can you help me out in modifying this itinerary which will make Edinburgh as the last stop? My flight booking is DXB-LHR, EDI-DXB. I thought it will be nice it it’s an onward journey and not have to go back to my starting point. Thank you in advance!

16th August 2019 at 12:12 pm

Glad to be able to help! So as this itinerary is a loop, it’s a bit challenging to modify it that easily. My suggestion would perhaps be to drop Ireland from your trip, and instead to spend more time in Scotland. So you could follow the itinerary up to Edinburgh, and then add in time exploring more of Scotland before returning to Edinburgh. Let me know your thoughts,

Robin Major says

13th August 2019 at 12:53 am

Hello Lawrence,

I just found and love this site!! I’m trying to plan a 25th wedding anniversary trip for next September (2020) to surprise my hubby.

He’s never been to Europe. I was fortunate enough to get two and half lovely days in London a couple years back courtesy of my employer.

I’m not sure if what I want to do is totally doable though… No driving.. we would do transit and rail… I’m thinking a week in Britian and a week in Scotland. Maybe fly into London, spend two full days exploring the sites.. then I’m sort of lost. We are interested in Castles, love the supernatural aspect of York so that will be a must, definitely want to see Stonehenge.. and as odd as it sounds, my parents did Sherwood Forest and Nottingham on their 25th Wedding Anniversary many years ago so wondering if that would be a recommendation? Just not sure of the logistics for a week in Britian.. where to stay etc.

For Scotland, again, Castles and we are both big Outlander fans so we’ve have to see Loch Ness, Inverness and any and all sites made famous by Outlander. I am thinking a week up there and we fly home from either Glasgow or Edinburgh.

Do you have any suggestions/recommendations on an itinerary for us? I would greatly appreciate any knowledge you wish to share with me.

Thank you so much! Robin

13th August 2019 at 10:19 am

Thanks very much! It certainly would be possible 🙂 I’ve actually written a 10 day UK itinerary by public transport. Whilst the route isn’t exactly what you want, the post does have some useful information to help you plan your trip, especially around booking the trains etc. If you’ve not seen that post yet, it’s here:

https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/10-day-uk-itinerary-public-transport-train-bus/

Regarding your specific itinerary, I would suggest you start in London as you suggest. You could then take a day tour from London out to Stonehenge. This is doable by public transport, but is way easier as a day tour, plus they usually have some extra stops like Bath. You can read our guide to doing that here:

https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/Stonehenge-bath-cotswolds-day-trip-from-london/

So Nottingham is nice (I went to university there), but with limited time I wouldn’t say it was a must do. My suggestion would be to take the train from London to Oxford, and then up to York. A day in each location would work. You are now up to five days in England. Castles are a bit tricky by public transport as many of them are out of cities. I would perhaps suggest extending your time in London and taking the extra day to visit either Windsor Castle or Hampton Court Palace. From York you could head up to Durham which is a beautiful cathedral city.

From Durham the train to Edinburgh is not too far. I’d suggest basing yourself in Edinburgh for at least three days. Two days to explore the city, and then one day to take an Outlander tour. We have specifically done 1 day tour with Rabbies , and thought it was great. We have more suggested day tours from Edinburgh here:

https://independenttravelcats.com/day-trips-from-edinburgh-scotland/

From Edinburgh our recommendation would then be to take the train up to Inverness, from where you can explore more castles, Loch Ness and the Highlands. Again, plenty to do in this area, and there are lots of great day trips to plan. You can see our guide to some of the best here:

https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/day-trips-from-inverness-scotland/

I think that should give you plenty to work with – let me know if you have any more questions!

8th August 2019 at 9:35 pm

I just found this page and so glad I did especially your “Best Stately Homes in England” We will be visiting England and Scotland for 2weeks October 16-29, 2019 and I am excited about your itinerary. We have been to Northern Ireland (once)and Republic of Ireland (4 times) so we can leave those out, so are there any other places you might suggest? My husband has driven every time we have visited Ireland so he can handle a manual transmission. We land at Gatwick Airport and I thought we could head to Edinburgh via a easterly route and return to London via a westerly route. We do not have to travel only motorways but don’t wait too many small country lanes (did plenty of those in Ireland). Any suggestions you could make would be greatly appreciated. Love Manor Houses, Castles, rolling landscape, waterfalls, quaint English market towns or villages, etc. THANKS

9th August 2019 at 8:54 am

Sounds like you have a great trip planned, and I will certainly do my best to help. It sounds like your route is pretty good already, coming down the west side of the UK gives you the chance to pop into the Lake District, explore towns like Chester, and even larger cities like Birmingham. In terms of stately homes, well, I would obviously recommend the majority of those in my post on stately homes. I’d also add Edinburgh Castle of course if you like castles, as well as the more ruined Craigmillar Castle on the outskirts of Edinburgh. Alnwick Castle on the way up through Northumberland is stunning, as are many of the other castles in Northumberland, like Bamburgh and dunstanburgh. For rolling hills and greenery, the Lake District is lovely, but I can also recommend the Hadrian’s Wall area of Northumberland, particularly the area near Housesteads.

For quaint English towns, of course the Cotswolds would be by number one pick. The counties of Kent and Dorset are also good options.

I think that should get you started, let me know if you need some more ideas!

Christine Greentaner says

5th August 2019 at 12:26 pm

Hello!! I stumbled on your site asking google if I could do the this kind of trip and wow, here you are! Unsure of the driving though since we zero experience. However, this two week itinerary gives us something to start thinking about. Thank you so much!! Christine

7th August 2019 at 2:52 pm

Hi Christine!

Driving in the UK is definitely a bit different, especially if you are coming from a country where they drive on the right hand side. Also, if you’re coming from the USA, be aware that most cars in the UK have manual transmissions, so when you rent a car if you are not used to driving a manual you should specify an auto. I have a guide to driving in the Uk which you might also find useful 🙂

https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/tips-for-driving-in-the-uk/

Let me know if you have any questions, and have a great trip!

Danie marais says

11th July 2019 at 8:54 pm

What will it cost for 2 adults

12th July 2019 at 4:17 am

Hi Danie – this really depends on your travel style – you can see a guide to how much travel in the UK costs here for some estimates: https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/cost-travel-uk/

Margaret says

9th July 2019 at 6:29 am

HI , Just wanted to ask. I am getting a little a little worried,as our trip is getting closer and closer. Your site has helped so much. Does this sound ok to do. Day 1 arrive late afternoon explore Paddinton. Day 2 & 3 follow your 2 day guide of london sites. Day 4 train to oxford, free 2 hour tour. free time to explore oxford Day 5 train back to oxford ,pick up car. Drive to Cotswold explore.. Drive on up to peak district stay over night . 1 night Day 6 explore peak district , drive to Manchester and york .explore. Now I am unsure to travel to the Lake district Or follow onto Alnwick. as some people say not to miss out on the lake district. We dont have enought time to cut back over to Alnwick unsure . We arrive in paddington on the 20th want to leave Edinburgh 31st. So take into account at least 2 night in Edinburgh and head onto Belfast. We will then explore Belfast and Dublin for 2 weeks as we have friends there. follow onto wales Bath but we do want to stay in Southampton for two days once again friends. Can you get to Heathrow airport from Southampton We have 5.5 weeks for this trip but I do want to spend time with friends in Belfast and Dublin. I am so over whelmed .

10th July 2019 at 5:43 am

Hi Margaret!

First, I’m delighted we’ve been able to help 🙂

Your comment covers a few points so I will try to help where I can. For your itinerary, the first six days look good, the only feedback I would offer is that trying to do the Peak District, Manchester and York in one day is likely going to be too much. Even Manchester and York in one day is quite a bit. York would need at least four hours to fully enjoy it, so I might suggest skipping Manchester unless you are particularly invested in it.

For your Lake District dilemma, I can’t really answer this for you. Everyone has a different idea as to what is “unmissable”, so it really depends on your priorities and interests. The Lake District is certainly very pretty, but so is much of the UK 😉

From Southampton you can definitely get to Heathrow airport. It takes around 2 hours by train. It’s not a direct train though, so you do have to change, but it shouldn’t be too difficult. If you would prefer a direct route, I believe National Express operates a coach service between the two locations.

I think for the rest of your trip you might want to reach out to your friends and ask for their advice in terms of what to see and do. I would try to relax and enjoy yourself instead of trying to see everything and becoming overwhelmed if you can. Travel is definitely a bit of work, but ultimately it is supposed to be fun. I always find that the less planned adventures are the more fun ones. So certainly come up with a framework, but don’t spend too much time worrying about it to the tiniest detail, as it will likely detract from the enjoyment.

22nd July 2019 at 4:35 am

Thank you Laurence, Your advice is so helpful. I have added days, so we can get the most out of our trip 2 days in the Peak District, Manchester and 1 day for York. Now I am on the end part of our trip and once again would like some advice. : After spending 18 days exploring Ireland. We will be catching the ferry to Wales. 20th Fishguard pick up car, early afternoon explore the country driving towards Cardiff, Bristol Question : Unsure as to time length of time needed

I was thinking, see Cardiff, then drive towards Bristol arrive around tea time. sleep overnight and have full day to explore Bristol. 21st after exploring Bristol drive towards Bath. arrive around tea time, find somewhere to sleep for 2 nights (21st and 22nd) 22nd full day to explore Bath. 23 th drive toward Stonehenge, Amesbury, drive onto southamption return Car

24th southamption .explore Southamption see family member. we need to be at Hearthrow airport on the 26th at 9:20 flight take off , My next question is , Should I return to paddington for the 25th so I can get the express train to airport , Is my flight to early to return from southamption. Once again . please guide me. Margaret

22nd July 2019 at 6:03 pm

Hi Margaret,

My pleasure! I will try to help again. Your timings for Bristol / Bath etc seem reasonable. They are very close together, my only advice is to avoid travelling at rush hour (4pm – 6pm), as it will make your journey much longer due to the traffic.

For your second question, in theory you could get from Southampton to Heathrow in time, but it’s around a 2 – 2.5 hour journey. You’d want to check train times for the day you are going, but the earliest trains are around 5am based on my research, so you would get to Heathrow around 7.30am. So yes, it’s possible, but it depends how happy you are with an early start and also the risk of any train delays. Up to you, but personally I avoid early mornings at all costs, so would personally probably just find a hotel near Heathrow 😉

Diana Cottrell says

1st July 2019 at 1:57 am

Loved seeing your site. Very helpful since I’m trying to plan a driving vacation for my husband and myself and really didn’t know were to start. I have some questions but will start with only one. We were in London last year but I could go again. Loved it. Hubby sick and had a different feeling. Would it be hard for someone from the US to land at Heathrow and rent a car…then drive to Windsor right after landing? Is it far enough out of London to get comfortable with driving on a different side of the road?

1st July 2019 at 10:18 pm

So, funny story, after passing my UK driving test the first thing I did was rent a car and drive out of Heathrow! I’m not sure I’d exactly recommend it, you’d be driving onto one of the busiest motorways in the UK (our equivalent of a freeway) which might be quite stressful. It’s possible of course, and I’m sure many people do it, but I would advise caution. Also, make sure you specify you want an automatic as most cars in the UK are manual 🙂

3rd July 2019 at 12:01 am

Thanks for the information. Think we’ll skip Heathrow. How would landing in Edinburgh, then heading up through Scotland and back down England (maybe to Bath). Then going up through York and returning back to Edinburgh to return car.

3rd July 2019 at 2:57 pm

That would likely work quite well. My only advice, if you plan on spending time in Edinburgh, is not to pick up the hire car until you leave, as you won’t need it in the city and you’ll just be paying for car rental and parking for no good reason – the city is very walkable.

6th July 2019 at 11:11 pm

Thanks so much. Will start planning.

Amanda says

23rd June 2019 at 5:59 pm

This is such a great detailed itinerary! We are planning to get a rental car in Cambridge and then driving to Scotland from there, so some of these places we will definitely have to visit! I do have one question, about renting a car. Is there a boarder crossing fee or any other type of fee the rental company could charge to go from England to Scotland? We are planning to do a one-way trip so I know there is a fee for that, but in terms of crossing between the two countries is there a fee? When I read about the boarding crossing fee it was unclear to me if that is only if we leave the UK?

Thank so much!

23rd June 2019 at 6:02 pm

Thanks very much! There’s no fee or anything like that for crossing into Scotland, it’s not really a border like that. It’s all part of the UK, so it’s one country.

Opal joiner says

18th June 2019 at 1:37 pm

Hi Do I need to purchase a London pass and a heritage pass? Or just one pass?

18th June 2019 at 7:05 pm

It depends what you want to see and where you are travelling, but for London the London Pass will cover the majority of the attractions 🙂 I definitely recommend checking what they cover before purchasing though 🙂

Chris Ryan says

17th June 2019 at 8:44 am

From an English persons point of view this is an excellent itinerary. It would be good to include the Lake District and Snowdonia but to cover all this in two weeks would be a nightmare and far too much time on the road. The average Brit would allow at least a month for the whole trip. If only two weeks available I would suggest you save Ireland for another time, it’s sacrilage not to explore more of that country, and maybe see more of the west of Scotland instead.

17th June 2019 at 11:06 am

Thanks very much 🙂 I agree, I was actually born in Snowdonia and that part of the world is wonderful. Have spent many happy weekends camping in the Lakes as well. The itinerary was in response to a specific request – we normally encourage folks to slow down where possible and spend more time seeing and less time travelling, but unfortunately many people don’t have much leave to play with and want to try and see as much as possible 🙂

Lillie says

15th June 2019 at 2:56 pm

Hi! So glad to have stumbled upon your site, as I am planning this trip to the UK in October, and I didn’t even know where to begin. I like the idea of doing all the traveling by road ourselves since we’ll be traveling with our baby who will be 9 month old at the time. I was thinking 10 days, including Ireland, but would you consider that possible? We are really interested in doing the whiskey distillery tours in Scotland and anything and everything related to Harry Potter. We’re also interested in visiting landmarks like the cliffs and stonehenge. We’re usually good at squeezing in a lot in our vacations, but this will be the first time we travel with our son, so I don’t want to set ourselves up for failure either. Any advice on what to cut out or if we need to lengthen the trip?

15th June 2019 at 8:38 pm

So, first off, I have to say that we’re not really experts on travelling with children as we don’t have any of our own. So any advice I offer you is based on what friends and other readers have shared with us about the logistics of travelling with a young person. Of course, everyone’s experience will also be different.

Generally, most folks say that you definitely need to slow down when travelling with young children, as you have to factor in things like feeding, changes and so on. This will definitely vary though depending on age and individual personalities 😉

That said, you are trying to do a great deal in 10 days. Scotland and England are around a 6 – 7 hour drive apart, and if you want to get up into the Highlands you’re looking at another few hours. To then add Ireland would make it more of a challenge for sure. It’s not impossible of course, but it would definitely be rushed. It might be that you would be best off focusing on Ireland and Scotland on this trip, perhaps five days in each, rather than trying to see everything and just having a stressful time. Alternatively, add 3 or 4 days and include some time in England 🙂

I hope this helps a bit!

Ashok Agarwal says

15th June 2019 at 6:01 am

Wow. I looked up the WWW for a 2 week itinerary for the UK and am glad I clicked on your site, from the numerous options that sprang up. The information contained here is so so exhaustive. Not only did I get a fantastic plan but ab amazing read, too. We are planning our first visit to the UK in October and are going to follow your tips to the T. You guys are fantastic. Thanks.

15th June 2019 at 11:04 am

Thanks very much Ashok! Much appreciated 🙂

9th June 2019 at 9:56 am

Dear Laurence!

Thank you SOOOOO much for your inspirational itinerary and all other articles you provide here. They’re great help!

We are going to spend 15 days in UK in August and this is cause we’ve planned to take our son to Warner Bros HP Studio as we are all massive HP fans :). We’ll start and finish in London, though initially we want to hire a car at the airport and start a trip and spend couple of days in London in the end.

Could you kindly give us some advice / decide whether it is possible, to plan a trip considering these simple priorities: 1) we’d love to see Scotland with its green hills, waterfalls etc. 2) we would really like to visit Snowdonia 3) I guess Stonehenge is sth 8-year-old traveler to England must see 4) I personally have dreamt all my life too see PUFFINS (I mean – free puffins) 5) we can skip Irelnad, no problem 😉

I must admit – reading about UK – I am getting a bit lost in huge amount if options and sites one must visit, so I’d be grateful for some advice.

10th June 2019 at 10:57 am

My pleasure 🙂

So my first tip, if you haven’t already booked the Harry Potter Studio Tour is to do it as soon as possible as it books out well in advance 🙂 I also have a guide to visiting which you might have already seen, but just in case you haven’t, it’s here:

https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/taking-a-harry-potter-studio-tour-everything-you-need-to-know/

Then, on to the question of your itinerary. Assuming two days in London, that gives you around 12 – 13 days to play with. I would suggest you spend them as follows. Given that you are Harry Potter fans I’m also including some HP filming locations you might enjoy 😉

Day 1 – head to Oxford, overnight here. Lots of awesome history, plus lots of Harry Potter filming locations to explore. Day 2 – head to Bath via Stonehenge Day 3 – head up to Snowdonia. Will be a bit of a drive, but worth it. I’d advise a couple of days in Snowdonia to do some hiking and exploring the towns, castles etc. The roads are slower here so it will take longer go get around

Day 5 – Head across to York Day 6 – Drive up to Alnwick Castle, another HP filming location. Then continue on to Edinburgh. Day 7 & 8, Edinburgh. Lots to see, lovely castle. Where Rowling wrote many of the HP books. Note the Edinburgh festival will be on so the city will be very busy. If you decide to stay in Edinburgh, you need to book now. Also, if you want to see puffins, the Isle of May just near Edinburgh is one of the best places to get up close to them. You need to book a trip, which you can do here: https://seabird-centre.seafari-edinburgh.co.uk/forth-ferry-and-isle-of-may

Day 9 – head across to Loch Lomond and the Trossachs. Overnight here or in Oban Day 10 – head up to Fort William / Glencoe. You can ride the HP train from here, or go see the viaduct at least Day 11 – head down to Glasgow, overnight Day 12 – drive down to Liverpool, overnight Day 13 – return to London.

I would say that would be a good way to do it! We have lots more info on Harry Potter sites if you are interested: https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/london-harry-potter-locations/ https://independenttravelcats.com/guide-top-harry-potter-sites-in-edinburgh-scotland-jk-rowling/ https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/harry-potter-filming-locations-uk/ https://independenttravelcats.com/harry-potter-filming-locations-in-scotland/

10th June 2019 at 8:52 pm

Thank you a lot for your advice! The plan sounds great and we are definitely going to follow it step by step :)))

with best regards!

7th June 2019 at 9:00 am

Hi, what a great article! However, do you have any tips for hire car? Are there any fees/ extra charge or need to notice the supplier that the road trip route is involve Wales, Ireland and Scotland?

7th June 2019 at 8:37 pm

Thanks very much!

For driving in Wales and Scotland it won’t matter because they are part of the united Kingdom, so it’s still the same country.

The republic of Ireland however is a separate country, plus you have to take a ferry to get there. So that would be something you would need to check with the rental agency.

S. Steinback says

26th May 2019 at 9:16 am

Hi, my daughter and I are leaving mid August to the UK for 2 weeks. We are planning to start our trip in London. Then wanted to see Brighton, Cornwall, Wales and Scotland. We also want to see Bath and Oxford too. Is this doable using the train? We are unsure of how we should book our traveling using train, car or bus. Can you provide and manageable itinerary and recommendations on how we should travel from each place on a 2 week trip?

26th May 2019 at 11:04 am

Hi Sabrina,

So you should be able to see most of what you want to see by train. As an example, I’d suggest:

2 days in London 1 day in Brighton (train to Brighton takes about an hour, so can be done as a day trip from London or overnight) 1 day in Oxford (1 hour train from London to Oxford, overnight in Oxford) 1 day in Bath (1 hr 40 minute train from Oxford to Bath, overnight in Bath) 2 days in Cornwall (around 3 hours by train from Bath to Cornwall. You might want to take a tour in Cornwall as there is less public transport to get around) 3 days in Wales (train from Cornwall to Cardiff is around 3 – 4hours, but then you will have to plan how to get around Wales. Again a tour might be easiest) 3 days in Scotland (you can either fly from Cardiff to Glasgow / Edinburgh, or take the train, but the train will take around 8 hours)

I’d also suggest looking into Rabbie’s Trail Burners . They do a number of tours from London which might suit what you want to do and save you the hassle of planning. These cover the majority of the destinations you want to visit.

I hope this helps a bit with your planning!

Ed Hyland says

17th April 2019 at 12:01 am

Thankyou for your guide it was really helpful I am living in Argentina and j am planning on bringing Argentinian tourists to Wales and central England on a tour of castles and important historical sites .I plan on bringing groups of around 10 people and using a rented mini bus to move around. Do you have any helpful tips as this will be our first tour ,we are planning on visiting early September All the best .Ed,x

17th April 2019 at 10:56 am

My pleasure. So I don’t have any experience of running this kind of trip, so it’s tricky to give very specific advice. I am sure you have considered things like insurance and liability and so on, as well as any other legal requirements involved with running a tour.

THe only tips I have would be around admission to sights – there are usually group discounts available for attractions that you might be able to take advantage of, although you might need to call in advance to arrange these. I’d also advise to definitely book your accommodation in advance as you have a larger group.

Otherwise, I hope you have a great trip!

12th April 2019 at 12:04 am

I was planning this itinerary since I saw and had 15 days in the region. After more research I am now wondering what it takes to get a rental car from London to Ireland and back? Do you use the same car the entire trip, or would you switch cars at the water crossings in order to not have to pay to ferry the car across? Also I’ve heard rental agencies in England don’t really allow their rentals (or at least coverage) in Ireland? And yet another concern is time, I keep hearing that driving over there is quite a bit slower going than say the US, or by train, would this itinerary still give enough time to enjoy the locations or would it be quick stops and rushed in order to get to the next place? Sorry a lot of questions, just trying to decide if I need to break the trip up to just one or two countries. Thanks. And love you blogs and all the information and amazing photography.

12th April 2019 at 11:46 am

So it is certainly possible to take a hire car on the ferry, it just depends on the hire car company, and some of them charge a fee for doing so. Here’s an example of the Enterprise UK policy: https://www.enterprise.co.uk/en/help/faqs/driving-across-borders.html

Obviously you also then have to pay the ferry fee for the hire car as well. So an easier option to be honest is just to fly, for example to take a flight from Edinburgh to Belfast or Dublin. You would drop off the hire car in Edinburgh and pick up a new one in Belfast.

I appreciate this might be a bit of hassle, so certainly adjusting the itinerary so you skip Ireland is another option. In this case, I’d suggest either spending more time in Scotland, or coming down the west coast of the UK, visiting the Lakes and Wales.

The roads in the UK are definitely a bit busier and can also be slower than roads in the USA. This itinerary is definitely doable, but I’m always a fan of slowing down and seeing more, so that is a good option too 🙂

Let me know if you have any more questions!

David Cameron says

11th April 2019 at 1:56 pm

“You’ve packed up every possible solution in this one blog. I’m over the moon! I really am! How much would this trip cost, approximately? And if I’m going on this trip, Ireland will definitely be included coz from the moment I saw P.S I love you and Leap Year movie, I’ve been dreaming of visiting those places. Thank you. Thank you so much, Laurence !”

11th April 2019 at 2:04 pm

Thanks very much! So it’s hard to give an exact price as it will depend on your travel style. The best option is to cross reference this post with our guide to how much it costs to travel in the UK, which will let you come up with a budget based on your travel style 🙂

Have a great trip, and let me know if you have any more questions!

Usha Gupta says

10th April 2019 at 6:02 pm

Hi, we are travelling to London for a holiday from India. My 2 sons (29 & 27) and I are planning on spending 2 weeks in London and Wales. 13th-18th in London 19th-21st in Wales 22nd-26th in London Please advice how best to spend our holidays? We do not want to visit any of the normal places as we have seen n visited them all. What are the best places in wales to see and visit? We have not been to wales. Is it safe to take a road rrip from London to wales? Are 3 days in wales enough to get around? Pl advice

10th April 2019 at 6:52 pm

Well, there’s a huge amount to do and see in London beyond all the normal tourist things that you have likely already done. I can advise visiting Greenwich for example if you have not been out there already, and perhaps some of the palaces out of the city, like Kensington or Hampton Course. Sometimes we like to pick up the London Pass and visit some of the many attractions we’ve not been to before!

Wales is lovely but it is quite big so you will want to consider visiting a region. My favourite part of Wales is the northern part, including the Snowdonia national park and towns like Caernarfon, but there are many nice regions and places to visit. If you want to see more you will likely want a few more days in Wales.

It is certainly safe to take a road trip from London to Wales, of course, I can’t guarantee your safety, but it is no less safe than travel anywhere else in the UK 🙂

I hope this helps – have a great trip!

Usha gupta says

14th April 2019 at 3:24 am

Ty for you advise. We decided to spend all our time in London and do day trips, theatre etc.

14th April 2019 at 11:46 am

My pleasure. Enjoy!

Darlene Williams says

24th March 2019 at 6:10 pm

Lovely ideas here! My Granddaughter and I did a trip last summer to the Cotswolds, London and Paris. I’m thinking of a trip with my Granddaughter (18) in 2020 and would like to base myself in the Lakes District or Wales and take in Ireland and Scotland in a 2 week trip. Since I’ve been there I’ve decided I could probably drive it myself or possibly rent cars when needed and travel via train/bus/tours between Ireland & Scotland. I’m guessing the Highlands is probably out of reach for a 2 week trip? I would welcome your knowledge and suggestions. Thank you, Darlene

25th March 2019 at 3:44 pm

Thanks very much Darlene!

I would definitely recommend hiring a car for the Lakes – it’s a more remote part of the UK, and there are fewer public transport options, both for getting there, and for getting around. I would say that it would make for a good base, but just to be aware that the roads are not very fast in either the Lake District or Wales, so it can take a bit of time to get from place to place.

The Highlands would be achievable, but it would involve a great deal of driving, and if you wanted to head up there i would suggest that as a standalone trip, perhaps flying to Inverness (or overnight train from London), and then renting a car from there 🙂

Do let me know if I can provide any more specific information to help you plan!

Deep Shah says

22nd March 2019 at 5:43 am

Hello Laurence and Jessica,

It has been a pleasure reading about all your experiences in and around UK. I am planning to visit UK between April 22 and May 1. I am planning to start my trip from Edinburg cover a bit of scotland and than move on and end my trip in London.

Here is my itinerary Inverness (23 April) –> Isle of Skye (24 April) –> Fort William (25 April) –> Edinburgh (26 April) –> Jedburgh (27 April) –> York (28 April) –> Cambridge (29 April) –> Cotsworld (30 April) –> London (1 May)

Do you think this is doable? Or any particular section is too aggressive? Your help will really help me plan this better.

22nd March 2019 at 10:00 am

This is in theory do-able, but you will be spending a lot of time driving. From Inverness to the Isle of Skye is a 2.5 hour drive for example, and then there’s a lot to see and do on the island which will also require driving. If you are ok with lots of time driving then yes, this is doable, I just wanted to be sure you knew 🙂

24th March 2019 at 12:35 pm

Thanks for the reply. Yes, I am aware that we will have a lot of driving. But thats ok with me. Thanks again for your time. I have made the reservations to follow this itinerary. Will let you know how it goes.

Thanks for sharing all the information on your website.

24th March 2019 at 12:38 pm

My pleasure – have a great time and do let us know how it goes! You can drop in here or in our facebook group 🙂 https://www.facebook.com/groups/travelloversandphotography/

Omker Mahalanobish says

21st March 2019 at 5:22 pm

Thanks for your detailed itinerary. Looks exciting. By the way, could you please let me know, what should be the expected cost for the said trip? Further : I dont want to drive. Me and my wife would be travelling, and we would rather prefer a chauffer driven cab.

Thanks, Omker

21st March 2019 at 5:27 pm

I have a guide to how much it costs to travel in the UK here: https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/cost-travel-uk/

However, if you want to travel with a private guide, this will generally cost in the region of £500 – £800 per day for the car / driver guide, and then you would need to add accommodation expenses and so on on top of that. We recommend Robina Brown for this sort of trip: http://driverguidetours.com/

Heather Reid says

20th March 2019 at 5:20 am

This site is the most perfect one for my needs. I am a solo traveler female aged 74 and I wish my 75th Birthday be spent on the next trip. If there be another solo person I would be happy to meet up before departure….male or female.

20th March 2019 at 12:49 pm

Thanks Heather – have a great trip, and we hope you find someone to travel with!

Phillip Armanas says

5th March 2019 at 12:20 am

Stumbled over your website while looking for ideas for a two week trip to the UK, glad I did. You’ve got a fantastic itinerary which includes a number of destinations my wife and I had in mind already. We are a retired couple, living in Australia six months of the year, and Atlanta, Georgia the other six months. This gives us great flexibility in travel terms, both in SE Asia and from the USA to many places including UK/Europe. A question I have is whether you have done any family history work on any of your travels? My ancestry is Scottish in the mid-1800s when my great-great-grandfather arrived into Port Adelaide, Australia. As yet we have been unable to track him accurately back into Scotland, but his surname is from a very ancient clan that can be traced back to the 13th century in Fife county. Have you any tips on places I might visit to pursue my elusive ghosts? Phill & Patti

5th March 2019 at 1:35 pm

Hi Phill & Patti!

We’re delighted you have found our content useful : ) So this isn’t something we have personally done, however I have some resources that might be helpful:

http://www.scottishgenealogyresearch.com/ https://www.visitscotland.com/see-do/research-your-ancestry/steps/ https://www.nrscotland.gov.uk/research/family-history https://www.nrscotland.gov.uk/research/local-family-history-centres

It helps if you know the person’s name you are researching and where they lived before leaving Scotland. If you know this, you can look for a local research center or records office or clan center. The Visit Scotland link above is a good place to start. The Scottish Genealogy Research is a professional service that will do research for you for a fee.

Good luck, and have a great trip!

Ronald Rieder says

15th February 2019 at 1:22 am

My wife and I would like to take your “ideal itinerary” beginning Sept. 30, 2019. Is there anyone or any group that we could join?

17th February 2019 at 3:56 pm

So this itinerary is a self guided tour for those wanting to drive themselves. However, we appreciate not everyone wants to do that, and we’ve put some suggested tours that will allow you to do a similar trip but in a group tour format. My suggestion for that would be to focus on England and Scotland, and to take this small group tour followed by this five day tour of the Scottish Highlands and Skye .

I hope this helps – let me know if I can offer any more advice!

Cass Baron says

11th February 2019 at 2:19 am

Laurence and Jessica, We are from Utah, United States and have never traveled abroad (except a short trip to Canada and a Western Caribbean cruise). It has been our dream to come to England and retrace our family history roots. We were looking for trip ideas that covered the areas for both a historical trip as well as a family roots trip. We found your site and loved everything that you have written about. We like the 2 week itinerary but don’t want to do the Ireland and Wales portion. We would like to include Nottingham and Hastings areas, do you have any suggestions to add these in for the same amount of time. We are planning on this May. Thanks!

11th February 2019 at 7:40 am

Certainly. I’d recommend Hastings first, then heading from there along to Stonehenge and Bath, then the Cotswolds and Oxford. From there, start heading north, with Nottingham your next stop, before continuing with the itinerary. You could even drop the car off in Edinburgh and fly out from there if you didn’t want to drive back down to London 🙂

I hope this helps – let me know if you have any more questions!

Lashaun says

5th February 2019 at 11:42 pm

Hello. If we skip the Ireland portion where should we extend our time or add another destination for the 2 week adventure? Also we’d like to see a football game, suggestions for city (Manchester, Liverpool?), tickets etc? thank you!

6th February 2019 at 10:36 am

I’d say you could extend by visiting the Lake District and northern Wales, or by heading further north into Scotland, where there’s lots to see. You definitely won’t have trouble finding places to see!

For football, if you don’t have a particular affiliate with a team, then Manchester will likely be a good option as they have the largest stadium. Tickets can be bought online in advance for any of the teams from their official websites, just be aware that they can sell out so you’ll want to book well in advance to be sure of getting a spot.

I hope this helps! have a great trip 🙂

Steve Geller says

2nd February 2019 at 3:10 am

Hi there, Curious if this itinerary, or part of it, could be done in a motorhome (midsize RV) for a family of 2 adults and 2 kids. I’ve never been to most of these places, outside of some brief time in London and Dublin. For itineraries like these where there is a lot of moving around, I like the idea of a motorhome vs going from hotel to hotel (or apt to apt). Thanks!

3rd February 2019 at 11:45 am

So yes, it would be possible to do this is a motorhome. However, I’d probably advise modifying the itinerary fairly substantially, especially the city parts. Most UK cities don’t have centrally located motorhome camping locations, and the streets tend to be fairly narrow, which can make driving and parking a motorhome very challenging. I would instead suggest, if you wanted to do a motorhome holiday in the UK, to look at a driving route like the NC500 (see our camping itinerary for the NC500 here ), or adjusting this route so it visits more of the countryside parts, like the Cotswolds, Peak District, Lake District and Northumberland.

Let me know if we can answer any more questions!

Iskandar Zulkifly Bin Ali says

29th January 2019 at 10:05 pm

Hello there ! finding this website was such a blessing for me! i am a student who wishes to travel around UK for 2 weeks before i go outside UK ( around Europe for a month ). my only problem is, i am studying in london therefore i’m gonna skip london from this amazing itinerary, and am also skipping Scotland cuz i went there last Dec already. which will give me extra days to fill in to make it 2 weeks. would you please help me to suggest places to fill in between the itinerary ? ps; i really really want to see Jurassic coast and cambridge and watergate bay. where should i put these places in terms of best route wise?

thank you in advance for your time !! you got a follower on your ig !

30th January 2019 at 7:33 pm

Hi Iskandar!

Thanks for your lovely comment and following on IG! We’ve actually just recently visited Cambridge and written a detailed guide to the city, which will be live on the blog in the next few weeks 🙂

To answer your question, first I have to assume you are driving. If not, this might have to change a bit to accommodate public transport. But I would say I would go from London to Cambridge, then up to the Peak District, Manchester and York. You could then go across to the Lake District if you wanted, then across to Holyhead and to Ireland (if you wanted to visit Ireland). Then south wales, Oxford and the Jurassic coast.

I hope that works for you 🙂 Have a great trip!

HANNAH JOHNSON says

29th January 2019 at 3:07 pm

This has been an amazing help! If possible, I did want to ask about more recommendations as far as castles/history goes. This is a very close itinerary for what I think we want to do, but I was wondering if you had any more info on what I could add/take away from this list in order to do more of that. Also, we will be departing from the atlanta, GA airport, and returning back to (or starting from) england isnt entirely necessarily. I definitely agree and would take your advice of ending in dublin and returning from there or wales, but im basically trying to avoid flying/ferrying more than need be. What would be your recommendation for doing everything in the UK in one vehicle and then only crossing into ireland once? if that makes sense

30th January 2019 at 7:38 pm

So there are a lot of great castles in the UK, and it’s hard to travel anywhere without finding history! Some of my favourite castles are in Scotland and the Northumberland area, and you’ve also got Hadrian’s wall up there. But York has all the Viking history too, and then cities like Oxford or Cambridge have more from the middles ages, Bath has the Roman empire.. So there’s really no shortage of history to find.

If it was me though, I’d spend a bit more time exploring some of the castles in Northumberland like Alnwick, Bamburgh and Dunstanburgh, as well as some in Scotland.

If you want to do everything in the UK that would be possible, just continue from Oxford to Bath and Cardiff, and then head north from there to York. You might want to bypass Manchester in order to get more of the history you are interested in as it’s more of a town that had it’s heyday with the industrial revolution, which might be a bit too recent history for your interests. You could instead add Warwick, which has a popular castle and a lovely town centre.

Have a great trip and let me know if I can be of any more help!

Hannah says

30th January 2019 at 8:25 pm

For sure! Thank you so much.

Maribel says

17th January 2019 at 4:13 am

Hi, I am planning a 2-week trip to Great Britain flying from Mexico City to London. Your post is very helpful. My trip HAS to include the Isle of Man but I do want to go to Edinburgh and Ireland. What do you think would be the best route? Thanks for your amazing post!

17th January 2019 at 6:37 pm

Hi Maribel!

Great question, and the first time anyone has asked me about the Isle of Man, which I have to admit, I haven’t been to!

There are direct ferry connections to the Isle of Man from Belfast, Dublin, Lancaster and Liverpool.

So assuming you want to do a fairly similar route, mug suggestion would be to follow the general outline of this trip, but take the ferry from Dublin to the Isle of Man, and then on to Liverpool, instead of from the southern end of Ireland to Fishguard. I think that’s the most logical option.

There are other option too – you could go London -> Oxford -> Liverpool -> Isle of Man -> Dublin -> Belfast -> Cairyan -> Edinburgh -> London.

So up to you really! Have a great trip, and let us know if you have any more questions!

Maribel Felix says

17th January 2019 at 6:40 pm

Muchas Gracias! I appreciate you advice very much. I will send you an update of my trip on my way back to Mexico.

17th January 2019 at 9:50 pm

Please do Maribel – we love to hear back from people on how their trips go, and incorporate feedback into our content to help everyone!

16th December 2018 at 12:15 am

Hello! I am planning a 28 day trip in in May 2019. What would you recommend to fill in the extra days? Thank you so much! And thank you for sharing such a lovely itinerary!

16th December 2018 at 11:49 am

Hi Sara! It’s hard to give a precise answer without knowing your interests, but if it was me I would extend my trip up into the northern half of Scotland, perhaps spending 7-10 days driving the North Coast 500, visiting the Isle of Skye and seeing the highlands. You could also head out to the some of the other islands, like Lewis. May is a great time to head up into that part of Scotland.

Other options include Wales or Cornwall, or extending your time in Ireland. There’s so much to see and do, even 28 days will be filled easily!

Nathaniel says

14th December 2018 at 7:57 pm

Could I use this itinerary for a school project. You will be credited and cited, obviously. Thank you if yes and thanks anyway if no. This was fun to read, regardless of your reply Thank you again, Nathaniel

14th December 2018 at 11:43 pm

Hi Nathaniel,

Thanks for asking! Could you e-mail me about this so I get more of an idea of the use? It’s [email protected] 🙂

9th December 2018 at 8:26 am

We are planning a 3 week trip to UK (2 weeks) and Amsterdam (1 week).. We will fly to Amsterdam from London. We were looking at your 2 week itinerary and wanted to ask what would you suggest instead of Ireland, We only want to visit London, Wales and Scotland start at London and return to London. Family with kids who like a bit of adventure, culture so interested in castles, nature etc. Also would like to visit Whisky distilleries preferably Glenfiddich and Aberlour. Also we will be hiring a car in London and return there. Would really appreciate your suggestions.

9th December 2018 at 10:37 am

So my suggestion would be to do a loop from London, similar to that I’ve described here, but instead of going across to Ireland, to head down the west coast of the UK, and then visit the Lake District and Wales on your way down.

In terms of distilleries, certainly, Aberlour and Glenfiddich are achievable from Edinburgh, but you are looking at a three hour drive each way. So you might prefer to visit a closer distillery like Deanston, which is also right next to Doune Castle, which I’m sure your kids will also enjoy 🙂

Hope this helps a bit!

Navtej says

22nd October 2018 at 11:18 am

Hi, a very helpful article. As I plan my next year travel to Europe after a gap of 15 years…it’s a god send. I propose to spend a few days in Amsterdam-Bruges and then fly to London. Here I catch up with another couple and there 12 year old daughter and plan to drive to Scotland and Ireland. We have a total of 10 / 11 days for this.

Am thinking will cut Wales from my itinerary and which other place would u recommend I skip ?

Many thanks

Navtej from New Delhi, India

PS another slighlty unrelates question : If I fly into London should I take a flight into Amsterdam and the train back from Bruges or is this complicated and expensive?

22nd October 2018 at 8:22 pm

It’s hard to give specific recommendations as to what to skip as I’m not sure as to your personal interests. If you are more interested in culture / museums etc, then you will want to include more of the cities, and less of the countryside. Conversely, if you are less interested in the outdoors, perhaps leaving out some of the countryside attractions would be a good idea 🙂

Generally my advice would be just to stick to flights as it’s likely going to be easier and probably less expensive. The train though can be a good option if you book far enough in advance, it will just take a little bit longer.

Hope this helps – have a great trip!

Leslie says

21st July 2018 at 11:12 pm

Four women from Texas will be traveling to the UK in September and wanted to drive (one of us is brave enough to drive on the wrong side of the road). We spend 8 days in London last September with side trips to Bath and a tour to Oxford and Cotswolds and Warwick Castle. We have relatives in Glasgow, so plan to see that area of Scotland. Your information is a Godsend and thank you so much for all your planning. We will let you know how it goes!

22nd July 2018 at 9:36 pm

Thanks Leslie – please do! We always love to hear feedback as to how our posts help people (or if they need changing, we love to hear about that too!)

Have an awesome trip!

Ruth Deane says

11th July 2018 at 6:24 am

A good travel guide to the UK. I know it is difficult to provided a balanced approach due to limited wordage but the emphasis should be on the UK. N. Ireland and its capital Belfast have been sadly neglected in this article and the focus was Dublin which is not part of the UK. Surely something coulf have been added about Belfast and N. Ireland in general. It is a beautiful place. The author did make a reference to the Dark Hedges but associates them with Dublin. Last time I checked they are quite definitely in N. IRELAND. Hope this criticism is constructive. N. Ireland continues to get a bad press but it is a beautiful place and the majority of the people are that bad either.

11th July 2018 at 9:44 am

Constructive feedback is always welcome! We’re actually visiting Northern Ireland next week for a week to fully explore Belfast and the Coastal Causeway, and will be updating our content (and creating new content!) to have more information on this part of the UK 🙂 Stay tuned!

Craig Grimston says

26th June 2018 at 2:47 am

Thank you!!

September is a perfect month to come to Texas – the weather is perfect then! I’d be happy to answer any questions you have to the best of my ability (I’m not a native Texan – originally from Australia), but there is a lot of great things to do here. Austin and San Antonio are great too.

Thank you for offering to answer any questions! We are going in a group, so I’m sure a lot of questions will come up! I’ll try not to bombard you with them, but I may just hit you with a few! We are planning for somewhere in June to August next year (I plan ahead big time!) and couldn’t be more excited to see your beautiful country!

But please, definitely hit me up with any questions you have about Dallas or Texas. If I can’t answer them, I can track someone down who can!

Thanks!! Craig

22nd June 2018 at 8:02 pm

Hi Laurence and Jessica,

I just wanted to say thank you for posting this itinerary. I really wanted to plan a road trip in the UK and after googling about it all I got was a bunch of blogs pointing out all of the negative things and basically saying “don’t bother”!

As I was about to give up and go the typical tourist route, I came across your website. It was exactly what I was looking for! It is inspirational, and put the joy and adventure back into my travel plans.

I’m pretty much going to stick to your itinerary with the exception of Ireland (I wanted to check out the Lake District and Liverpool), so Ireland may have to be a separate road trip!

I have a million questions, but I’m going to spare you of that! LOL. I really just wanted to say a big thank you for sharing your experience and knowledge!

Kindest Regards, Craig – Dallas Texas

25th June 2018 at 9:28 pm

Thank you so much, it always means a lot to hear that people are finding our content useful. I think you are making a sensible choice – there is a lot to see on the mainland of the UK, and it’s also less hassle to worry about rental cars and ferries if you leave Ireland for another trip 🙂

We’re happy to answer any questions you have. We’re actually planning a trip to Texas for late September, and will be swinging by Dallas, so may have some questions for you in return!

Vanessa says

14th May 2018 at 9:38 pm

I’ve googled “hire car” and it says “rental car.” But on your site here it seems that a rental care and a hire car are different things. What exactly is the difference? Thank you! And also thank you for this post – it’s amazing and I think I will definitely base my trip -whenever that may be… – around it. Bookmarking this page!!

15th May 2018 at 5:57 pm

Thanks Vanessa! I think in the UK we use the term hire car, wheras in the USA it’s more likely to be called a rental car. But yes, they are the same thing in my mind, you can use the terms interchangeably as far as I know 🙂 Have a great trip, and don’t hesitate to let us know if you have any questions at all 😀

Saurabh says

7th May 2018 at 7:55 am

Hi Lawrence, This is a great post! I think I can use some help. We are planning a 2 week trip to UK in August with a 1 year old toddler. What from above or otherwise will be a good itinerary for us. How realistic is it for me to cover what you have listed here? Appreciate any help. Thanks!

7th May 2018 at 10:03 pm

Thanks Saurabh! First, I should say that not having kids ourselves this isn’t an area of expertise for us 🙂 However, based on experiences of friends who travel with family, my suggestion would be to probably cut the itinerary in half, and focus on some of the major cities. As it is, it’s quite a busy itinerary, and I think you will have a better time doing a bit less and having the time to really explore some of the cities on the itinerary. So for example, maybe just do England and Scotland, and skip Ireland and Wales. This will reduce your travel, and let you spend a bit longer in each city. I’d also advise finding accommodation close to the city centres and attractions, so at least one of you can go out sight-seeing if one of you needs to stay behind for naps etc. I hope this helps – have a wonderful trip!

3rd May 2018 at 12:38 am

My husband and I are following this itinerary this summer, flying round trip into Gatwick from Canada. I was looking at the cost of the ferry from Scotland to Ireland and than Ireland to Wales and was shocked at the cost. Do you know of any Ferry discounts?

3rd May 2018 at 7:12 pm

Hi Sarah – you can try the various ferry search companies like directferries or a1ferries I think they are called. Unfortunately that time of year is school holidays, and there aren’t many companies operating the routes, so the prices go up. You might consider instead flying from Edinburgh to Belfast or Dublin instead, and hiring a car in Ireland rather than taking the ferry, if that is a cheaper option!

Badariah says

21st March 2018 at 8:24 am

Awesome I am planning for a 2 week get away to UK. Your article helpsss a lot. Planning to go in mid sept till end of sept

21st March 2018 at 11:25 am

Thanks very much – have a wonderful trip!

11th March 2018 at 9:06 am

hi lawrence me n my wife middle aged planning to do england and scotland in 15 days in july which would be ideal places to cover by public transport. i am open to hire a car for 2 to 3 days if required. please suggest us best possible train route for this trip we are flying in n out of london thanks waiting for ur reply

11th March 2018 at 10:02 am

My advice would be to follow my 10 day UK itinerary, which is designed for public transport: https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/10-day-uk-itinerary-public-transport-train-bus/

You could spend a little extra time in each location, or you could add a couple of stops. My advice would be to add 1 day in Bath near Bristol, stop in Manchester between Liverpool and York, and think about stopping in Newcastle on the way to Edinburgh. If you wanted to see the Cotswolds, you could do that with a hire car from Bath, or on a tour from London.

I hope this helps! That post also has lots of information on using public transport in the UK. Have a great trip!

Christine says

19th February 2018 at 4:57 am

Hello and Thank You!! I was just wondering, I’m not the best with timelines haha, but exactly how many hotel stays are there in total in each location? I’m just trying to determine if you actually spent the night in each location for both nights or if you spent the day touring then drove to the next location and got a room, especially for the 1 day places… if that makes sense? My husband and are are arriving March 10th and fly back out the 24th so just trying to sort out the timelines… Also it was suggested to me to go to Cornwall or Leeds, what are your thoughts? Thanks!

19th February 2018 at 6:11 pm

Hi! And my pleasure 😀

So you’d be looking at:

2 nights in London 1 night in Oxford 1 night in the Cotswolds 1 night in the Peak District 1 night in Manchester (could do Leeds here instead) 1 night in York 2 nights in Edinburgh (could do one night in Northumberland on the way up) 3 nights in Ireland / Northern Ireland 1 night in Cardiff 1 night in Bristol or Bath

You could of course spend more or less time in each destination, and leave say London after two full days but only one night, and overnight in Oxford. So really it’s up to you 🙂

Leeds you could easily fit into this itinerary. Cornwall would be a bit harder as it’s a bit further away. If you wanted to do Cornwall, you might need to leave Ireland out for example to give yourself enough time. Hope this helps!

15th February 2018 at 10:57 pm

Awesome Itinerary, I would add Canterbury to this list 🙂

17th February 2018 at 8:35 pm

I’ve only briefly visited Canterbury, must return!

22nd January 2018 at 4:52 pm

This came a blessing in disguise after searching for a week almost and making all shit loads of itineraries. I am thinking of blindly following this as it looks great to me. Need your help on a few points here if it doe snot bother you much, it would serve a great deal of planning for me in addition to what it already has, 1. Was this too hectic considering the number of places you covered? 2. Was driving time included in the time spent at each place you mentioned? 3. Is driving safe in and around England? 4. Is driving a cheaper option than using rail/bus transport? 5. How much did this two week trip cost you? 6. How much does the drive part of the trip cost?

22nd January 2018 at 5:44 pm

HI Saurabh!

Pleased to hear you found the itinerary 🙂 I’m happy to answer your questions of course.

1. This is definitely a busy itinerary, although as you can see from the other comments, many people have enjoyed it. So it really depends on your own personal style of travel and your preferences, as well as who you are travelling with. If you want a less hectic schedule, I’d suggest perhaps leaving the Irish part of the trip out, and maybe focusing on England and Scotland, and perhaps extending your time in cities like London and Edinburgh.

2. Yes, driving time is included. Driving time is not too great in the UK as distances are not large and the motorways are good, however, be aware that traffic can be bad around rush hour in the morning and evenings.

3. Yes, driving is very safe. Of course, accidents happen like anywhere in the world, but for the most part you shouldn’t have any trouble.

4. It depends on a few factors – mostly how many of you there are. For one person, it might be more cost-effective to take public transport. Also, if you book public transport well in advance, especially trains, this can be much cheaper than buying tickets on the day. Car hire also depends on the size of the car, but you can get pretty good value car hire. Fuel is quite expensive, but most modern hire cars are very fuel efficient. I am shortly going to publish a post with a similar itinerary that focuses on travelling in the UK by public transport, so stay tuned for that 🙂

5. Cost is really up to you, as it depends so much on what you want to see! I’d say you can hire a car for around £180 – £250 a week, fuel costs will be in the region of £50-£70 a week, and accommodation is likely to be in the range of £80 – £150 a night for two people sharing. You can of course get cheaper and more expensive accommodation options, it really depends on your style of travel.

6. The main costs for the car are the car hire, fuel, and any insurance you buy. I’d say between £200 and £300 a week, plus any parking fees. I’d definitely advise always booking a hotel that includes free parking.

I hope this helps with your planning – have a wonderful trip, and don’t miss my one week itinerary post for more ideas 🙂

https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/UK-Itinerary-One-Week-Road-Trip/

Steve and Cheryl Bales says

26th February 2018 at 9:09 pm

Thank you for the wealth of information! We are planning to take a trip to visit our daughter who is in the Air Force in the UK this May. I’ve read your itinerary and the questions and answers that followed. There were a couple of questions that popped up for me and I was hoping you could answer them. You mentioned taking a car over on the ferry to Ireland. We will be driving our daughter’s car, but I was wondering if we needed special insurance on the car to have it ferried. My husband are both disabled to a degree; neither of us are capable of walking long distances or sitting for any duration. Is there a need for concern over these issues? And, what is the cost of a London Pass and how many people does it cover, there will be four in our group? Any information would be much appreciated, thank you in advance. Steve and Cheryl

26th February 2018 at 9:19 pm

Hi Steve and Cheryl,

Thanks for reaching out, and I’m happy to hear you have found the content useful. You don’t normally need special insurance on a car to have it ferried, but you will likely need to check with your daughter’s insurer to make sure it is covered in Ireland. As far as I am aware it should be covered in Northern Ireland with the full coverage, and most UK insurers do provide at least some level cover for the EU, which Ireland is a part of, but worth checking.

For the itinerary I’ve put together, it’s really up to you how much you do. All the major cities have good public transport if you choose not to drive, as well as sight-seeing buses and things like that.

The London Pass prices vary – you have to buy one price per person, so that would be four passes total. Again, the value is up to you and how much you can get out of them. My only concern would be to get real value out of them you do need to try and pack quite a lot in – if you aren’t sure if that’s going to be possible you might end up being better off not getting them and just paying the ticket prices. Also, I’m not sure of your ages, but many attractions have senior concessions, which might also save you money rather than getting a pass. Worth checking the individual websites for the different attractions you want to visit to see what those might be.

You can see the London Pass prices here; https://prf.hn/click/camref:1011lbTW/pubref:FTU2WeekQuestion/destination:https%3A%2F%2Fwww.londonpass.com%2Flondon-pass-prices.php

Derian Quek says

4th September 2017 at 1:10 pm

This trip seems a bit rushed when driving over to Ireland..I am also planning a 2 weeks this December to January. Any tips on this? Am planning London/Manchester/Lake district/Edinburgh/Cotswolds/bath/Stonehenge/Paris

Laurence says

4th September 2017 at 4:05 pm

Hey Darian,

This trip is definitely quite fast – unfortunately folks don’t have too much time sometimes, and are keen to see as much as possible, which is what I try to achieve on this itinerary.

Regarding your itinerary – at that time of year do be aware that the weather obviously won’t be great and it will be getting dark around 4pm – just something to bear in mind. Certainly your plan is possible but will also be quite packed. Perhaps focusing on a few less locations and seeing more. From your list I’d suggest London, with a day trip to bath, the Cotswolds and Stonehenge, then Edinburgh and Paris. You could add in Manchester as well of course. It would also depend on if you have visited any of the locations before and how you plan to travel. I’d suggest train from London to Edinburgh, and a cheap flight from Edinburgh to Paris.

4th September 2017 at 4:15 pm

Hi Laurence. It would actually be my first time to the UK. I’m visiting Manchester because I would wanna catch a game at old Trafford and that’s probably the only reason why. Flight from Edinburgh to Paris sounds like a good option though I would most likely be self driving from London up north. I’m thinking 3 days in London, 1 day in manchester, 2 days in lake district, 3 days in Edinburgh, 1 day to cotswolds and then 3 days in Paris via eurostar before heading back to London for my return flight

Mital Khona says

9th August 2017 at 2:43 pm

Hi Lawrence, Thanks a bunch for this wonderful itinerary… 1. We are travelling this September with 2 Kids ( 2 years old and 8 years old) and2 parents ( senior citizens).. Is this still doable.. I was thinking of picking up train for journey from London to Edinburgh 2. We would like to spend 3 days on the alternative route to Ireland suggested by you above. Can you help on the route/ time we should allot to Snowdonia, etc(west coast of the UK, including Glasgow, the Lake District, and Liverpool, as well as popping into Wales for the stunning Snowdonia national park)

7th January 2018 at 1:26 pm

Hi Mital! It really depends on your kids and grandparents and their stamina. I think this trip might be a bit much for some, and you might find it easier to go a bit slower and take things in a bit more. So perhaps a trip focusing on Edinburgh / London, with a hire car for the return journey down the west coast of the UK. I’d say three – four days in London, two to three days in Edinburgh, and then the rest of the time on the drive down the west coast would work!

Sussex Bloggers says

30th May 2017 at 12:56 pm

Can’t believe you’ve completely skipped Cornwall and the rest of the south coast. Such beautiful scenery all along the southern coastline and some wonderful towns and villages. Here’s a little teaser!

ipsita bhattacharya says

3rd May 2017 at 12:19 am

Hi guys, We are planning a trip to the UK in August/September 2017 and this 2-week itinerary is proving to be of great help! But if we plan to take public transport instead of driving, how much of this is doable? We are also looking at two weeks and while I understand taking trains/buses will eat into our travelling time, we are not sure we want to drive. Please advise. And thanks for this wonderful travel plan!

8th August 2017 at 8:56 am

Our pleasure. Much of this is doable, certainly between the major cities by train at least. We’d advice flying from the UK, likely Edinburgh to Dublin, and then back from Dublin to Cardiff or London. It’s definitely achievable in part though 🙂

Jessica says

2nd April 2017 at 1:15 am

I am so glad that I found your itinerary as we will be visiting the UK for a little over two weeks this coming summer. I do have question for a part of the trip when you have to ferry from Scotland to Ireland, is it easy to find ferries that will take your car across? Also do you recommend a car for the entire trip or to break it up with trains? Such as from London to Edinburgh? Thank you and I hope to hear back from you soon.

7th January 2018 at 1:24 pm

Hi Jessica! Sorry for the slow response. Most of the ferries take cars, but the question is as to whether or not your rental car company will let you take the car on the ferry. So you would need to check with them. If not, you might find it easier to say fly from Edinburgh to Belfast or Dublin to continue to journey, and perhaps pick up a hire car in Ireland instead.

Nishant says

19th March 2017 at 10:59 am

My family of 4 is planning in Aug’17 for 2 week and i like your write up here. we would be staying with our friend’s family (4 member) in LONDON and then accompany them to this tour plan. we wish to know approx budget in INR apart from AIR Ticket required for this kind of tour. Consider AIR BnB stay, Home cooking where ever possible, car drive and budgeted expense suitable for family.

แอโรคอม บริษัทจำกัด says

13th March 2017 at 8:24 am

Your 2 weeks itinerary seems very good. I am concerned with parking space in tourist attractions especially in big cities. Is it not so difficult to find parking area in all these recommended places (except London)? How much is a typical parking fee?

Thanks in advance! Pairoj S.

13th March 2017 at 2:24 pm

Thanks very much! Parking fees really vary depending on where you want to park. On road meter parking is usually the most expensive, around £3 an hour. I’d suggest finding a larger car park, like a multistorey operated by a company like NCP. These are more reasonable, and you would pay on a sliding scale where it is better value for staying for longer. I wouldn’t worry though, there is usually plenty of parking available, and sometimes if you don’t mind walking a little bit, if you don’t park centrally you can park for free. Have a great trip!

Mittal Shah says

10th March 2017 at 11:44 am

Hi Lawrence and Norah. I have been trying to plan a road trip in UK around July end for approximately 12days and have found a lot of helpful information.There are certain things i would like to know from you: For road trip should i consider hiring a caravan or a car( 4 of us travelling)? Is it better to book a hotel or bnb? Please help. Awaiting your reply

12th March 2017 at 9:47 pm

Thanks for your comment. A car would definitely be the best option, for four of you it would likely be the most cost effective option. I’d also suggest bed and breakfasts are a nice option, although there are lots of great hotels as well, it really depends on your budget,

Enjoy your trip!

rajul parikh says

19th February 2017 at 11:46 am

Hi Lawrence and Norah just been browsing through your site and taking in the information about the 2 week holiday in the UK. We find your information relevant and useful. We live in India and are considering a trip sometime mid June 2017. This would be our first trip to the UK. Lots of questions: would the weather be ok around that time? To cover your suggested itinerary (including ireland) how much driving would one end up doing everyday? Would your stops which are marked alphabetically on the map suggest overnight stay? Since we would like to spend at least 5 days in London we would need to extend our trip to about 21 days. Look forward to hearing from you.

19th February 2017 at 11:49 am

Happy that you found it useful! Yes, the main stopping points suggest an overnight stay. The weather is likely to be good in June, however, the weather in the UK can be very unpredictable. Coming from India, you’ll probably find it fairly cool 😉 I’d say between 15 and 25C would be the norm, and you should plan for rain whenever you visit the UK.

In terms of driving, the UK is quite small so not too much, probably not more than 2 – 3 hours a day.

Myn Wong says

14th February 2017 at 1:18 am

Hi. May I know the estimated cost of this trip?

George Monaghan says

30th January 2017 at 8:51 pm

Finding this site most interesting !

30th January 2017 at 8:52 pm

Thanks George, appreciated!

Dave_Toni says

18th January 2017 at 2:17 am

Hi guys, I’m staying in London for a short time (4 days) and I’m now thinking I should have booked a longer stay, but I’m on route to another destination. What would you recommend for a four day tour to get the best out of “must see” locations in in short amount of time? Really enjoying the site, keep up the great information. Thanks Dave.

18th January 2017 at 6:52 pm

Four days is a good time to see lots of London 🙂 My advice, if you’ve not been before, would be to focus on the highlights, plus allocate some time just to wander a bit. I have a two day Itinerary here: https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/2016/06/two-day-london-itinerary-essential-sight-seeing.html That should help a bit, and then an itinerary that focuses on the region of Kensington: https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/2015/07/top-8-things-to-do-in-kensington.html I also have a guide for getting around London: https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/2016/08/guide-public-transport-london.html Some tips for the best photo spots in London: https://www.findingtheuniverse.com/2015/12/best-photography-locations-london.html And finally, we always recommend the London Pass to save money if you’re planning on visiting a lot of attractions. Here’s a great breakdown to find out if that’s worth it for you or not: independenttravelcats.com/2016/05/21/tips-using-buying-london-pass-worth/ Enjoy!

13th January 2017 at 10:19 am

So so perfect! Planning a 2 week UK holiday in June. This was God-sent!

13th January 2017 at 10:21 am

Wonderful, pleased you found it useful

Ashton says

5th November 2016 at 5:24 am

This is perfect! Exactly what I was looking for to start planning my honeymoon!! Thank you for taking the time to put this together

13th November 2016 at 7:58 pm

My pleasure – let us know how it goes and if there’s anything missing we can add to the post!

shiva bhavini says

16th July 2016 at 2:34 pm

Hi Laurence & Jessica, My husband and I are planning to have a 10 days UK trip , reaching London on September 16 and have return flight from london on september 26 , can you please suggest should we take some travel agent to take us around in UK ? Thanks much in advance

Ellana McNulty says

3rd July 2016 at 1:39 am

Hi Laurence & Jessica, My husband and I are planning on following your itinerary when we go over in August. When we first looked at your blog, there was a map at the end that you could zoom in on, but cannot find it now? Is the link still available.

3rd July 2016 at 11:24 am

Hi Ellana! Sorry about that, the map was causing issues for mobile users so I removed it. See comment below with a better answer!

Paul McNulty says

7th July 2016 at 12:09 am

Thanks for this Laurence!

Is it possible to have the whole route on the map like you had it before?

4th November 2016 at 11:13 pm

Hi Paul, I’ve been battling with google maps over this and gave up as it wouldn’t let me have enough waypoints. So I’ve switched to Bing Maps with the embedded image, and there’s a link to the route here: https://binged.it/2fDQGD2

Sorry for the delay!

5th November 2016 at 12:02 am

Thanks Laurence… we toured the UK in the last half of August using your itinerary. We modified it a bit to suit our personal tastes, but the basis of our trip was thanks to you. And it was even better than we expected!! Cheers.

5th November 2016 at 9:49 am

Brilliant! Delighted you had a good trip 😀

Alicia says

7th June 2017 at 3:22 am

The above link does not have a driving route in it. Is it no longer working (or I am doing it wrong)?

Unfortunately Google wouldn’t let me put together a driving route with this many stops, so this was the best I could do!

Seyne Tee says

27th June 2016 at 4:03 am

Hi Laurence & Jessica, I plan to visit UK for 2 weeks and rent a car to travel around places outside UK. Your perfect itinerary is exactly what I’m looking for, thanks! I have a problem here, I can only travel with my husband and son in the middle of November, will the weather be friendly enough to carry out activities as per your recommendation?

27th June 2016 at 9:23 am

Well, the weather in the UK can be quite varied, with sun even in November! However it will more likely be cold and grey, temperatures in the range of 3 – 10 degrees C. It will also be dark fairly early. However, that shouldn’t put you off, a lot of this itinerary is focused on the cities, and indoors activities, so you should be fine, although you might want to edit the itinerary a bit to focus more on indoor activities than outdoor ones 🙂

Stephen Mason says

9th May 2016 at 3:58 am

This trip is incredible! Can you give a price of what the final trip costed?

28th June 2016 at 11:55 am

Hi Stephen – it really depends on many factors, including your budget for accommodation / food. You can find places for £50 / night in most of the locations I’ve mentioned, food per person you could get away with £15 a day, then there’s fuel and car hire, not to mention attraction entry. I’d probably look to budgeting around £700 – £1500 per person, as a guideline, but a lot of variables to take into account 🙂

SharronJ says

8th March 2016 at 6:33 pm

This is just what I was looking for. I am planning on visiting your wonderful country for a month next year and just started doing research. Your article is just what I was looking for Thanks so much!

8th March 2016 at 6:35 pm

My pleasure! Have a wonderful trip 🙂

Edward says

17th January 2016 at 11:32 pm

Thank you for this. I will be going in UK late Spetember to October (one month) and this is a nice itnerary and I can do it in a slower pace. Would you say September and October is a good time to do this? How is the weather usually in those months?

2nd February 2016 at 2:47 am

It’s the Autum time so you might fair pretty well, considering. It starts to cool down in September and the trees start changing. There will be rain, especially in the West of England and Wales but there always is.

The best time to visit England is May – August, but if you don’t mind getting caught in the rain now and then, you shouldn’t have a problem

Joanne says

12th October 2015 at 2:18 pm

Is it possible to do this itinerary relying only on public transportation since I don’t drive? Thank you in advance.

12th October 2015 at 2:21 pm

Good parts of it are certainly possible, as the major cities are linked by public transport, and the trains in particular are an excellent and fast way to get around. One tip – book well in advance on specific trains to get the best prices in the UK, the fares you pay on the day are much higher. I’d also suggest flying from Edinburgh to Dublin if you wanted to include the Irish part of the trip.

You might have a bit more difficulty visiting places like the Cotswolds or other “country” parts on your own, however there are plenty of tour operators who can give you a day trip out from London to say the Cotswolds and Stonehenge.

On the whole though, yes, the majority of this itinerary would be more than do-able by public transport!

Nina Tchernova says

7th October 2015 at 2:43 pm

Hi Laurence, thank you so much for sharing this! We are planning to go in April, and this is exactly what we were hoping to do. And here it all is, so wonderfully explored and illustrated! One question though – what would you recommend about car rentals -one, or three? when we cross on a ferry to Ireland, do we bring the car, or is it better to rent another one there, and then another when we get back?

10th October 2015 at 1:14 pm

My pleasure 🙂 The answer to your question isn’t as simple as it sounds. One way rentals, as you’d need if you were to change cars, are generally more expensive than returning the car to the same place. On the other hand, a ferry ticket without a car is cheaper! So you might want to just check the math and see, depending on your budget. Personally, I’d not bother with the hassle of changing cars and just stick with the same one, you just need to check that it’s ok to drive the car in Ireland as well 🙂

10th October 2015 at 1:28 pm

Thank you very much, we will have to make a few enquiries.

Darryl Chan says

24th August 2015 at 6:03 pm

Hey! Love your itinerary! Is there anyway I can contact you to get more personalised advices from you? Looking forward to your reply!

27th August 2015 at 5:28 pm

Sure, you can just drop me an e-mail via the contact page on the site, or just fire away in the comments and I’ll see what I can do,

17th August 2015 at 4:58 am

Where’s the castle in your first picture?

25th September 2015 at 8:51 pm

The castle in the first picture (with the daffodils) is Alnwick castle in Northumberland. Home to Harry Potter or at least the was some filming taken place there and also some of Downtown Abbey. Alnwick is also home to Barter Books where the original ‘keep calm and carry on’ poster was discovered. Northumberland has one of the largest number of castles in the uk. Some of the most impressive I think are Bamburgh Castle, Lindisfarne Castle (on holy island – which needs a visit itself) and Chillingham Castle (known for being pretty spooky). Contact Wooler Tourist Infomation Office on +44 1668 282123 to learn about accommodation as Wooler is a fantastic base for the best of Northumberland.

25th September 2015 at 9:02 pm

Can I also say there is an awesome place for Brits and tourists alike; Beamish, the living museum. It is an outdoor village fashioned perfectly on olden days northern England complete with coal mine, dentis, working sweet shop and more

Monica says

11th August 2015 at 8:16 pm

I loved you itinerary and pictures. I’m definitely using your steps to trace some of my own. Thanks for sharing. I’m excited to read through more of your posts.

15th August 2015 at 8:32 pm

Thanks Monica, have a great trip!

3rd August 2015 at 9:50 pm

Great review of a nice trip through GB. My wife and I are trying to plan one for May, and we were thinking of spending more time in Scottland. Do you have any suggestions for moving from Endinburgh and into the northern part of Scotland and skipping Ireland. I thinking about Aberdeen and stopping by Ben Nevis, but it’s our first time traveling abroad and I’d love more information. Thanks!

3rd August 2015 at 11:49 pm

Hi Andy! To be honest I’ve not spent a lot of time in Scotland recently, but I can very much recommend taking the time to visit Glencoe. It’s a couple of hours from Edinburgh, and is an absolutely stunning valley in the highlands. I’ve also heard nothing but good things about the isle of Skye! Sorry I can’t be of much more help right now 🙁

10 Day England Itinerary: The Best Sights And Attractions In England

This 10-day england itinerary takes you on a tour of the most famous sights in the country, plus a few hidden gems.

If you’re planning a trip to the United Kingdom, it’s hard to know where to start. The first big decision is do you fancy spending all of your time in England, or perhaps venture to Wales or Scotland too? While Britain isn’t a huge island (you could drive from Land’s End in the south to John O’Groats in the north in under 15 hours) the scenery is varied and you’ll want to take your time.

If it’s your first visit, I’d recommend focusing on England, and spending at least a week travelling around. You can move at a fast pace and visit a new place each day, but if you fancy a more leisurely trip, you’ll probably want to allow a minimum of 2 days in some of them, especially when you factor in the travel time.

Coming up is a 10-day England itinerary packed full of the best sights in the country. I’ll admit it’s been really difficult to choose where to include. There are SO many other places that are equally as beautiful, but this route gives you a nice variety.

From London’s museums and iconic landmarks, to the epic beauty of Dorset’s Jurassic Coast, Bath’s history and the landscapes of the Lake District, this itinerary has it all! If you want to wander through streets that could feature in Harry Potter or soak up the romance of where The Holiday was filmed, there are some iconic movie locations on this route too.

The easiest way to travel around England is by car. It’ll give you the flexibility to get off the beaten track, visit some unique destinations and pack as much into your trip as your time allows. However, if you’d rather use public transport, all of these locations are accessible by trains or buses too.

10-Day England Itinerary: The Best Sights And Attractions In England

2 days in london.

There’s SO much to see in the UK’s capital, you could easily spend a week exploring the city. For this 10-day England itinerary I’ve suggested you spend 2 days in London and pack in as much sightseeing as you can.

If it’s your first time in London you can’t miss the key landmarks. Watch the changing of the guard at Buckingham Palace, see London from a different angle from one of the 32 pods on the London Eye, check the time at Big Ben, explore Westminster Abbey, wave to Nelson in Trafalgar Square, see Tower Bridge open for a tall ship, see the crown jewels sparkling inside the Tower of London and step inside St Paul’s Cathedral. It sounds like a lot, but you can see so many sights with a long walk along the River Thames.

One of the best ways of doing all of this is on a bus tour. We really like this vintage open-top bus tour which is just oh so quintessentially British. This tour has a guide explaining all the top sights.

Alternatively, another tour we love is this half-day bike tour . In 4 hours you get to ride around London taking in all the sights – it’s a really cool way of seeing London, especially on a bright sunny day.

If you love museums, take a trip to South Kensington and venture inside the impressive Natural History Museum and Science Museums. They both have lots of interesting interactive exhibits and are great for families.

For tasty food, take a wander through Borough Market or Camden Market. If you love architecture, how about a little tour of Notting Hill. The pastel coloured houses are like something out of a kid’s book. Or for a great view, walk to the top of Primrose Hill. It’s one of our favourite spots on a sunny day.

The easiest way to get around London is using public transport. You can either pick up an Oyster Card (a contactless travel card) or use your own contactless bank card.

1 Day In Brighton

After a great few days in London, it’s time to escape to the coast. Brighton is one of the best seaside day trips from London by train (journey takes one hour) and a gorgeous place to explore on foot.

There’s the pier which is crammed full of fun rides, amusement arcades and food outlets wafting the sickly scent of donuts through the air. There’s a mammoth pebbly beach, lined with little art galleries, gift shops and restaurants.

For a great view of Brighton, you could take a trip on the i360 – a tourist attraction which offers great views of the area. Plus, there are some gorgeous hotels on the seafront if you want to stay overnight.

One of our favourite things about Brighton is the shopping scene. The Lanes and North Laine are full of character, and are THE place to visit for independent stores, quirky cafes and restaurants. This is a great place to shop for vintage jewellery and bohemian clothing.

Once you’ve done all of that, you’ll definitely have earned some fish and chips on the beach. Just watch out for the seagulls overhead – they’re always hungry!

1 Day In Dorset

I was debating whether to recommend two days in Cornwall, or break up the journey with one day in Dorset. Needless to say, Dorset won! I visited last year for the first time and would definitely suggest you include a stop there on your 10-day England itinerary.

Dorset is known for its dramatic coastline, known as the Jurassic Coast. I’d recommend the clifftop walk from Lulworth Cove to Durdle Door – England’s iconic rock arch. If you have time, you could also do the walk from Studland Bay to Old Harry Rocks. It’s another beautiful spot, with huge chalk stones standing in the water.

Alternatively, if you fancy a more relaxing day you could drive to West Bay to see the enormous limestone cliffs, which show the falling sea levels from over 175 million years ago. Or enjoy the adorable English villages of Milton Abbas or Abbotsbury.

Both have main streets lined with charming thatched cottages, many decorated with pretty plants and flowers. It’s got a quaint English charm!

Alternatively, if you’re basing yourself in London for your England itinerary, then this is an amazing 5 day tour of Dorset and Cornwall . On this tour EVERYTHING is taken care of for you, so you don’t need to worry about transport, tickets or anything else like that.

1 Day In Cornwall

Cornwall is one of my favourite parts of England. This southern region of mainland Britain is where you’ll find a spectacular rugged coastline, top surf beaches and some of the best fresh seafood in the country. It’s a walker’s paradise, and a great place for day hikes along the South West Coast Path .

The Cornish coastline is stunning – it’s no wonder it’s one of the top places for people to go on holiday in UK. For beach time head to Fistral Beach (Newquay’s famous surf beach), Bedruthan Steps (epic rock views), Pedn Vounder (might have you fooled for the Caribbean) or Kynance Cove (with its incredible rock formation).

Alternatively, you could focus on Cornwall’s food scene. There are lots of great restaurants dotted around the county, but the most famous town for gastronomy is Padstow .

Legendary chefs Rick Stein and Paul Ainsworth have launched a culinary empire in the town, and there’s a nice mix of high-end to budget friendly options. Most of them involve fresh fish and seafood brought in daily by fisherman in Padstow Harbour. Read our guide to the 13 best places to eat in Padstow before you go!

Wild garlic soup at Paul Ainsworth At No.6, Padstow

1 Day In Bath

Bath is one of England’s prettiest cities. Most buildings here are constructed from Bath stone – a beige limestone which gives the city a certain uniformity. It’s a very walkable city, and one of my top recommendations would be to get lost in the pretty streets.

There are a few highlights not to be missed. If you’re a lover of history, the city of Bath offers a lot. First time visitors must visit the Roman baths . It’s incredible to learn about the ancient ways of the Romans and their impact on modern civilisation.

For the best views, I’d recommend climbing the tower of Bath Abbey (bookable as part of a guided tour). It’s a tiring climb up, but well worth it once you see the stunning cityscapes from the top.

Alternatively, an evening cruise on the water with a glass of prosecco is a great way of seeing the city too!

If you’re craving relaxation after a busy few days of travelling, you could spend some time enjoying the soothing waters of Thermae Bath Spa. There are several pools, saunas and steam rooms. One pool is on a roof terrace and offers lovely views of the city too!

Bath is a sophisticated city, with great places to eat and drink, lovely independent shops and plenty of history, so it’s s great addition to your 10-day England itinerary!

1 Day In The Cotswolds

The Cotswolds is one of the most picturesque regions of England. If you’ve grown up watching films set in cute English villages, you can bet 99% of the time they were filmed in this area! You know, the beautiful snowy Christmas scenes in The Holiday and Bridget Jones? Yep, they were filmed in the Cotswolds.

If you’re only spending one day in the area as part of a bigger 10-day England itinerary, I’d recommend visiting Bibury and walking down Arlington Row. After that, head to Moreton in Marsh, Bourton on the Water, Upper and Lower Slaughter and Broadway.

The best way to enjoy this area is on a little road trip, stopping off at towns and villages, then having a little country walk before enjoying a traditional cream tea. There are a number of beautiful accommodation options in this area too, from adorable B&Bs to huge country manor houses.

Alternatively, if you want everything taken care of for you, then this is one of the most popular tours of the Cotswolds from London . It is packed full of all the top things to do in the area, and it’s one of the most recommended Cotswold tours out there!

2 Days In The Lake District

After spending time in The Cotswolds, it’s time to head north. It’s a long journey, so it might be best to add in a travel day at this point if possible.

The Lake District is England’s largest national park and covers 912 square miles. It’s stunningly beautiful, with rolling hills, pretty lakes and some of the best restaurants in the country.

With just two days in the area, we’d recommend a mix of hiking, water activities and good food. There are lots of Michelin starred restaurants in the Lake District , so you could treat yourselves to an extra special meal. Our favourite was Cottage in the Wood, but there are a few others including Simon Rogan’s L’Enclume that we’d love to visit one day!

In terms of hiking, one of our favourite routes is up to Cat Bells. The views from up there are absolutely incredible. We also really enjoyed the hike from Pooley Bridge to Aira Force waterfall . The route passes high over the hills, with epic views of Ullswater from the top.

If you like getting out on the water, then there are plenty of opportunities in this area. You could kayak, hire a sailing boat, try stand up paddle boarding, go canyoning or enjoy a leisurely journey on board the historic Ullswater Steamer.

Another fantastic Great British tour is of 10 lakes in the Lake District . Here you get to hop from each lake seeing which one is your favourite – it’s a

1 Day In Cambridge

You’ve made it to the final day of your 10-day England itinerary, and it’s time for a trip to Cambridge. History lovers will adore walking the grounds of famous university colleges here. The architecture is amazing and feels very grand. The city centre has plenty of shops, restaurants and cafes to enjoy too.

One of the top things to do in Cambridge is go punting . It’s not an activity that goes on in other cities really – Cambridge is THE place for it. There’s nothing quite like gliding down the River Cam learning all about the history of Cambridge while on a punting tour.

As you relax on board the boat you get to see some of the sights that are tricky to view properly from the banks of the river, including the spectacular Bridge of Sighs, the Mathematical Bridge and the back of King’s College.

As another thing to do, it’s really popular to take a tour of the colleges too for that real Cambridge university experience.

It’s a beautiful city to explore, and a great place to round off an exciting and varied 10 days in England.

Fancy going further afield? Head to Scotland and visit Edinburgh Castle, the Royal Mile or venture out into the stunning Scottish Highlands.

Alternatively, you could cross the border into Wales and visit Snowdonia or the Gower Coast. There’s so much to see in Britain – who knows where you’ll end up!

Enjoyed this 10-day England itinerary? Pin it for later…

1 thought on “10 Day England Itinerary: The Best Sights And Attractions In England”

Excellent article with lovely pictures. Very informative.

3 perfect England itineraries for every type of traveler

May 12, 2022 • 10 min read

A tourist relaxing in front of Tower Bridge, London

London is the ideal starting point for exploring England by rail or road © Franckreporter / Getty Images

Want to see as much of England as possible on your trip but don’t know where to start? Here are three of our best 7-10 day itineraries to give you some inspiration.

Each of these classic trips will give you a different insight into this green and pleasant land. But the one thing they have in common is you’ll leave with a deep appreciation of everything that makes England special: a contrast of wild and idyllic landscapes, fascinating history and captivating urban destinations.

Essential England – a 10-day itinerary

A week and a half is long enough to tick off many of England’s classic highlights. This tour takes in a dozen of the nation's top sights, from London to the Lakes.

Day 1: Tour the streets of the capital

What better way to kickstart your perfect England itinerary than starting with a full day in the nation's vibrant capital, London ? If you only have one day to explore, simply set out on foot to admire such world-famous sights as Buckingham Palace , Tower Bridge , Trafalgar Square and more.

How to get from London to Winchester: Drive or take the train from London to Winchester; direct trains take an hour and run from Waterloo Station.

Day 2: Captivating cathedral cities

Moving southwest, you can explore one or both of the grand cathedral cities of Winchester and Salisbury . Winchester is slightly closer to London and is a history-lover’s dream with long connections to King Arthur, Sir Walter Raleigh and Alfred the Great. Another 45 minutes by road will take you to Salisbury Cathedral and one of only four surviving copies of the Magna Carta.

Go from Winchester to Bath: A hire car will open up some interesting side-trips en route to Bath. Don’t leave the area before making a detour to see the iconic megaliths of Stonehenge .

Visitors walk past the Grand Pump Room in Bath, Somerset

Day 3: A literary day in Bath

A short hop northwest leads to the beautiful city of Bath , for Roman history and fabulous Georgian architecture. For literature fans, the city has many connections to Jane Austen and, more recently, it formed the stage for Netflix’s smash hit TV series Bridgerton .

Go from Bath to Oxford: The quickest route to Oxford is by train, connecting at Didcot Parkway. However, if you have a car and can afford a bit more time on the road, traveling by road has its benefits. You’ll be able to cruise across the classic English countryside of the Cotswolds with plenty of scenic pit stops on the way.

Day 5: Study the beauty of Oxford

An hour and a half trip by road or train will deliver you to that ancient seat of learning, Oxford . After you take in the sights and sounds of the famous university, find an idyllic English pub to cozy up in with a classic English novel.

For an optional extra day, just an hour’s drive away from Oxford is Stratford-upon-Avon . The official home of everything Shakespeare, Stratford is a pilgrimage destination for fans of the Bard and there are plenty of must-sees for anyone with an interest.

Go from Oxford to the Lake District: Circling back to London, you can pick up a direct train from Euston station that will get you to Oxenholme in the Lake District in under three hours. Alternatively, driving from Oxford to the Lakes will take you four hours.

Walker on Whiteside above Gasgale Crags in the English Lake District

Day 6 & 7: Find an outdoor paradise in the Lake District

Deservedly the most popular national park in the UK, the Lake District is a dream for outdoor enthusiasts. There are plenty of walking routes, swimming spots and cycling trails; stay the night and you can enjoy some of the country’s best stargazing.

Go from the Lake District to York: Navigate around the fringes of Yorkshire Dales National Park to York. Driving is the quickest route – otherwise expect a three-hour train journey with multiple changes available.

Day 8: Discover the delights of York

History buffs will love York for its Viking remains and stunning gothic Minster (cathedral). A medieval marvel, the highlight of the city is the Shambles , surely one of the most photographed laneways in England.

Go from York to Cambridge: The last long travel portion of this itinerary – the drive to Cambridge – will take three hours, though the train (connecting at Stevenage) will have you there slightly faster.

Punting on the River Cam by St John's College at Cambridge University

Day 9: Punt around Cambridge

Break up your trip back to the capital with a visit to learned Cambridge , England's other great university city. If the weather is good and you’re feeling energetic, rent a punt to explore The Backs of the colleges, or sit back and take a guided punt tour.

Go from Cambridge to London: From here it’s a short one-hour train journey or an hour and a half drive back to the capital.

Day 10: Back to London

Enjoy a final day back in London, immersing yourself in galleries, museums, parks, street markets, West End shows or East End cafes – or whatever takes your fancy. Best of all, many of the top cultural experiences are free .

A hiker walking alongside Hadrians Wall near Crag Lough in Northumberland, England

The wild side of England – a 10-day itinerary

This trip is a tour through the best of England's natural landscapes, the inspiration for generations of poets, writers and composers. Put on your hiking boots as we meander through some of the country's finest national parks and open countryside.

There are several different entry points and bases to choose from for each of the parks so driving distance and public transport connections can vary. Generally, the driving distance between each point on this itinerary is between 1.5 and 2.5 hours.

Day 1: Ramble along Hadrian’s Wall

Start at the spectacular Roman remains of Hadrian's Wall , one of England’s finest reminders of the classical era, where you can explore the ruins of Roman forts and stride, centurion-style, beside ancient ramparts.

Day 2: Unleash your inner poet in Lake District National Park

Continue into Cumbria to view the high peaks and deep lakes of the Lake District National Park. Once the spiritual home of Wordsworth and the Romantic poets, Lakeland is now a magnet for outdoor enthusiasts, with hikes for all abilities, plus cozy inns and country hotels to retreat to afterward.

Day 3: Find literary inspiration at Yorkshire Dales National Park

Traveling east from the Lakes carries you across the Pennines – the chain of hills known as 'the backbone of England' – to reach the green fells (hilltops) and dales (valleys) of the Yorkshire Dales National Park . Nearby are the dramatic moors around Emily Brontë's former home at Haworth – inspiration for Wuthering Heights .

Day 4: Take a spa break in Peak District National Park

Travel south through the hills and dales of the Peak District National Park . Buxton makes a great base for an overnight stop – you can enjoy the town’s Thermal Spa and duck into the magnificent Poole’s Cavern . Stop off to explore the lovely parklands around Chatsworth House near Bakewell if time allows.

Day 5: Feel a natural symphony in the Cotswolds

Travel through central England, via Elgar's beloved Malvern Hills, to reach the classic English countryside of the Cotswolds . Named for its famous rolling hills, this lovely landscape is worth meandering through slowly, by car or bicycle, on foot or on horseback.

Day 6: Unravel the mysteries of Salisbury Plain

Continue southwards to enjoy the epic emptiness of Salisbury Plain, home to Stonehenge and other intriguing archaeological relics. Nearby is Avebury , England’s other great stone circle, with cozy pubs for a mid-walk pint.

A large ammonite fossil in a beach boulder at Lyme Regis on Dorset's Jurassic Coast

Day 7: Find fossils on the Jurassic Coast

A few miles more and you're on Dorset 's spectacular fossil-ridden Jurassic Coast. There are dozens of circular walking routes to explore, and Lyme Regis makes for the perfect seaside pit stop.

Day 8: Track down wild ponies in Exmoor National Park

Head further west to take in the lush farmland of Devon and the heathery hills and sandy coves of Exmoor National Park . This otherworldly landscape is often graced by the appearance of wild ponies and deer so keep a camera to hand.

Day 9: Get uplifted on the moors of Dartmoor National Park

Onward to the eerie granite tors of Dartmoor National Park , which offer some of the country's most bleakly beautiful views. The famous mist adds to the haunting magic, although not without some navigation challenges. It’s easy to see how Dartmoor inspired Arthur Conan Doyle’s The Hound of the Baskervilles .

Day 10: Finish is cozy coves in Cornwall

Finally, enjoy the famous vistas of pretty ports, gorse-clad cliffs and sparkling bays in Cornwall . Finish this bucolic excursion at Land's End, where the English mainland finally runs out of steam and plunges headlong into the restless ocean.

Latrines at Housesteads Fort Roman ruins

Introducing Roman England – a 7-day itinerary

What did the Romans do for us? Find out on this south-to-north train trip back into England’s past, covering 572 miles (920 km) of landscapes and history.

Day 1: Hello Londinium

Londinium, the largest city in ancient Britannia, was a Roman creation. For an overview, start with the Museum of London ’s excellent Roman galleries, then see the remains of the 2nd-century amphitheater at Guildhall Art Gallery , the Temple of Mithras in the Bloomberg Building, and parts of the original Roman city walls just outside the exit of Tower Hill Underground station.

Go from London to Fishbourne: Take the train from Victoria Station to Fishbourne (1hr 50min).

Day 2: The villas of Fishbourne Palace

Romanized Britons built lavish country villas with all the latest mod-cons of the age, and one prime example is Fishbourne Palace near Chichester. Inside, the mosaics, especially the famous Dolphin Mosaic, are exquisite. Outside, the recreated villa gardens are the oldest in the UK.

Go from Fishbourne to Bath: Take the train from Fishbourne to Bath (3hrs).

The Roman Baths gave the town of Bath its name

Day 3: Take a bath in Bath

The Romans didn’t discover the waters at Bath, but they did build a huge bathing complex over them in the city they named Aquae Sulis. The 19th-century building over the site today contains the original Roman pools and a museum. For more modern dunking, the Thermae Bath Spa is just around the corner.

Go from Bath to Chester: Take the train from Bath to Chester (4hrs).

Day 4: Stand in the amphitheater of Chester

The amphitheater at Deva Victrix (ancient Chester ) was the largest in Britannia, built for the entertainment and training of the Roman soldiers stationed here. Excavated sections include two entrances used by performers. Nearby, in the middle of a former Roman quarry, the Minerva Shrine has a sculpture of the goddess of war and craftsmanship.

Go from Chester to York: Take the train from Chester to York (3hrs).

Day 5: Enjoy Eboracum (aka York)

When two Roman emperors die in your city and one is proclaimed there (Constantine the Great – his statue sits outside York Minster ), you’ve earned your place in Roman history. Eboracum, the Roman city of York, was founded by soldiers in 71 CE. Roman-era remnants include the remains of a basilica beneath York Minster and a bathhouse in the Roman Bath pub.

Go from York to Hadrian's Wall: Take the train to Hexham (1hr 45min).

An evening view of York with York Minster in the background

Day 6: Patrol along Hadrian’s Wall

Hadrian’s Wall was a full stop in stone, marking the northernmost limits of the expansion of the Roman Empire. Built up from 122 CE onwards, this fortified wall stretches (almost) coast to coast across northern England. Highlights include Housesteads Fort and the Vindolanda Museum with handwritten letters from Romans stationed on the wall. Connect the sites along the wall using the AD122 bus , which starts from the abbey town of Hexham.

Go from Hadrian's Wall to London: Trains run from Hexham back to London, with a change in Newcastle (from 4.5 hrs).

Day 7: Back to Londinium

Spend a final day in the capital, admiring some of the finest Roman treasures unearthed in England at the stunning British Museum . Seek out the Mildenhall Treasure – a remarkable haul of Roman silver discovered by a farmer in Suffolk in 1942.

Destination expert AnneMarie McCarthy reviewed and updated this text for accuracy and relevance. Some content has been adapted from Lonely Planet's print edition.

Explore related stories

Little red car driving near Aysgarth in the Yorkshire Dales on a sunny September day. Bolton castle seen in the far distance.

Jul 17, 2023 • 8 min read

Be inspired by these road trips across England to take a multiday drive through gorgeous landscapes, quaint villages and along epic coastlines.

Nov 16, 2019 • 6 min read

Catie visited coffee shops around the city, from Abraço (second from right, top row) to Café Leon Dore (second from left, bottom row). Photographs: Catie Kelly.

Mar 22, 2024 • 9 min read

Mar 21, 2024 • 10 min read

Mar 17, 2024 • 10 min read

Mar 12, 2024 • 11 min read

London, England/United Kingdom - August 25th 2019: Notting hill Carnival kids day dancers and revellers

Mar 11, 2024 • 5 min read

Mar 10, 2024 • 7 min read

Mar 2, 2024 • 7 min read

Feb 29, 2024 • 2 min read

The Ultimate 10-Day England Itinerary: 3 Perfect Routes

Last Updated on January 3, 2024

by Maggie Turansky

Disclaimer: This article contains affiliate links. That means if you click a link and make a purchase, we may make a small commission. As an Amazon Associate we earn from qualifying purchases. For more information, see our privacy policy.

Planning the perfect England itinerary can get a bit overwhelming, especially when you’re looking at exploring the country outside of the capital. There is so much to see and do in England that you can be forgiven if you feel slightly dazed when trying to figure out how to pack everything into a short period of time. However, if you’re planning to spend 10 days in England, there are tons of options available for you that can take you all over the country.

Far too many visitors to England set their sites only on London and fail to realise all that lies elsewhere in the country, from beautiful beaches to historic towns to stunning natural vistas — England has it all.

So if you’re interested in mapping out the perfect 10-day itinerary you’ve come to the right place. We’ve lived in and travelled around England extensively and have a lot of knowledge about where to go and how long to spend in each amazing destination in this beautiful country.

Table of Contents

Getting To & Around England

The road and rail systems in England are well-developed, but it can still take some planning to figure out how you want to get around.

First and foremost, you need to figure out which airport or city you will be flying into. If you’re planning on including London on your trip to England (or even if you’re not), then it’s probably easiest to fly into the capital, however, it is worth noting that there are a total of six international airports that serve the greater London area – these include Heathrow, Gatwick, Luton, Stansted, London City and Southend.

If you are coming from any further than continental Europe, then it is likely you will only fly into Heathrow or Gatwick, located to the southeast and south of Central London respectively. Getting to central London from any of the area’s main airports is straightforward and easy, as there are many different options available.

Once you’ve figured out your plan to get to England, you need to find out how you plan to get around. As I mentioned earlier, the public transit system in the vast majority of England is incredibly well-developed and easy to navigate.

As a general rule, if you’re planning on spending a good amount of time in cities, you can plan to rely solely on the public transport system and your own two feet to get around. This holds especially true for London, but can apply to most major metropolitan areas in England.

Modern Double Decker Bus in the streets of London.

When you venture outside of the capital or other cities to enjoy the countryside and rolling hills of England, is when you may want to consider renting a car. While you don’t really need a car in the cities, having your own vehicle when exploring national parks or smaller villages is generally preferable as it can give you an infinite more amount of flexibility and control over your itinerary.

Driving in England is safe and easy, as the roads are in fantastic condition and people are generally very courteous drivers.

Keep in mind for those coming from abroad that they do drive on the left-hand side of the road in England and while this may seem daunting for those who are not used to it, it takes surprisingly little time to get the hang of it — especially if there is other traffic on the road!

If you’re planning on hiring a car while in England, we recommend booking through Rentalcars.com. This platform aggregates prices across many major car hire companies, ensuring that you get a great deal for your rental car.

It’s also worth considering taking out an excess insurance policy through a third party like iCarHireInsurance which will typically be cheaper compared to taking out the equivalent insurance through the car rental company.

If you don’t want to rent a car for your England road trip itinerary or just plan to get one for a couple of days but not for the entirety of your trip, then you’ll likely be wondering what the best way to get between cities is in England.

The rail network is going to be the most comfortable and efficient way to travel between English destinations and the system is extensive and incredibly easy to use. However, trains can be quite expensive in England if not booked far enough in advance. To avoid overpaying on a train ticket, we suggest using Omio to book your journeys well in advance.

If you want to save some money during your trip to England, then the bus is your best bet. Coaches in England are frequent and extensive and can cost a fraction of the same route on the train, however, they are not as comfortable and can be a fair bit slower depending on the route. Again, you can book coach routes online here.

London and Southwest Itinerary

This first itinerary for England has you exploring London and some of the most vibrant regions and cities to the west and along the coast. Though this itinerary can be done by public transport, it would be best done if you rented a car on the fourth day when leaving London.

Days 1-3: London

The best place to begin any trip to England is in its historic and vibrant capital city, London. As one of the largest cities in Europe, London is packed in the brim with cool and interesting things to see and do and there is no way that you will be able to pack it all into a mere three days , so it’s best not even to try.

Instead, concentrate your first day on the sites of central London, including Trafalgar Square, the National Gallery, Green Park, the Palaces of Westminster, Big Ben and Westminster Abbey. Take a walking tour if you want to get your bearings and get some historical context for all the sites you’re seeing.

On your second day, visit the Tower of London, gaze in awe at the Tower Bridge, walk across the ultra-modern Millennium Bridge to the Tate Modern and visit St Paul’s Cathedral and Borough Market.

And on your third day in London, visit the incredible British Museum (the Egyptian exhibit is particularly fascinating if you ask me!), before browsing the shops on Oxford Street and in Covent Garden before wandering through the eclectic and trendy SoHo neighbourhood.

For visitors who plan to visit a lot of paid attractions, buying a London Go City Pass will save you money on entrance fees.

If you’re not interested in seeing more of the city, you could opt for a day trip to countless places including Windsor Castle, Oxford, Cambridge , Bath, the Seven Sisters or even to York. You can visit these places independently via coach or train or take a day tour if you’d prefer a guide.

Though three days in London won’t really allow you to venture past the city centre and to see anything much past the main tourist sites, it can still give you an excellent feel for the city (plus plenty of this to visit when you inevitably return!)

The Big Ben, the Houses of Parliament and Westminster Bridge in London.

Where to Stay in London

Hotel Edward – A great mid-range option in Paddington, west London, this is a great place to stay if you want to be situated close to central London. They have countless great rooms available.

Sanderson Hotel – A hip luxury option in SoHo, this hotel is located only a quick dash away from Oxford Street. They have countless plush rooms on offer and a number of other amenities including a restaurant/bar, gym, spa and many others.

Astor Hyde Park Hostel – This hip hostel is perfect for budget and solo travellers in London. Located centrally close to Hyde Park, it is well situated to explore a lot of London’s top attractions, has fantastic common areas, and offers both dorm and private rooms.

Not quite what you’re looking for? Click here to browse more London hotels!

Days 4-5: Bristol

From London, it’s time to head west to the trendy city of Bristol. This city is often overlooked by tourists and it really is a shame — it really has so much to offer. Though you can easily visit Bristol as a day trip from London, it is worth spending a night here, especially because you can spend your first day exploring all of the amazing sites on the way to the city.

On your way to Bristol, make sure to make a number of stop-offs and detours in order to really pack a lot of the highlights of West England into a short period of time.

A short detour from the motorway to Bristol will lead you to the iconic neolithic site of Stonehenge and a bit further afield, you can visit Salisbury with its famous cathedral.

And just a bit before you hit Bristol proper, make sure to spend a good amount of time exploring the beautiful city of Bath . This historic spa town has been an important settlement since Roman times and there are lots of cool things to see and do here.

Once in Bristol, there are lots of things to see and do in order to really get to know the city, but you can pack in into one day easily, you can take a guided tour or go about independently.

Learn about Bristol’s history at the fantastic M Shed museum or learn more about its maritime history at Brunel’s SS Great Britain museum.

If you’re interested in street art, you will be delighted to hear that the famous artist Banksy got his start in Bristol and it has a thriving arts scene. Bristol also has a wonderful food and craft beer scene and it can be enjoyed while exploring the revitalised area of Wapping Wharf.

One of the most famous murals in Bristol

Where to Stay in Bristol

Victoria Square Hotel Clifton Village – A plush boutique hotel located in Bristol’s lush Clifton suburb, this is a great place to stay if you’re looking for a mid-range option in the city. They have a range of rooms available and a hearty breakfast included in the nightly price.

The Bristol Hotel – The ideal luxury hotel in Bristol, this place is located within easy walking distance of the city’s top attractions and they have a number of clean comfortable and chic rooms on offer.

The Full Moon Backpackers – An ideal option for those solo and budget travellers amongst us, this hostel is a great choice in Bristol. They have a number of dorms and private rooms available, fantastic common areas and a fantastic laid-back vibe, perfect for exploring Bristol!

Not quite what you’re looking for? Click here to browse more Bristol hotels!

Days 6-8: Cornwall

On your sixth day of this itinerary, it’s time to drive even further southwest to one of the most beautiful and sunny places in England – Cornwall!

The southwestermost region of the country, Cornwall has long been a favourite holiday destination for locals but foreign tourists rarely venture this way, and it’s incredibly hard to see why — there is so much see and do!

Cornwall is most famous for its beaches, but there is a lot more to it as well. If you’re a nature lover, there are countless walks to go on. If you want to try your hand at surfing, make sure to hit the waves in Newquay, the capital of the sport in England! History buffs will delight in the castles and ruins that dot the region as well.

One of the most famous castles is St Michael’s Mount, just outside of Penzance, which is situated on its own island accessible by a causeway that appears as low tide. If you’re a fan of Arthurian legend, then make sure to visit the dramatic ruins of Tintagel, rumoured to be the birthplace of this legendary British ruler.

Spending two or three days in Cornwall is enough to really see a lot of the region and get a good feel four it, but there is always more to see if you spend more time!

Where to Stay in Cornwall

Palma Guest House – Situated in the heart of St Ives, this is an excellent place to base yourself in Cornwall. They have a number of comfortable rooms available and are located within easy walking distance of all this artsy town has to offer!

Selkies NQY – Located in Newquay just a few hundred metres from the beach, this is a fantastic luxury option for those visiting Cornwall. Great for a romantic couples getaway, they have a number of luxe rooms available.

Lifeboat Inn – Situated on the bay in the lovely artist’s town of St Ives, this is a great place to stay for couples or families alike. They have a number of spacious rooms available and an option to include breakfast in the room rate.

Not quite what you’re looking for? Click here to browse other places to stay in Cornwall!

Days 9-10: Brighton

And finally on this 10-day southwestern England route, round out your time in the lovely coastal city of Brighton ! Located due south of London, Brighton is about a five-hour drive from Cornwall, but we recommend taking an entire day on the journey as there are so many incredible stops along the way .

Take the time to enjoy such places like Dartmoor National Park in Devon, the Jurassic Coast in Dorset, the beautiful seaside city of Bournemouth, the historic port city of Portsmouth or even the lovely New Forest in Hampshire before arriving in Brighton.

Once in Brighton, take the time to explore the city centre and the lovely, albeit rocky, beach. Of course, no trip to Brighton would be complete without enjoying yourselves at the iconic Brighton Pier.

If you want to get a bit more active and are not interested in exploring the city much, then the iconic walk along the Seven Sisters cliffs is easily accessible from Brighton. This is one of the most beautiful day hikes in the UK and will take you along the stunning rim of the famous white cliffs of this region of England.

One of the best views on Seven Sisters Cliffs Walk

Conveniently, Brighton is located only about a thirty- to forty-minute train ride from Gatwick Airport and other London area airports are easy to access from the city as well, so it makes for a perfect place to end your trip to England.

Where to Stay in Brighton

Artist Residence, Brighton – This quaint boutique hotel is perfect for those looking for something a bit more hip and trendy while staying in Brighton. They have a number of great rooms available, a great location and fantastic amenities including great common areas and a tapas restaurant on site.

Seadragon Backpackers – A great backpackers hostel perfect for budget travellers, they are well-located and have both dorm and private rooms available. They have great common areas and a central location perfect for exploring the best of what Brighton has to offer.

Not quite what you’re looking for? Click here to browse more Brighton hotels!

London and North England Itinerary

If you’re interested in visiting London and then heading up north during your ten days in England, then this is the perfect itinerary for you. Exploring the historic cities and natural areas of the North, you’re sure to enjoy this route through England.

Again, this is another itinerary where it may prove helpful to have a car for some of it, especially for the bit through the Lake District National Park . If you want to save some money, consider renting a car for a few days from York before continuing on an England by train itinerary.

Spend your first three days of this route in the capital of London, following the same daily activities as mentioned in the Southwest England route above.

Days 4-5: York

From London, hop on a train or hire a car and drive north to the lovely walled city of York. If you do happen to drive (and it is recommended!), then make sure to spend the day stopping off at all of the incredible sites along the way and enjoying the gorgeous English countryside.

Some of these include the lovely university city of Cambridge , the historic city of Worcester, Warwick Castle, Robin Hood’s home of Nottingham or even the incredible Peak District National Park in Derbyshire in central England. You could, perhaps, even make a stop in Oxford or at the incredible Blenheim Palace. Or you could detour to Stratford-upon-Avon – the hometown of Shakespeare!

View of Kings College Chapel in Cambridge

On the next day, plan to spend it exploring the city. You can see a lot of York in one day and some of the highlights include walking along the city walls, exploring the incredible York Minster, taking in the ruins of St Mary’s Abbey in the Museum Gardens, wandering along The Shambles and learning about the city’s history at the York Castle Museum.

If you’d rather get out into nature, then explore more of rural Yorkshire with a trip to the North York Moors National Park or the Yorkshire Dales National Park — these parks are perfect for nature lovers and Bronte fans alike!

Where to Stay in York

The Queens Hotel – A great boutique option, this place is centrally located, has a number of comfortable rooms on offer and a great and hearty full breakfast is available at an additional cost.

The Grand, York – This is the place to stay in York if you want to be in the lap of luxury during your time in the northern city. They have many plush rooms to choose from, countless luxurious amenities, and a great location for easy sightseeing.

Astor York – An excellent, highly-rated hostel in York, this place is perfect for budget backpackers and solo travellers. They have a range of both private rooms and dorm beds available and are located within ten minutes of York’s historic centre.

Not quite what you’re looking for? Click here to browse more York hotels!

View of the York Minster from the City Walls

Days 6-7: Lake District

If you didn’t get out and enjoy the natural splendours of Yorkshire, it’s time to do so now in one of England’s most famous national parks — the Lake District. Located in Cumbria, this beautiful area is filled with incredible lakes, mountains and charming villages.

You can spend your time here going on countless walks — there are walks for all skill and fitness levels. There are also countless charming and historic villages to explore, classic pubs to warm up in, and just some absolutely beautiful scenery to enjoy.

Even if you’re not much of an outdoor lover, there s something for everyone in the Lake District and it is well worth taking the time to head out here before heading down to your final destination on this 10-day route through England.

Where to Stay in the Lake District

The Cavendish Arms – A cosy, mid-range option in the Lake District is this historic pub, located in the lovely village of Cartmel. They have a number of clean and comfortable rooms available and a great breakfast available to enjoy each morning.

Embleton Spa Hotel – If you are after a luxury stay in the Lake District, then this is the perfect choice for you. Located in an 18th-century farmhouse in the beautiful countryside, they have a number of plush rooms available, private apartments, and countless amenities to make your stay a great one.

Kendal Hostel – A great option if you’re travelling on a tight budget or solo, this hostel is one of the best-rated in the Lake District. Situated in a historic Georgian townhouse in the town of Kendal, they have a range of dorm and private rooms available and good self-catering facilities.

Not quite what you’re looking for? Click here to browse more Lake District hotels!

Days 8-10: Liverpool

And finally on the North England route, end your trip in the historic, vibrant and wonderful city of Liverpool .

Perhaps most famous for being the birthplace of a little-known band called The Beatles, there are plenty of Fab Four-centric sites to see in this city, however, there is so much more in this historic city.

Liverpool has seen a bit of a resurgence in recent years, especially around the newly refurbished Royal Albert Dock which is packed full of trendy restaurants and shops.

You can also learn about Liverpool’s seafaring history as a port city at the Merseyside Maritime Museum. Also worth a visit is the harrowing International Slavery Museum.

Football fans will rejoice in the chance to tour Anfield Stadium , the home to Liverpool FC and Fab Four fans are sure to enjoy the Beatles Story or even a Beatles Tour.

You can even take the time to take a day trip to the nearby city of Manchester if you want to see more Northern English cities.

Where to Stay in Liverpool

The Dolby Hotel – A good option for mid-range travellers. this hotel has a great location overlooking the River Mersey. Located within easy walking distance of the top sites of the city, they have a number of rooms to choose from and breakfast included in the price.

Titanic Hotel Liverpool – If you want a luxurious stay in Liverpool, then look no further than this swanky hotel. Situated a stone’s throw from the top attractions in the city, they have countless amenities and wonderful, comfortable rooms available.

YHA Liverpool Albert Dock – A fantastic backpacker’s hostel, this is the perfect choice for solo and budget travellers. It is located in the centre of the city close to the top attractions and sites, they have both dorm beds and private rooms available and great common areas.

Not quite what you’re looking for? Click here to browse other hotels in Liverpool .

Beatles history is everywhere in Liverpool!

Northern England Itinerary

If you’ve been to London already and would rather spend your ten days in England somewhere outside of the capital, then this is a great route for you. Still beginning and ending in London, this route is great for those who are planning a trip to the other parts of England and don’t want to concentrate on the capital city.

Day 1: London

Begin your itinerary in London and take a day to explore an area of the city that you haven’t had the chance to yet — there is always something to see and do in London. Take in the street art in Shoreditch, stuff your face at Broadway Market if it’s a Saturday or get lost in the expansive Kew Gardens or Richmond Park .

There are far too many things to do in London that it’s worth spending at least a day in the city even if you’ve visited before.

Days 2-3: York

From London, it’s time to head to York. Follow the suggestions in the itinerary above for the ideas for how to spend your time in York.

Days 4-5: Lake District National Park

From York, head out into the great wide open and enjoy the lovely scenery and villages of the Lake District National Park for two full days.

Days 6-8: Liverpool

And from the Lake District, head to historic Liverpool and enjoy all of the fun things there are to see and do in this historic city.

Days 9-10: Cotswolds

On your final two days, it’s time to head back down south to explore an incredibly charming area of England within easy reach of London – the Cotswolds .

This region, located to the northwest of London, is famed for its quintessentially English towns with thatch-roofed homes and historic pubs. It is the perfect place to end your England itinerary.

Take the time to explore quaint villages like Bourton-on-the-Water, Painswick, Burford, Chipping Campden and countless others. These are some of the most beautiful towns in all of England and are sure to transport you back in time.

If you want to get out into nature, then make sure to check out the Cotswolds AONB (area of outstanding natural beauty) which is full of walking trails and lovely, bucolic vistas.

If you’re looking for a quaint and quiet place to round out this epic route through England, you seriously cannot go wrong with spending some time in the Cotswolds before flying home from London.

Where to Stay in the Cotswolds

The Lamb Inn – This charming pub located in the village of Bourton-on-the-Water is the perfect place to rest your head in the Cotswolds. Oozing with charm, they have a range of comfortable and clean rooms available and a great pub downstairs to grab a pint a great bite to eat.

The Fleece – Located in the village of Witney not too far from Oxford, this is a great boutique hotel to stay at in the Cotswolds. T hey have a range of cosy and comfortable rooms available and a fantastic breakfast cooked each morning.

The Old Stocks Inn – Situated in the charming village of Stow-on-the-Wold, this lovely inn is the perfect place to stay if you’re on the hunt for a luxury stay in the Cotswolds. They have a number of beautiful rooms to choose from and lots of other amenities to make your stay fantastic.

Not quite what you’re looking for? Click here to browse more Cotswolds hotels!

There are so many options of places to visit and things to see during your 10 days in England but, hopefully, these three great routes are able to help you plan the trip of your dreams! From historic cities, gorgeous natural scenery, inviting pubs and a wonderful coastline, England has so much to offer visitors — so make sure to see more than just London!

Are you planning a trip to England? Have you visited before? Let us know in the comments!

The charming village of St Ives is a great place to stay in Cornwall

The Perfect 3 Days in Cornwall Itinerary

9 Best Towns to Stay in Cornwall

Visit Oxford or Cambridge: Choosing a London Day Trip

About Maggie Turansky

Maggie is a co-founder and writer for The World Was Here First. Originally from the US, she has lived in five different countries and has travelled to dozens more, both solo and with her partner, Michael. She particularly loves exploring Spain and spending time in the Caucasus and the Baltics. Read more about Maggie

Hi I am planning to ciné to the uk Dec/Jan 20 days

My plan so far is London 4 days 29/12-2/1. Then Bath as a base to tour the south. Can you recommend how many days in the south based at Bath then where in the North or ? I was planning on hiring a car in Bath or London.

Also open to any addition suggestions like quick visit to Ireland or Scotland if you feel it is with timeframe.

Thank you A

Hello Maggie, enjoyed your article on visiting England. Our family is planning to visit England from July 9 through July 20. We are from Boston, MA. Wanted your recommendation as we would also like to visit Scotland. How should I plan my iteneray.

Thank you, Khuzema Safri (Khuz).

Thanks for your comment! If you want to visit Scotland, you may find this article helpful in planning your trip: https://www.theworldwasherefirst.com/london-scotland-ireland-itinerary/

10 Questions to Ask Yourself Before You Plan Your UK Trip

TripSavvy / Ashley Nicole DeLeon

Planning a trip to the United Kingdom (UK) probably seems pretty easy. The language is almost never a problem, the visa requirements are not particularly onerous for vacationers from North and South America, Australasia or Europe, and there's a good choice of ways to arrive and get around.

And, you know, it probably is as easy as all that. You could pop over to London and take a few day trips in the immediate area, then spend a day or two venturing a bit further afield—to Oxford or the Cotswolds or Stratford-upon-Avon —and, hey presto, what a great vacation you've had.

But whether you buy your vacation basics online for yourself or use a travel agent to book a tour, a little advance planning can open your eyes to corners of the UK you never even heard of, let alone thought of visiting.

It's all a matter of asking yourself the right questions. Considering who you really are (from a travel perspective at any rate) and what you really enjoy seeing and doing can turn an okay trip into a great one.

But where do you start? The 10 questions that follow should help keep your vacation planning in sharp focus.

Who Is Going?

Unlike some vacation destinations that are more suitable for couples than families, or older than younger people, the United Kingdom has something for everyone. It's just a question of choosing wisely for your party. Time to zero in on your travel profile.

A couple planning a romantic trip? Think about romantic things to do and see , the best places to smooch in Britain or some very nice spots to pop the question .
A family traveling with children? Young and old will enjoy all the treasures on the Harry Potter trail , the fun at Legoland Windsor, the farm holidays, family cycling, and camping trips. The UK has one of the world's best (and its first) safari parks . And there's even a rich family schedule at the world famous Edinburgh Festival.
A large group? Plan a trip for a sports team, a hiking party, a group of cyclists, a clan reunion, a class trip by checking out hostels or the new, more glamorous "poshtels." Or consider large vacation rentals ; there are some remarkably luxurious homes, suitable for a big family reunion, that are good value on a per person basis.
Outdoor enthusiasts looking for adventure? The UK's varied national parks have some of the best free hill walks, mountain hikes and sheer cliff climbs in the world. Go fossil hunting on the Jurassic Coast and check out the surf on the beaches of Cornwall. Some of the UK's most remote parks in England, Scotland and Wales are now registered as world-class Dark Sky Reserves where you can go star gazing in blissful peace. And if it's an adrenaline rush you're after, check out the Northern Hemisphere's fastest zip line in Wales.
Millennials and party animals? The UK has some of the best rock and pop festivals in the world and almost every UK city worth its salt has great clubs and venues for live music and hot DJs.
Mature and looking for peaceful surroundings? Try one of the UK's lovely country house hotels, where accommodations range from traditional to modern boutique, where spa retreats and pools are common and where the food is almost always superb.
Pet owners? Learn about the UK Pet Travel Scheme that makes it easier than ever to bring the family pet along on your travels.

Being clear about exactly who is going to the UK—to the members of your party, yourself, and your travel agent —narrows the infinity of choices and makes planning your UK trip that much easier.

How Much Can You Spend?

How much will a vacation in the UK cost? There's no upper limit and minimums depending on the season, the last minute deals you can find, where you are starting out from, and so forth. Consider these prices as approximate guidelines.

Getting There

The round trip fare for two people flying to London from an East Coast USA departure point varies from about $1,200 to more than $4,000 depending upon the time of year.

How to save: The price of some package tours (including car and hotel) can be less than booking a flight alone. Most of the big transatlantic operators, including American Airlines, British Airways, and Virgin Atlantic, offer good value packages. Before you book a hotel, flight, and car separately, spend some time searching for cheap packages.

Getting Around

Renting the smallest car with a manual transmission will cost between $350-$500 for a couple of weeks. To that, add the cost of gasoline and you'll see that renting a car, in a country with excellent trains and public transportation, may not be such a good idea.

You can save by using other ways to get around. Take the Underground in London , try Britain's rail services, and take the train . For total freedom, buy a BritRail pass . Even cheaper: hop on a bus .

Accommodations

The average price of a night in a UK hotel in 2020, was just under £100—but the average price of acceptable hotel accommodation in most major cities was still above £100, with London and Edinburgh leading at about £200. Check out some of these ideas on how to save on accommodations. And if your aim is London, have a look at some cheaper places to stay just outside the capital.

Food and Drink

Expect to pay a minimum of £25-£30 per person per day. If you're really on a very tight budget, these are some ways to save on food and drink .

From £10 to £25+ per adult, per attraction. You can save a great deal by buying a UK discount pass . Some of them are only available to overseas visitors and are remarkably good value.

How Much Time Do You Have in the UK?

Trying to fit too much into your UK vacation is bound to leave you feeling rushed and unsatisfied. But you probably don't cross oceans very often so you will want to make the most of the time you have. Consider these planning approaches.

The Short Break

If you have a week or less, you could either:

Plan a two-center vacation : You might visit two cities that you find interesting—London and Edinburgh or London and Glasgow are popular combinations—or plan a short city break with some adventure at the beach or in a national park.
Use a city as a hub : If you base yourself in one of the UK's main urban hubs you can explore it and take one or two-day trips to nearby towns or scenic regions. Most UK cities are well connected, by bus and rail, to their surrounding region.

If you make your hub city or your vacation centers places with good international airport connections , good rail hubs, and good road connections for venturing further afield, you'll have more stress-free time to spend on your vacation. These locations are all well connected:

Manchester (handy for Liverpool too)

The Longer Vacation

If you have two weeks or more... You should have plenty of time to visit one of the UK's leading cities and do some touring as well. You might:

Try using several cities, in different parts of the UK as a base for further exploring. Combine London with York and Edinburgh, for example, Cardiff with Birmingham and Manchester or Glasgow. There are loads of opportunities for exploring historic sites, family attractions , castles , and stately homes within an easy train or car journey of most UK cities.
Spend a few days in a city and then take off on an in-depth exploration of a region. Some adventurous fell walking in the Lake District , for example, combines well with the UK's indie music city, Manchester. Edinburgh or Glasgow pair well with Loch Lomond and The Trossachs National Park. London makes a good partner for some time spent exploring Suffolk —the England of dreams, and East Anglia .
Take on a long distance hike , cycle or mountain bike trek along one of the UK's national paths, like The South Downs Way or the 7stanes Trails.

When Do You Want to Travel?

The UK has pretty much a two-season climate . Spring and autumn are both just brief, passing hints of summer and winter. Which of the two main seasons you choose will influence the price you pay and what you'll be able to do.

Visiting the United Kingdom in Summer

Summer is the high season. Prices for accommodation, flights, and local tours are at their most expensive. If you come in the summer—essentially from May through mid-September—here's what that premium price will get you:

Very long days so more time for touring and outdoor activities. Through mid-August, it will be light enough to be outdoors until after 10 p.m. in some parts of the country
English gardens at their best and open longer hours
The Edinburgh Festivals
Glastonbury and lots of other music festivals

Visiting the United Kingdom in Winter

Prices are lowest from mid-October to the end of March, but the days are also shortest. In mid-winter, lights may be on all day in bad weather. Sunset before 5 p.m. is typical of December and January.

If you enjoy indoor activities, shopping, museums, theatres, dining out, and nightlife, you can save a bundle and have a very good time in the United Kingdom in the winter. Here's some of what you can look forward to:

European-style Christmas markets all over the country
The best and the newest theatre in all the big cities
Bargain rates or bargain breaks at hotels and other accommodations
Wonderful Christmas choir concerts in the UK's historic cathedrals
Fire festivals in England and Scotland
Hogmanay , Beer Festivals, and Up Helly As a Viking festival all over the place.

Where Do You Want to Go?

People sometimes forget that there's a lot more to the UK than England. This is, after all, a United Kingdom of England, Scotland, Wales, and Northern Ireland. And each nation of the UK has its own distinctive personality.

Probably the most varied of the UK's nations, England offers urban lifestyles, country living, empty beaches, rugged coasts, national parks, historic touring, markets, shopping, lakes, hikes, riding, cycling—a kind of United Kingdom in miniature.

Scotland is the emptiest of the nations of the UK with great, beautiful stretches of highlands, dramatic lochs, rolling borderlands and upland moors. It also has two of the UK's most exciting cities, Glasgow and Edinburgh, and some of it's wildest holiday celebrations.

Wales is more rural than most of the UK. It has storybook pretty valleys and wonderful areas for walking. In Snowdonia , it has the highest UK mountain outside of Scotland as well as several brilliant waterfalls and cascades. In 2017, the view from the top of Snowdonia was voted the best view in Britain in a survey of 3,500 visitors. And, if you like castles, this is the place to be. Wales also has gorgeous beaches and miles of protected, heritage coastline. If you tour and visit local pubs, you are likely to hear Welsh spoken as a first language in parts of North Wales.

Northern Ireland

Belfast is experiencing a cultural revival and Northern Ireland is finally being discovered by visitors. Ulster, as it is also known, has lovely, rural landscapes, dramatic coastal features like the Giant's Causeway and some of the UK's oldest historic monuments. It has maintained an open border with Eire (the Republic of Ireland), but following the U.K.'s official withdrawal from the EU ( Brexit ), this open border policy may change.

What Do You Like to Do?

Are you outdoorsy? A history or literature buff? Mad for shopping and pampering? Maybe you like museums? The beach? Wonderful scenery to photograph?

The nice thing about the UK is that it has all the variety you might expect of a country with its rich and long heritage. Yet it's all packed into a relatively small land mass. With so much within easy reach, you could drive yourself mad trying to do and see everything. Far better to plan your trip around one or two kinds of activities you really enjoy.

Outdoors and Active

There are plenty of opportunities for hiking, cycling, riding, sailing, and more adventurous sports like hang gliding, scuba diving, and spelunking. Here are a few ideas:

Scenic walks and rugged hikes around Balmoral
Exploring UK national parks
Diving shipwrecks in Scapa Flow

Shopping, Clubbing, Dining Out

You're not just limited to London and its high prices. Here's just a sampling of what else is available:

Birmingham—A shoppers paradise with a hot music scene
Liverpool—The Beatles hometown and a historic maritime center
Manchester—Clubland and indie music central. Plus two great football teams.
Discount designer shopping
Leeds' Glamorous Shopping Arcades

From castles, stately homes , museums, and historic gardens to literary icons of the English language, you are never far from the UK's rich cultural heritage.

What Kind of Accommodations Do You Prefer?

To some degree, where you decide to stay on your first or your fiftieth visit to the UK will be a matter of price. But there are other things to consider when you are choosing the kind of accommodation you'll opt for in the UK. The way you travel (tour or stay put) the amount of do-it-for-yourself you're up for, the way you do or do not make friends on vacation are all factors. So what kind of digs will you choose?

If you are touring, staying one night here, one night there, a cheap chain hotel might be an adequate and reliable choice. On the other hand, if you are looking for a luxury or romantic experience, fine dining, bags of charm, a country house hotel might be a choice that provides indulgence for less than you might pay for similar luxury in a city.

Vacation Home Rentals

Vacation home rentals are great for independent travelers who like to cook their own meals, come and go as they please. They're also a good and money saving choice for families and groups. And these days, there a lot of amazing, historic vacation rentals available— Agatha Christie's summer home , for example, or a 14th-century hall house hidden behind brambles worthy of Sleeping Beauty.

Like a friendly environment and a chance to meet lots of people? A hostel (or these days, a "poshtel") might be just the trick; they're a lot more comfortable, clean and convenient than you might think. Or, if you are ready to graduate from couch surfing, Airbnb is just as popular—with just as many opportunities and risks—in the UK as it is in most other countries.

Bed and Breakfasts

B&Bs can offer great breakfasts, warm and friendly hosts, good locations and loads of charm without massive expense. But choose wisely. A grim B&B with an intrusive or unpleasant landlady can be dire. The AA—The UK Automobile Association—publishes an authoritative guide to the best B&Bs .

House swap to live like a local for free. It's safer and easier than ever before. And there is house swapping choices in all the cool places.

If you like living under canvas, there's no shortage of camping opportunities in the UK. There is both wild (tent) and caravan (RV) camping all over the UK. Many RV parks are open year round.

Are You a Conservative or an Adventurous Diner?

The kinds of food you prefer to eat or the amount of cooking you are prepared to do for yourself can make a big difference for both your budget and the places you choose to go.

The myth that English food is terrible is exactly that—a myth. It is possible to find food that is more than acceptable all over the UK and there are plenty of opportunities for fine dining too. It is also possible to explore a very broad range of ethnic dining styles including Indian, Balti, Singaporean, Chinese, Thai, Moroccan, Tunisian and, if you have an adventurous palate, you can dine very well for a good deal less money. Here are some other things to think about when planning your vacation:

If you like to try a different style of food every night, London is the place to be.
Some of the best seafood in the UK is available in the Southwest (Devon and Cornwall), on the Northeast coast, and in Scotland.
Cities with big ethnic populations have excellent ethnic restaurants. The Balti —a derivative of Pakistani cooking—is amazing in Birmingham.
If you're traveling with a family of fussy eaters, vacation home rental, hostelling or apartment hotels with their own kitchenettes may be your best bets.

Dressy or Casual: Which Do You Prefer?

Do you enjoy dressing for dinner or are you more of a jeans and t-shirt traveler? There are very few occasions when you really have to pull out all the stops when going out in the UK. In most cases, you can wear whatever you are most comfortable in when dining out. There are a few exceptions. Here's what to expect:

Some of the most exclusive restaurants and hotel dining rooms in London require men to wear a jacket and tie (the Ritz , for example) but that kind of formality is on the wane.
What the British call "smart casual" (which basically means you've made an effort and it shows, but you haven't gone over the top) is acceptable in most nicer restaurants.
If you like to go clubbing and you want to get into the best clubs, you have to look the part. Bring your hippest club gear or buy some when you arrive. If you think you can get into a nightclub in jeans and a t-shirt, plan on being Taylor Swift or Beyoncé.
Some country house hotels will expect you to "dress for dinner" but most won't. Smart casual is usually more than acceptable. If you are planning to stay at a very grand country house hotel, it is worth asking about dressing for dinner before you leave home—just in case.
Going to the theater or a concert does not require dressing up unless you feel like it.
If you are heading for the races at Ascot, the Henley Regatta , or Glorious Goodwood, a very smart dress is the rule. For women a smart skirt suit or a flowery dress (and on Ladies Day, a hat); for men, suit and a tie. Many men choose to wear formal morning suits and top hats on Ladies' Day at Ascot—but if you have not been invited to the Royal enclosure, don't worry about it.

How Will You Travel to the UK?

If you are flying to the UK—and most non-European visitors do—you have a bigger choice of airports than you might imagine. Most visitors choose Heathrow or Gatwick but, if you are able to fly into one of the UK's other international airports, you could save money or land more conveniently at your ultimate destination.

If you are lucky enough to cruise to the UK, you'll likely arrive at Southampton, Harwich, or the new luxury cruise port in Liverpool. You can give yourself the experience of arriving in the UK by sea and, for example, seeing the White Cliffs of Dover, without the commitment of an ocean cruise. Fly into a European city—Amsterdam, Paris, Brussels, Dublin, Belfast—and take a ferry. Ferries from Ireland come into the UK at Fishguard in southwest Wales, Holyhead in northwest Wales and Liverpool. Ferries from Continental Europe arrive at a range of the English Channel and North Sea ports.

The Channel Tunnel has made a world of difference to traveling to the UK from Continental Europe. It is now much easier than ever before to combine a European touring vacation with a trip to the UK, with or without a car.

If you are driving, take the Eurotunnel Car Transport Shuttle , also known as The Chunnel, from near Calais to Folkestone.
Touring without a car? Take the Eurostar from Paris and other continental points, direct to London in about 2 hours and 15 minutes. BritRail Pass holders can book Eurostar tickets at a discount.

10 Great Reasons to Visit the United Kingdom

Use an Alternative UK International Airport to Save a Bundle

Top Discount Passes for UK Heritage Attractions

How to Travel From London to Paris by Train, Bus, Plane, and Car

Top UK Destinations for Stone Circles and Ancient Sites

Your Trip to the United Kingdom: The Complete Guide

Your Trip to Edinburgh: The Complete Guide

17 Best Romantic Things to Do in the United Kingdom

The Best Time to Visit the United Kingdom

How to Travel From London to Glasgow by Train, Bus, Plane, and Car

English Premier League: Travel Guide for a Soccer Game in England

18 Top Things to Do for Easter Weekend in the United Kingdom

Stay Cheaper By Staying Close to - Not in - London

Your Trip to Birmingham, England: The Complete Guide

Getting Around Britain - A Guide to Transportation Options

12 "Must-See" Places in England, Scotland and Wales

2 Weeks in England: 3 Itineraries

DISCLAIMER: This post might have links to travel services and products that we enjoy. We might make a commission from it at no extra cost to you.

England is undeniably one of the most well-liked vacation spots in the world, has practically offers a wide selection of exciting things to do and places to venture for any type of visitor. This small but influential nation, a part of the stunning British Isles, is packed with fascinating history, attractive cities, and a wealth of cultural traditions.

There are historical sites wherever you look, including ancient structures, Roman ruins, medieval town centres, and castles dating back hundreds of years.

The United Kingdom is situated between the North Sea and North Atlantic. Belgium, Germany, France, Denmark, Norway, Netherlands, and the Faroe Islands share maritime borders with England.

In this collection of travel itineraries for 2 weeks in England, there are three options for you to choose from depending on what you prefer to see. There is a travel plan for first-time visitors, hiking itinerary, and a guide for those who want to explore the coasts of England.

RELATED POST: 2 weeks in the UK and 2 weeks in Ireland and Northern Ireland itineraries

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE VISITING ENGLAND

4 images - aerial shot of stonehenge, london bridge, royal pavilion, and peak district - 2 Weeks in England Itinerary

Before you book your flight and hotel, check out these basic travel tips for England. Make sure you are visiting at the right time, depending on the activities you plan to do. The following information will also help you write your own travel itinerary that is suitable for you.

When is the best time to go to England

Have you heard of the joke about how much it rains in England? Well, it’s true. But you can still enjoy a sunny day if you plan right. England’s driest time of the year is from February until April. However, this is also the busiest time of the year.

If you want to come here during this time, best book your accommodation in advance. Both to make sure you have a place to stay that is decent in quality and to avoid high costs due to last-minute planning.

The wettest months in England are from autumn until winter. It doesn’t snow that much in England in winter, but it rains most days. If you don’t mind that, it’s a great time to visit in terms of cost. Accommodations are more affordable from September to November. At Christmas, it starts to go up again all the way until January.

Are 2 weeks enough for England

14 days in England is an ideal time. You will be able to cover many magnificent places but also, won’t find yourself with too much extra time feeling bored. If you rent a car to explore outside London, you can maximise your time even more.

If you have two weeks in England, you can definitely visit 3-4 cities. Just make sure to arrange the places according to the distance from one another, so you don’t track back and waste too much time in a train, bus, or car driving around.

Getting around

The best way to get around England is by using public transport; trains and buses. The trains go to pretty much most major cities in England. If you plan to go to rural areas, the bus will surely service there.

You will find ticket machines at the train or bus station that accept card and/or cash payments. Make sure to download the Trainline app to purchase your train tickets in advance.

If you want more freedom of your time, you can rent a car . But only do this once you’re ready to explore outside London. Traffic in London is just not worth your time. It would make more sense to pick up the car in London and drop it off in the exact location, especially if your flight will leave from London anyway.

Language and currency

English is the primary language in England. However, there are many accents as you move around that can be hard to understand at times.

GBP or Great British Pounds (£), is the main currency in England. ATM machines will produce cash in pounds. Payment using a bank card is the most preferred way in England when settling your bill. There are also now e-wallet which might not be possible for you. But remember to always bring cash with you. Around £50 will be ideal in case your card doesn’t work.

England is part of the UK, meaning the government implements the same visa policies as Scotland, Wales, and Northern Ireland.

If you hold a passport from most countries in the Americas (North and Latin America), you can enter and travel around England for six months. The same visa policy for visitors with passports from Australia, New Zealand, Malaysia, Singapore, Japan, South Korea, Namibia, Botswana, Europe, and of course, territories of the British colonies.

You must get an electronic visa waiver if your passport is from Saudi Arabia, Qatar, and UAE. Passport holders of Ireland have freedom of movement in the UK.

What is the average cost for 2 weeks in England

London alone is such an expensive city, England in general for a 2-week trip can cost more than any other country in the world you have been to.

On average, $2,200 for two weeks in England is ideal. Accommodation is the most expensive. Regarding food, you can bring down the cost a little bit. You should also plan to use public transport, which will help to ensure you don’t spend too much.

If a bunk bed and sharing living spaces don’t bother you, a shoestring budget of $1,900 is possible for a 14 days trip in England. But remember that most hostels are located a bit out of the city. Check if you can rent a push bike to help you get around. Instead of booking a tour, you can try to look for “free walking tours” which operate in “tips”.

For those with a budget to go on a luxury trip, $3,500 will be a friendly budget. You won’t be able to stay in 5-star hotels the entire time, but you can book them if you plan to do so outside London. You can eat out and move around using a taxi and ride-hailing apps on this budget.

Other basic travel tips

As mentioned before, it’s best to book things in advance regarding taking a trip to England. Good hotels get books quickly. Don’t worry, many of these travel sites offer flexible cancellations if you change your mind or plans.

PINNED MAP OF TOP THINGS TO SEE IN ENGLAND

Click the icon on the top right to enlarge the map. Credit: map data: Google

2 WEEKS IN ENGLAND ITINERARY

England might be intimidating for newcomers, with plenty of tourists and citizens populating the country. To help you save time, you can use this comprehensive guide to help you plan your trip to easily navigate the cities, seaside destinations, and hiking trails.

The places you can explore on particular days are listed below. I also added a section about what you can do in every city to help you make the best out of your two weeks in England. There are 3 sample itineraries.

Itinerary #1: First-Time Visitor (London, Brighton, Cotswold, Northern England)

If it’s your first visit, I’d suggest concentrating on these areas and taking at least 2 weeks to explore. You can travel quickly and see a new location every day, but if you’d prefer a more leisurely tour, you should probably spend at least 3-4 days in every city, especially considering the transport time.

I must admit that deciding which cities to include in this itinerary has been quite challenging. It is showcased in this two-week in England itinerary if you want to see the best of England. Although many other locations are just as stunning, this tour offers a good variety.

London for 4 days

London, one of the most charming cities in the world, is known for its modern cobblestone streets lined with ancient buildings, award-winning theatres, and modern buildings like The Shard. Some trendy locations are Westminster Abbey, St. Paul’s Cathedral, and Buckingham Palace, all encircled by charming streets.

Generally, Britain’s capital offers a unique experience for everyone, including foodies, adventurers, history buffs, families, and shopaholics.

Big Ben, the 318-foot tower that holds the giant clock and its booming bell, is the best example of what “London” is all about. Several excellent sightseeing choices outside the city are entirely doable on a day trip from London. The two locations that you must visit include Cambridge and Stonehenge.

2 images - aerial shot of stonehenge and bath river - 2 Weeks in England Itinerary

Brighton for 3 days

With its magnificent peaks that seem more at home in India, The Royal Pavilion, located in the heart of Brighton, is hard to overlook. You can also check out the Brighton Museum & Art Gallery, which is set in the pavilion’s former Royal Stables and Riding School area.

The outstanding Willett Collection of porcelain and ceramics, the remarkable Art Deco collection, and the costume exhibit with 18th-century clothes all make this top-notch museum worthwhile.

A trip to the seaside wouldn’t be complete without stopping by Brighton Palace Pier, surrounded by shops, amusement arcades, and food stalls. The quickest train travel time from London to Brighton is around 1 hr 8 min with a distance of 75 km (47 miles).

Cotswold for 3 days

The Cotswolds’ charming villages and historic market squares, which frequently serve as movie sets, make travelling here like walking into a storybook. Don’t miss out on Bourton-on-the-Water, a charming village that has earned the nickname “Venice of the Cotswolds”, thanks to the clear River Windrush that passes through the centre of the community.

If you’re eyeing antiques, Broadway has numerous stores, art galleries, and cafes along the streets.

Bath has several spa towns, including Thermae Bath Spa, which is right next to the Roman Baths and offers visitors a unique and relaxing experience. There are numerous spa services to choose from, including hot stone therapy and water massages, perfect after a tiring day of exploring.

Travelling from Brighton to Cotswold by car rental would be ideal as it usually takes roughly 2 hr 25 min rather than by train which is around 4 hr 34 min.

Northern England 4 days

The cities in Northern England include Manchester, Leeds, Liverpool, Lancaster, York, Newcastle, Windermere, and Chester. The most popular cities are Manchester and Liverpool because of their popularity in history, sports, and music. The Beatles is from Liverpool, while Oasis is from Manchester, just to name a few.

Many local and foreign visitors go to Liverpool for its football club, but there are lots more attractions to see in Liverpool apart from this. While Leeds features the Royak Armouries Museum and Manchester, it is the place to learn about the atomic theory and the journey of splitting it.

The historic city of York, the spiritual centre of the Church of England, is among Northern England’s most well-known tourist sites. It is home to one of the nation’s most magnificent cathedrals, the York Minister. The ancient City Walls that encircle the former medieval city centre for approximately 5 kilometres are another attraction worth exploring.

You’ll have great views of The Shambles, a street that dates back to the 14th century and is noted for its beautiful wooden buildings, as well as other nearby restaurants, boutique stores, and art galleries, which make this city a great place to end your 2 weeks in England trip.

You can expect the trip from Cotswold to Northern England, which spans 412 km (256 miles), by driving for 4 hr 24 min through the A1 (M) route.

Itinerary #2: Hiking Itinerary (Peak District, Lake District, Yorkshire Dales/Dartmoor National Park)

Apart from the typical tourist destinations, England is the ideal vacation option for anyone who enjoys spending time in nature. There are many hiking trails to discover, and they are all enclosed by the country’s breathtaking scenery, extensive history, and hospitable culture.

Whether you like to wander in the Dartmoor National Park, discover the Lake District, or stroll through the Yorkshire Dales, each provides a unique hiking experience for your upcoming vacation.

I’ve compiled some of England’s most incredible outdoor adventure spots. If you’ve longed to get away from England’s busy cities, this 14-day in England itinerary is ideal.

London for 2 days

If London isn’t part of your itinerary, you can still make the most of your time when you land here. Ensure necessary arrangements before visiting England’s off-the-beaten-track areas, including renting a car, stocking up on cash, getting a local sim card, and purchasing hiking equipment.

Peak District for 3 days

Mam Tor, which translates to “Mother Hill,” is a 517-meter-high hill close to Castleton that genuinely deserves a spot on your bucket list. Another note-worthy hike is the beautiful 46-mile path through the Peak District National Park’s White Peak region, called The Limestone Way.

For quick treks, consider the Bolsover Town Walking Route, which leads you through the historic streets of Bolsover and reveals hidden gems like courtyards, vistas of the surrounding countryside, and even a splendid 13th-century church.

Buxton, Buxton, and Sheffield are the ideal locations to stay if you intend to explore the Peak District. These towns are mainly untouched and have maintained their small-village charm despite the surge of tourists.

I recommend travelling from London to Peak District by high-speed train, which takes 90 to arrive. You can also drive your rented car. The journey will take around 3 hr and 20 mins.

2 images of Peak District and Brentor Church at Dartmoor National Park - 2 Weeks in England Itinerary

Lake District for 3 days

Helvellyn, one of the tallest peaks in the Lake District, is a favourite trip for experienced and novice climbers. Hikers enjoy Ullswater, where they can travel the 32-km Ullswater Way all around the lake or shorten their trip to 12 kilometres by adding boat rides. You can hike the 451-m high Catbells High Ridge for a quick half-day trip.

If you’re looking for a place to stay, I recommend heading to Ambleside, a small town with numerous restaurants and accommodations. Another excellent option is Penrith, a vibrant market town with sandstone structures famous for its abundance of shops.

Yorkshire Dales National Park or Dartmoor National Park for 3 days

Next up are 2 national parks that I highly recommend: Dartmoor National Park and Yorkshire Dales National Park. If you prefer exploring with less crowd, pick Dartmoor. Choose Yorkshire if you want to stay in the North while driving less. If you’re still undecided, I suggest reading more about them to determine which best suits your preferences.

Witness the might of Hardraw Force, England’s tallest single-drop waterfall, on this challenging 3.5-mile trek starting at Hawes National Park. Soaring 723 m above the landscape is Ingleborough, Yorkshire’s 2nd highest peak and of the most popular hiking sites. If you’re looking for the best accommodation options, consider Hawes, Bainbridge, and Carperby.

If you want to opt for a short but scenic hike, head to Lydford Gorge, where you can glimpse the White Lady Waterfall. For advanced hikers, I recommend the circular route called Burrator, where you could take in some of Southern England’s most stunning sceneries. After days of exploring Dartmoor, a comfortable location to rest is necessary, and you can find one in either Exeter or Plymouth.

I recommend travelling by car from Lake District to Yorkshire Dales since it will only take 50 min, over an estimated 55 km (34 miles) from route 685. Whereas the travel time by car from Lake District to Dartmoor National Park is roughly 5 hr 2 min with a total distance of 523 km (325 miles) along routes M6 and M5.

Itinerary #3: Along the Coasts (Brighton, Dorset, Cornwall, North Devon)

You’re in for a treat when you visit these seaside destinations due to their impressive sea cliffs, wide bays, and magnificent beaches. For those seeking serene beachfront solitude, some of the best beaches are found off the usual path. There are many romantic beaches to choose from along England’s breathtaking coastline, which is perfect for couples.

This itinerary welcomes visitors to laze by the water and enjoy the sun. The beaches of England have excellent surfing waves and a variety of practice areas, making them ideal for both beginners and advanced surfers.

England offers countless vacation options for solo travellers, families, and anyone wishing to spend time by the sea. Many beaches are served by restaurants, hotels, and leading recreational services, including extensive water sports facilities.

Even if London isn’t on your agenda, you may still take advantage of your time once you arrive. Be sure to make all necessary preparations before travelling along the coasts of England for a seamless trip. This includes renting a car, setting aside enough cash, obtaining a local sim card, and buying goods.

Long before the establishment of the railway, Brighton was already a well-known seaside destination with several outstanding beaches suited for sunbathing and swimming. For water sports enthusiasts, head to Brighton Beach, where you can enjoy kayaking, sailing, and surfing. Another option is Kemptown Beach which a short 15-minute walk can reach along Brighton Palace Pier for those who prefer a less crowded beach.

Set at the base of a stunning row of white chalk cliffs, the beach along Undercliff Walk is a popular diving and snorkelling spot with many rockpools to explore. The train journey from London to Brighton is around 1 hr 8 min, covering a distance of 75 km (47 miles).

Dorset for 3 days

There are more than a dozen Bournemouth beaches to select from, stretching approximately 10 miles of the breathtaking Dorset coastline. If you begin your adventure of Dorset in Bournemouth, ensure enough time for a trip to Brownsea Island.

The Jurassic Coast in England, which stretches 96 miles from Exmouth beaches, is still the sole World Heritage Site in the country and is packed with options for exploration. Undoubtedly, Weymouth Harbour is one of the top places in England for a typical seaside holiday, a weekend break, or even a day trip.

I recommend travelling by car from Brighton to Dorset since it will only take 2 hr 17 min, over an estimated 182 km (113 miles) from routes A27 and A31.

Cornwall for 3 days

One of Cornwall’s loveliest beaches, St. Ive’s Porthiminster Beach, offers a great view of the Godrevy Lighthouse from across glittering water. You can also visit Porthmeor Beach, a trendy beach with neighbouring cafes and restaurants. The finest natural scenery is available in St Ives Bay, and boarding a cruise is one of Cornwall’s top things to do.

For those who want to relax and play by the shoreline with their children, Porthgwidden Beach is a family-friendly beauty with gentler waves and fine sand that’s great for kids to swim in. It takes an average of 2 hr 39 min to arrive from Dorset to Cornwall by driving a total distance of 240 km (149 miles) along routes A35 and A30.

2 images - North Devon Coast and London Bridge

North Devon for 3 days

North Devon is home to some of the most renowned beaches, including Tunnel Beach, a unique privately owned beach paradise that has been a must-see since Victorian times. One of the area’s highlights is a massive tidal pool that retains fresh seawater.

Woolacombe Beach, which stretches for 3 miles along Devon’s breathtaking North coast, is favoured by families searching for a safe beach to take their kids to, making this city a superb destination to end your 2 weeks in England trip.

Head to Saunton Sands, which offers three miles of lovely sandy shoreline. If you’re seeking a quiet and uncrowded beach, head to Saunton Sands, which offers 3 miles of shoreline.

Travelling from Cornwall to North Devon would be ideal by car as it often takes around 2 hr 3 min with an estimated distance of 156 km (87 miles) along route A30.

THINGS TO SEE AND DO IN ENGLAND

Below is a list of must-see places in England and must-do activities. I also added my favourite and most recommended tours that you can book. Most of them have flexible cancellations in case you change your mind. But if you’re travelling during peak season, grab your spot as soon as you can.

Tower of London and Crown of Jewels – you can book a tour
Tower Bridge and Big Ben
Join a fun Harry Potter guided walking tour and get a ticket to Harry Potter Warner Bros Studio
The British Museum
Kensington Palace – you can join a sightseeing tour
Buckingham Palace
Book a spooky Jack the Ripper tour
Westminster Abbey – hop on a boat cruise from Westminster to Greenwich
The National Gallery
London Eye – you can get a fast-track ticket to save time
Picadilly Circus and Trafalgar Square
Madame Tussauds – visit one of the most famous museums in London, get your entry ticket
Windsor Castle – get your admission ticket
The Shard – you can get a ticket to enjoy a panoramic view
Royal Pavilion and Brighton Museum – reserve your ticket
Brighton Fishing Museum and Marina
Explore Brighton on a guided walking tour
The Lanes and North Laine
I360 Viewing Tower – get your ticket in advance
Regency Square and the Houses around it
Brighton Toy and Model Museum
Exciting day trip to Seven Sisters and South Downs – see tour price
Try zipline along the beach
Book a Drag Queen Show on a bottomless brunch – check the price
Day trip to Stonehenge and Bath from Brighton

Northern England

Manchester :

Explore Manchester on a city bus – get your ticket
Science and Industry Museum
Coronation Street – explore with a local guide
Manchester Cathedral
National Football Museum – check the tour itinerary
The Whitworth
Book a canal cruise – check the tour price
Castlefield Canals
Enjoy a day trip to the North of Wales, Snowdonia, and Chester or a day trip to the Lake District and Windermere
Sign up for a food tour or Cheese crawl

Liverpool :

Penny Lane and Strawberry Fields
Tate Liverpool
World War II Museum – get your ticket
Merseyside Maritime Museum
Mersey River – book a cruise
Croxteth Hall
Enjoy a Beatles tour / Beatles Story – blue route bus tour or a private taxi tour
Birkenhead Park
Liverpool Football Stadium (Anfield) – join a tour
Peaky Blinders filming locations – tour with a guide
Book a ghosting walking tour – look at the itinerary

Sheffield :

Peak District – you can do a Scavenger hunt
Sheffield Botanical Gardens
Graves Park
Kelham Island Museum
Abbeydale Industrial Hamlet
Sheffield Town Hall
Beauchief Abbey and Ancient Woodlands
Book a walking tour with a local guide
Civic Quarter
Leeds Castle – you can book a day trip from London
The Headrow
Book a food tour – read the reviews
The Royal Armories Museum
Harewood House
North Yorkshire Cruise – 1-hour cruise or a cruise with afternoon tea
Leeds Industrial Museum
Harrogate – there’s a food tour you can join
The National Coal Mining Museum

Peak District

Chatsworth House
Peak Cavern
Treak Cliff Cavern
Speedwell Cavern
Alton Towers
Haddon Hall
Heights of Abraham
National Trust – Lyme
The Pavilion Gardens
The Roaches
Wyming Brook Nature Reserve

Lake District

Aira Force Waterfall
Loughrigg Fell
Stock Ghyll Force (waterfall)
Cathedral Cave
Skelwith Force (waterfall)
Stanley Ghyll Waterfall
National Trust – Wray Castle
Scale Force Waterfall
Holehird Gardens
Moss Force Waterfall
The World of Beatrix Potter Attraction
National Trust – Hill Top

Yorkshire Dales/Dartmoor National Park

Yockenthwaite Stone Circle
Malham Cove
Gordale Scar
Janet’s Foss Waterfall
Linton Falls and Linton Stepping Stones
Kilnsey Park
Fountains Fell
Ribblehead Viaduct
Scaleber Force Waterfall
Jubilee Cave
National Park Visitor Centre (Dartmoor)
Bellever Tor
Laughter Tor
Fernworthy Stone Circle
Bennett’s Cross
Black-a-Tor (North Dartmoor)
National Trust – Castle Drogo
Ditsworthy Warren House
Foggintor Quarry
Corfe Castle
Dorset AONB
The Tank Museum
Weymouth Beach
Durdle Door
National Trust – Kingston Lacy
Russell Cotes Art Gallery & Museum
National Trust – Brownsea Island
Sandbanks Beach
Highcliffe Castle
Lulworth Castle Wareham
Portland Bill Lighthouse
The Blue Pool
Abbotsbury Subtropical Gardens
Lulworth Cove
Borough Gardens
Osmington White Horse
Dancing Ledge
Surf at St. Ives Bay
Polperro Heritage Coast
Hike along the South West Coast Path (630-mile
Towan Beach
National Trust Properties – Trelissick Garden, Godrevy, Lanhydrock House, Trerice, or the Cotehele House
Pendennis Castle
Eden Project
Enys Gardens
Lankidden Cove
Isles of Scilly
Kynance Cove
Tate St Ives
Tintagel Castle
Eat Cornish dishes
Mining Heritage – Geevor Tin Mine, Poldark Mine, or the Heartlands Heritage Centre

North Devon

North Devon Coast and Saunton Sands
National Trust Properties – Baggy Point, Watersmeet,
Surfing or Swimming at Croyde Bay, Woolacombe Bay or Saunton Sands
Morte Point
Tunnels Beaches
Ilfracombe Harbour Devon
Heddon’s Mouth
Valley of Rocks
Exmoor Zoological and Conservation Centre
Museum of Barnstaple & North Devon
RHS Garden Rosemoor
Walk or Cycle along Tarka Trail – 180-mile
Boat from Appledore or Instow to Lundy Island
Clovelly Court Gardens

MUST-TRY ENGLISH DISHES, DRINKS, AND SNACKS

3 images - fish and chips, trifle, and tea

England is not known for its food, but it doesn’t mean there’s nothing to try. The list below is a compilation of traditional English dishes. Today, England is a melting pot of diverse cultures. This means that you can pretty much find restaurants serving different cuisines from western, Indian, Chinese, Latin, Greek, and American just to name a few.

Make sure to try at least 3-4 dishes during your 2 weeks in English. Of course, never leave without checking a traditional English pub.

Fish and chips (deep-fried fish and french fries)
Roast beef and Yorkshire pudding
Ploughman’s lunch (a selection of cheese, pickles, and bread)
Toad in the hole (sausages baked in a batter pudding)
Shepherd’s pie (ground lamb or beef topped with mashed potatoes)
Steak and kidney pie
Pork pie (a pastry filled with pork and seasonings)
Cumberland sausage
Bangers and mash sausages and mashed potatoes)
Cornish pasty
Bubble and squeak (mashed potatoes and vegetables)
Coronation chicken (chicken salad with curry and fruit)
Eton mess (mixture of strawberries, meringue and whipped cream)
Trifle (layered dessert with fruit, sponge cake, custard, and cream)
Apple crumble (a warm dessert made with cooked apples and a crumbly pastry topping)
Sticky toffee pudding (a moist sponge cake made with dates and topped with a toffee sauce)
Lemon Tart (a sweet pastry crust filled with a lemon custard made from eggs, sugar, lemon juice and zest)
Pub ale/beer
Pimm’s (gin-based liqueur)
Hot toddy (hot drink made with whiskey, honey, lemon, and fruits)

ACCOMMODATIONS IN ENGLAND (by city)

To help you find a place to stay in each city, depending on your budget, here’s a quick list of accommodations around England.

Affordable: Hootananny Hostel or Dover Castle Hostel or The Phoenix Hostel
Mid-range: Central Hotel or Keystone House or Studios2Let
Luxury: The Londoner or The Ampersand Hotel or One Hundred Shoreditch
Affordable to Mid-range: EI8HT Brighton or Selina Brighton or The Beach Hotel
Luxury: Drakes Hotel or The Charm Boutique Hotel & Spa or Jurys Inn Waterfront
Affordable to Mid-range: The New Inn or The Bird in Hand Inn or St. Michaels Bistro
Luxury: Stratton House Hotel & Spa or No131 The Promenade
Affordable to Mid-range Hotel: Church Street or The Gardens Hotel or Yotel Deansgate
Luxury: Stock Exchange Hotel or CitySuites Aparthotel or Hotel Gotham
Affordable or Mid-range: The Miners Arms or The Barrel Inn or The Little Mill Inn or High Tor Hotel
Luxury: Hollin House Hotel or The Legh Arms Prestbury or The Peacock at Barlow
Affordable: Ambleside Central or Quaysiders Club
Mid-range: Ambleside Townhouse or Rothay Garth
Luxury: The Old Stamp House or Rothay Manor Hotel or Langdale Hotel & Spa

Yorkshire Dales

Affordable: Craigsland BnB or The Buck Inn
Mid-range: The Devonshire Grassington or Ashfield House
Luxury: Marske Stables or The Devonshire Fell Hotel

Dartmoor National Park

Affordable: The Rock Inn or Riverside B&B or The Cromwell Arms Inn
Mid-range: The White Hart Hotel or Down The Garden Path or Dolphin Hotel
Luxury: The Old Thatch or Romantic Cottage
Affordable: Bub Lane Cottage or Greyhound Inn or The Bridge House
Mid-range: The Grove Arms or The New Inn or The Mitre Inn
Luxury: Derby Manor or Kingston Country Courtyard
Affordable: The Old Inn or Legacy Hotel Victoria
Mid-range: Park View or Fistral Beach Hotel & Spa (adults only) or The Britannia Inn
Luxury: Primrose House St Ives or The Land’s End Hotel or Bodmin Jail Hotel
Affordable: Wickham House Apartment or The Nook
Mid-range: The Hoops Inn or The Imperial Hotel
Luxury: Westeria Cottage or The Park Hotel or Broomhill Estate

SUMMARY OF 2 WEEKS IN ENGLAND

England’s villages are as lovely as they come, with stone cottages, cobblestone streets, and rooftops. No trip to England would be complete without taking in the beauty of these small towns, whether it is the charming chocolate-coloured villages of the Cotswolds, Norfolk’s serene coastal villages, or the unique villages of North Yorkshire.

This guide has everything from the museums and famous sites of London to the breathtaking Jurassic Coast in Dorset, the history of Bath, and trekking in England’s national parks. You’re sure to fall in love with the country’s lush green environment, which features picture-perfect hills.

You’ll come across the beautiful countryside from the South to the North waiting to be explored. I hope you found this compilation of 2 weeks in England itineraries helpful in planning and writing your own travel itinerary .

TO SAVE THIS ITINERARY, PIN THIS IMAGE BELOW:

Experience England's rich history and vibrant culture on your holiday: explore London's iconic landmarks, wander through ancient Stonehenge, and visit the picturesque Lake District. Enjoy traditional pubs, beautiful countryside, and bustling markets throughout your journey. via @twoweektraveller

3 Weeks in England Itinerary

DISCLAIMER: This post might have links to travel services and products that we enjoy. We might make a commission from it at no extra cost to you.

There’s more to England than the castles, their posh accent, and the Royal Family. There’s also fish and chips, bangers and mash, and shepherd’s pie. But aside from these, you’ll get entranced with the scenery, history, and culture.

London has some of the best museums in the world and it is also included in the top 4 fashion capitals of the world. Aside from that, they have an extremely wide variety of tea.

At least once in your lifetime, you have to attend a music festival in England. Most of the world-famous bands and musicians hail from this place. England is the largest country in the UK in terms of both population and landmass.

When it comes to exploring the natural and wilderness, England also has something to offer. There is the Lake District in Cumbria, which is not far from Scotland’s border. All of this is just the tip of the iceberg as there are many things to see in England. This itinerary will help you plan a vacation for 3 weeks in England.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE GOING TO ENGLAND

4 images - london tower with the uk flag, fish and chips, royal pavilion, and manchester's cathedral - 3 Weeks in England Itinerary

Here are some tips that you need to know before we jump right into the itinerary. These tips can help you plan and write your itinerary for England to ensure that your vacation will have as little hassle as possible.

Perhaps you want to make your vacation a 3 weeks in the UK and Ireland trip instead. If you feel like 20 days in England is too much time, you can upgrade your vacation to 3 weeks in the UK . We also have an itinerary for 3 weeks in Ireland and Northern Ireland .

When is the best time to go to England

England’s peak season is from July to August . The best time to visit depends on what you plan to do. June to August is England’s warmest month, perfect for people who are fond of the beach and watersports.

Their winter season is from November to March, although it rains a lot more in England than it does in snow. England’s. The spring season is from March to May. It’s the time for sudden rain showers so make sure to always bring umbrellas or rain gear if you decide to come and their peak season is from July to August.

Are 3 weeks enough for England

3 weeks in England is plenty of time. You can travel a little slower and explore places that most tourists don’t get to see. Instead of focusing only on London, you can not just take day trips to southern and northern England.

Y ou will probably visit 6-7 cities in England in under 20 days . You can rent a car and travel slower. You can also take the bus and trains since you won’t be in a hurry. It’s not a very big country, but there are lots of things to do.

What to pack

Regardless of when you plan to visit England, it’s vital that you bring an umbrella or a raincoat since it can pour any time of the year. But other than that, pack according to what season you plan to visit.

England has some really great hiking trails. So, If you want to go hiking, you should bring hiking shoes or boots. Check out our what to pack for a 3-week trip and look at the sample packing list. We also have a summer packing list for a 3-week holiday .

Average cost of 20 days in England

On an average budget, a 20-day trip to England could cost roughly $2,500-$3,500 per person . This includes mid-range accommodations, meals at casual restaurants, public transportation, and regular tourist attractions.

For backpackers, expect to spend around $1,200-$1,800 . This involves staying in budget accommodations like hostels, eating at inexpensive eateries or self-catering, using public transport, and focusing on free or low-cost activities.

A luxury 2 0-day trip could cost from $5,000 to $8,000 per person , incorporating upscale accommodations, fine dining, private or first-class transportation, and premium experiences like guided tours or high-end shopping.

Note that costs could vary significantly depending on personal preferences and lifestyle. Plus, it doesn’t include your flights to and from England and travel insurance.

How to get around

Getting around England is fairly easy due to its size and well-built public transportation. It is very recommended that you rent your own car if you plan to stay for 3 weeks in England. It will give you plenty of freedom and control of your time rather than waiting and trying to catch the bus or the train.

Another way to travel in England is by taking the train, especially for long journeys and the cheapest way is by coaches. You can also travel by car or through their coasts and waterways. You can move around by car, railway, bus, or by renting a push bike to move around the cities.

Language and Currency

England’s currency is the pound sterling (GBP) . Debit cards, credit cards, and contactless payments are common in Britain. You will be able to find ATMs in almost every corner of the country. If you plan to carry cash about £100 in total would be plenty.

The main language in England is English . In some iconic landmarks, you might see things written in different languages, although rare. It’s such a melting pot of a city though, you will hear lots of languages and culture around England, especially in London.

Visitors with passports from North America, Latin America, Europe, East Asia, and some Oceania don’t need a visa to enter and travel to the UK for 180 days.

Other visitors must apply for a tourist or visitor visa in advance at the nearest British/UK Embassy or Consulate.

Other travel tips

Arranging flights, hotels, and other travel arrangements is done online now. Knowing which sites you can book these things without paying too much is very helpful. I use these travel tools whenever booking my accommodations and transportation.

PINNED MAP OF MUST-SEE PLACES IN ENGLAND

Click the enlarge button on the top right corner. Credit: map data: Google

3 WEEKS IN ENGLAND ITINERARY

Exploring England means visiting many historical spots and iconic landmarks and structures, including Big Ben, London Bridge, London Eye, Stonehenge, and the red phone booth, to name a few.

England is passionate when it comes to sports, and the locals take them very seriously . This includes football, cricket, tennis, and rugby. If England is not enough for you, you can always make an itinerary that covers the entire Western Europe for 3 weeks .

London for 5 days

3 weeks in England have to include London especially if you haven’t been here before. There are so many things to see in London, including the world’s largest library, exquisite architecture, museums, and exhibition spaces.

London is most likely where you will start your trip since the major hub of Heathrow Airport is here . From London, you should be able to reach any city in England or the UK. There will be trains, metros, buses, and planes traveling in all directions. London also has an extensive theatre scene and diverse food and cuisine options.

When you are in London, you must see a theatre show at least once. I also recommend you get a hop-on hop-off bus ticket to make moving around a little easier.

3 images - london tower and red phone booth, buckingham palace, and st paul's cathedral - 3 Weeks in England Itinerary

Things to see in London

Tower of London and Crown of Jewels – you can book a tour
Tower Bridge and Big Ben
Join a fun Harry Potter guided walking tour and get a ticket to Harry Potter Warner Bros Studio
The British Museum
Kensington Palace – you can join a sightseeing tour
Buckingham Palace
Book a spooky Jack the Ripper tour
Westminster Abbey – hop on a boat cruise from Westminster to Greenwich
The National Gallery
London Eye – you can get a fast-track ticket to save time
Picadilly Circus and Trafalgar Square
Madame Tussauds – visit one of the most popular museums in London, get your entry ticket
Windsor Castle – get your admission ticket
The Shard – you can get a ticket to enjoy a panoramic view

Accommodations in London

Affordable: Hootananny Hostel or Dover Castle Hostel or The Phoenix Hostel
Mid-range: Central Hotel or Keystone House or Studios2Let
Luxury: The Londoner or The Ampersand Hotel or One Hundred Shoreditch

Manchester, Liverpool, Sheffield, Leeds for 5 days

These four cities can definitely be explored in one go – but choose which city you want to be your home for 5 days. These cities are near one another, so getting from one place to another shouldn’t be a problem.

Manchester is where the first professional football league was formed . You could also enjoy traces and the legacy of the 25 Nobel prize awardees throughout the place. On the other hand, Liverpool is famous for its ferry trips , the Liverpool Cathedral, and Royal Albert Dock, among others.

Sheffield is one of the greenest cities in the UK despite being coined as a steel city because it produces steel. They have Sheffield Legends Plaques, the counterpart of Hollywood’s Walk of Fame.

Leeds is famous for housing the oldest commercial railway in the world , having the world’s most significant animal armor, and having the longest-running West Indian Carnival in Europe.

While exploring Northern England, you can base yourself in Manchester or Liverpool, which has plenty of hotels. Getting from these cities to other parts of this region is very easy.

Things to see in these cities

Manchester :

Explore Manchester on a city bus – get your ticket
Castlefield Canals
Science and Industry Museum
Coronation Street – explore with a local guide
Manchester Cathedral
National Football Museum – check the tour itinerary
The Whitworth
Book a canal cruise – check the tour price
Enjoy a day trip to the North of Wales, Snowdonia, and Chester or a day trip to the Lake District and Windermere
Sign up for a food tour or Cheese crawl

Liverpool :

Penny Lane and Strawberry Fields
Tate Liverpool
World War II Museum – get your ticket
Merseyside Maritime Museum
Mersey River – book a cruise
Croxteth Hall
Enjoy a Beatles tour / Beatles Story – blue route bus tour or a private taxi tour
Birkenhead Park
Liverpool Football Stadium (Anfield) – join a tour
Peaky Blinders filming locations – tour with a guide
Book a ghosting walking tour – look at the itinerary

Sheffield :

Peak District – you can do a Scavenger hunt
Sheffield Botanical Gardens
Graves Park
Kelham Island Museum
Abbeydale Industrial Hamlet
Sheffield Town Hall
Beauchief Abbey and Ancient Woodlands
Book a walking tour with a local guide
Civic Quarter
Leeds Castle – you can book a day trip from London
The Headrow
Book a food tour – read the reviews
The Royal Armories Museum
Harewood House
North Yorkshire Cruise – 1-hour cruise or a cruise with afternoon tea
Leeds Industrial Museum
Harrogate – there’s a food tour you can join
The National Coal Mining Museum

Accommodations in Manchester

Affordable to Mid-range Hotel: Church Street or The Gardens Hotel or Yotel Deansgate
Luxury: Stock Exchange Hotel or CitySuites Aparthotel or Hotel Gotham

Bristol for 3 days

After visiting such bustling cities, you will be glad to have arrived in Bristol. It’s where you’ll see more open space and green areas. It’s where you can go for a walk along the boardwalk or hike at the Mendip Hills National Landscape. It’s also near Bath , where you can enjoy the relaxing spa and traditional baths.

Bristol is truly an astounding place filled with different forms of art and creative outlets, which vary in each area. Stokes Croft is filled with vintage stores, indie cafes, and street art . Clifton has a variety of concept stores, and Bedminster is where the Upfest Art Festival is held.

The perfect duration of stay here for those spending three weeks in England would be about three days.

If you are coming from Leeds, you could reach Bristol by boarding a train, riding a bus, using rideshare, driving, or even flying. The most recommended option is to ride the train; the bus is the cheapest. Driving would take more or less three hours to reach your destination.

Things to see in Bristol

Explore Bristol through its street art – hire a guide
Bristol Floating Harbour
St. Mary Redcliffe
Brunel’s SS Great Britain
Clifton Suspension Bridge and Vaults – book with a tour guide
Cheddar Gorge
Try axe throwing – check what’s include
Bristol Old City
Learn how to make a cocktail

Accommodations in Bristol

Affordable: The Full Moon Backpackers or The Washington
Mid-range: The Alma Taverns Boutique Suites or Arnor Manor Hotel
Luxury: Leonardo Hotel or Number 38 Cliffton or Clayton Hotel

Brighton for 3 days

Brighton is known for festivals that showcase local and international talents. Some of the world-famous festivals include the Fringe Festival and The Brighton Festival, among dozens of other festivals and live shows.

Brighton is also well-known for its beaches and shoreline paths, where people can easily walk and cycle. Sit by the beach, order fish and chips, and spend some time watching boats and ferries passing through the English Channel.

For those who want to go to Brighton from Bristol, you can take the train, ride the bus, or drive with the most recommended option is boarding the train, and the cheapest option would be riding a bus. Driving is about three hours before reaching your destination (this is the fastest option).

When you get to Brighton, make sure to get a hop-on-hop-off bus ticket . The bus stops at famous attractions in Brighton. This will make your exploration much easier.

Things to see in Brighton

Royal Pavilion and Brighton Museum – reserve your ticket
Brighton Fishing Museum and Marina
Explore Brighton on a guided walking tour
The Lanes and North Laine
I360 Viewing Tower – get your ticket in advance
Regency Square and Houses around it
Brighton Toy and Model Museum
Exciting day trip to Seven Sisters and South Downs – see tour price
Try zipline along the beach
Book a Drag Queen Show on a bottomless brunch – check the price
Day trip to Stonehenge and Bath from Brighton

Accommodations in Brighton

Affordable to Mid-range: EI8HT Brighton or Selina Brighton or The Beach Hotel
Luxury: Drakes Hotel or The Charm Boutique Hotel & Spa or Jurys Inn Waterfront

3 images - st mary's redcliffe, royal pavilion, and king's college - 3 Weeks in England Itinerary

Cambridge for 3 days

Cambridge is usually known as the world-famous university under its namesake. But aside from that, this city has so much to offer. It has dazzling architecture, museums, retail markets, and tons of lush greeneries.

It’s home to many students and has a really lively scene. So, if you’re looking to party outside London, you’ll definitely find some spots along Sydney Street.

To get to Cambridge from Brighton , you can either take the train, bus or drive on your own. It takes 2 and a half hours to reach Cambridge. There’s also a hop-on-hop-off bus for touring around Cambridge.

Things to see in Cambridge

Visit top attractions in Cambridge on a walking tour
Anglesey Abbey, Gardens, and Lode Mill
King’s College – explore with an alumni guide
Mathematical Bridge
Cambridge University Botanical Garden – you can also enjoy the popular punting tour or the Uni Tour
The Fitzwilliam Museum
Cambrige Central Mosque
National Horse Racing Museum

Accommodations in Cambridge

Affodable to Mid-range: YHA Cambridge or Rectory Farm or The Tas Suites
Luxury: West Court or Gonville Hotel or Centennial Hotel

SUMMARY OF 3 WEEKS IN ENGLAND ITINERARY

If you think we’ve already covered everything England offers, you’re in for a wild ride because this isn’t even the tip of the iceberg. England is a country full of eccentricities, and what’s great about them is that they embrace their quirkiness.

Their strangest sport is chasing cheese down the hill. They also have a ceremony called apple wassail, wherein they bless apple trees to produce good crops, which would then be used in making cider. England has a traditional folk dance called Morris Dancing.

Witnessing all of these up close would make your trip worthwhile. And that’s it, you have now reached the end of this itinerary about staying for 3 weeks in England. We hope that you enjoyed this article.

SAVE THIS TRAVEL ITINERARY ON YOUR PINTEREST:

Explore England for three weeks: marvel at London's landmarks, soak in Bath's Roman spas, wander Oxford's historic colleges, and hike the Lake District's scenic trails. Experience rich history, stunning landscapes, and cultural diversity on this journey. via @threeweektraveller

TTC family of brands

My Trafalgar

Destinations

Get Inspired

866 513 1995

2021 England Warminsterlongleathouse Bynder

See All England Tours

See More England Trips

5 million happy guests and counting

Pound Sterling

Capital City

Winter avg temp

Summer avg temp

Good morning

Good evening

"What is there to not love about England. Real life castles, Princes and Princesses, stunning scenery, and historic streets lined with lively pubs everywhere you go!”

Aryan, Travel Director

Admire the British capital from the London Eye

Watch London unfurl from the iconic 135-metre height of the London Eye. The unmatched views extend in every direction, reaching Buckingham Palace, the river Thames and the famed clock tower of the Palace of Westminster. All London’s highlights in one peaceful, 30-minute rotation.

Take in the views of Britain's Lake District

Delve into Britain’s natural wonders and take in the panorama of rolling hills, rocky mountains and glittering waters of the Lake District. Abounding in outdoor opportunities from cruises to hilltop walks, you'll find serenity in this national park resting between Leeds and Glasgow.

Visit the Roman baths in Bath

Turn back the clock 2,000 years at the remarkably preserved remains of the Roman Baths. Still flowing with steaming, geothermally heated water, the ancient stone pavements reveal the culture behind the simple daily task of washing. Let time stand still staring at a spring filled with 12,000 Roman coins.

Enjoy the guided tour of Liverpool

Sink into the nostalgia of the Beatles, cruise along the Mersey River and sample real ale at the Albert Docks. A visit to Liverpool is an invitation to uncover the many layers of British culture; the UK's fifth largest city means more than the passion of its football club.

See the Stonehenge's stone monoliths

Southwest England’s soil is rich with mystery. Stand in the shadows of Stonehenge’s stone monoliths and let your imagination be sparked by the secrets of this 5,000-year history. Weighing up to 30 tonnes each, the weight of history will leave its mark on you.

Our top 5 things to do in England

Mysterious stone monoliths and preserved ancient baths prove there is so much more to see beyond the limits of London city. Let Trafalgar turn the pages of the history book that is England.

The British Museum

The British Museum is a ticket to relics that reveal some two million years of human history. Feel small standing beneath the colossal presence of Rameses II and contrast the myth and reality of Troy with the graphic world of Manga. This London highlight will take you on a journey of time travel.

Natural History Museum

The Natural History Museum takes you on an unfathomable discovery of the formation of the solar system and its path to the present. Trace the origin of our species under the shade of a T. rex and glimpse rare meteorites straight from the surface of Mars. If this doesn’t shake you, the earthquake simulator most certainly will.

Victoria and Albert

The Victoria and Albert Museum is an encounter with the very best of human creativity in almost every medium. Here you will design your own bioplastic bag, step behind the creative lens of Christian Dior and take a literal walk in history’s shoes admiring a 2,000 strong collection spanning 3,000 years.

Best museums in England

A cultural epicentre of the planet steeped in royal heritage, the museums of England sparkle like the Crown Jewels. Let Trafalgar guide you through the very best the region has to offer.

Fish & Chips

It’s hard to separate the partnership of fish 'n' chips. Try this traditional meal both from a gourmet restaurant and a local 'chippie' wrapped in newspaper. Always with lashings of salt and vinegar on top.

Sunday Roast

Embrace the traditional English Sunday lunch with roast meats, a side of vegetables and an indulgent topping of gravy. The joy of this simple culinary experience is best served in a traditional English pub complete with football on the screen and a few stouts.

Full English breakfast

The full English breakfast is a requisite of a trip to England. A hearty plate piled with fried bacon, grilled tomatoes, buttered toast, mushrooms, eggs, beans, and black puddingis hard to resist.

Best food in England

Food is at the heart of every journey when you travel to England. This is a country of warm and hearty meals, our trips will show you the very best of it.

What to pack for England

With a high chance of experiencing four seasons in one day, an umbrella is a must when visiting England, both for rainy days and occasions when the sun beams down.

Digital maps

It's always good to have a backup of digital maps on standby when you're out exploring in your own time. Download them prior to your trip so you can reach them even when your phone is offline.

Travel adaptor

Though many hotels will have adaptors available for use, being prepared with your own will ensure you're always charged and ready to go.

A good book

With a seemingly infinite list of parks found in England, don't forget to pack a novel and immerse yourself in a good book should the occasion arise.

With days full of adventure and numerous souvenirs tempting your strolls, a day pack will ensure your hands always remain free. Split the weight across your back with a double strap bag for extra comfort.

Our Europe & Britain destinations

Bosnia Herzegovina

Czech Republic

Liechtenstein

North Macedonia

Netherlands

Northern Ireland

Switzerland

Italy Test 02

Other worldwide regions we visit

Africa the Middle East

Australia and New Zealand

North and Central America

South America

Get your free brochure

Find your next escape with the world's leading travel brand

Request A Brochure

Award winning tours

Every year, we're proud to win some of the most prestigious travel accolades around the world - from the Travel Globes to the Agent's Choice Awards

Search Our Tours

Help & Info

WE MAKE TRAVEL MATTER®

Unedited Reviews

Our Destination Management Companies

Frequently Asked Questions

Travel Updates

Media & Press Room

Do Not Sell or Share My Personal Information

Travel Planning

Get Your Free Brochure

Travel Insurance

Booking Conditions

Trip Deposit Level

Recommendations

Trafalgar is a proud member of The Travel Corporation family of companies.

#SimplyTrafalgar

Selected Region

United States

United Kingdom

New Zealand

South Africa

Terms and Conditions

Cookie Policy

Travel Information >
Itineraries >

England Vacation Packages 6-Days and More

7-Day London Classic

Kent - Garden of England - 7 Days

Best of Devon & Cornwall, West of England - 8 Days

London & England Explorer - 8 Days

London & Paris - 9 Days

England, Ireland, Wales & Scotland - 10 Days

England & Scotland - 10 Days

Rome, Vatican City / Italy - 2019/06/15: Panoramic view of St. Peter’s Basilica - Basilica di San Pietro in Vaticano - main dome by Michelangelo Buonarotti seen from the Vatican Gardens in the Vatican City State

England, France, Germany, Italy & More - 14 Days

England, Ireland, Wales & Scotland - 15 Days

Neptune fountain in Piazza Navona, Rome, Italy.

European Discovery - 16 Days

Britain & Ireland Grandeur - 23 Days

European Supreme with 3 Day Cruise - 30 Days

Our guide to England vacation packages in 2024. We’ve made a list of over 20 package tours to England, and some also include visits to Scotland, Wales and Ireland. Choose from large or small group experiences, with a huge selection of tour lengths and itineraries to suit every interest. From our classic England packages to themed trips for special events taking place in 2024, check out our complete guide below.

Quicklinks:

England Vacation Packages >>>

England & Scotland Vacation Packages >>>

England & Ireland Vacation Packages >>>

Packages for Special Events in 2024

TV & Movie Themed Packages >>>

Self-Drive & Private Packages >>>

Guide to Planning your Trip to England >>>

Frequently Asked Questions

Vacation Packages to England

Our pick of vacation packages that mainly visit England, starting and ending in London. Some of the trips have the option of travelling with a smaller group of no more than 24 guests.

8 Days Devon & Cornwall >>>

13 Days Devon & Cornwall** >>>

8 Days – London Explorer >>>

9 Days England Package >>>

5 Days Gems of Britain** >>>

**Small Group Tour option

Best of Devon & Cornwall – 8 Days

Trip Size: Large Group

Price: from $1,950 USD per person

Package Includes: Accommodation, some meals, transport

This is a very popular England vacation package that takes you to two of the iconic regions – Devon and Cornwall. These are the lands where the legends of King Arthur came alive, most notably at Tintagel Castle. It’s where the pilgrims set sail on the Mayflower in Plymouth. And it’s where Capability Brown created one of his most famous English gardens at Longleat. You’ll see beautiful countryside in Dartmoor National Park, wonderful sea views from the coastline and visit stately homes as well as Windsor Castle. Plus in Cornwall, you’ll visit and see amazing views from St. Michael’s Mount!

More Details: Devon & Cornwall >>>

Country Roads Wales, Devon & Cornwall – 13 Days

Trip Size: Choice of Large or Small Group

Price: from $5,150 USD per person

This is a similar itinerary to the 8-day vacation package above, but this time extended and with a different feel to the trip. Travel down country roads as you meander your way through the glorious English countryside. See the university city of Oxford and explore the quintessential Cotswolds villages. You’ll also visit Wales, with an overnight stay in Cardiff.

London Explorer – 8 Days

Trip type: Large Group

Price: from $2,150 USD per person

Our 8-day package tour takes you to the best of London! See the Changing of the Guard ceremony outside Buckingham Palace and get a sense of royal life at Windsor Castle. Soak up English culture at Borough Food Market, enjoy a cruise along the River Thames and explore Westminster Abbey where King Charles was crowned. Plus, there will be a trip to Windsor Castle to see where Harry and Meghan tied the knot, as well as the world-famous stone circle at Stonehenge.

More Details: London Explorer >>>

Real England Package – 9 Days

Price: from $1,800 USD per person

Includes: Accommodation, some meals, transport

This 9-day trip starts in London and travels north into Northern England. It combines old-world cities like York, with the stunning countryside of the UNESCO Lake District. You’ll get to see the home of the Beatles in Liverpool, regency era Bath and the most mysterious stone circle in the world at Stonehenge. You will also spend a day in Edinburgh which is the Scottish capital and briefly see Cardiff which is the Welsh capital.

More Details: Real England Trip >>>

Gems of Britain – 5 Days

Price: from $1,595 USD per person

With this fast-paced 5 day trip you’ll discover some fantastic places in England, as well as seeing a bit of Scotland and Wales. You’ll see the historic northern city of Chester that was built by the Romans and marvel at the beauty of the Lake District National Park. Visitors will also explore Shakespeare’s birth town of Stratford-upon-Avon along with admiring the Scottish and Welsh capitals. It’s a great introductory trip to England if you are looking for a short vacation package.

More Details: Gems of Britain >>>

England & Scotland Vacation Packages

Here are our picks of vacation packages that combine both England and Scotland, as well as a bit of Wales. All packages start and end in London.

10 Days Britain Package >>>

14 Days Britain Package >>>

11 Days Britain Package** >>>

13 Days Britain Package** >>>

** Available as a small group tour

Amazing Britain Package – 10 Days

Price: from $2,475 USD per person

Our amazing Britain package starts in London as you’ll travel into Northern England. Highlights of the England part of the trip include visiting the birthplace of William Shakespeare in the town of Stratford-upon-Avon. You’ll explore the three great cities of York, Liverpool and Bristol, each with its own distinct feel and charm. Plus, discover exquisite towns including Durham and Bath. In Scotland, you’ll stay 2 nights in Edinburgh, 1 night in Glasgow and venture into the Scottish Highlands.

More Details: Amazing Britain >>>

Best of Britain Package – 14 Days

Price: from $3,650 USD per person

Our 14-day package has a lot in common with the 10-day package above but is extended with more fantastic locations! Departing and returning from London you’ll visit Northern England and head into Scotland. You’ll also visit the southwest of England. See Plymouth where the Pilgrim Fathers set sail for the New World, with millions of American families tracing their family heritage back to these voyages. You’ll also explore the legends of King Arthur with a visit to mystical Glastonbury. In Scotland, you will also head to the Isle of Skye, an island with one of the most spectacular pieces of scenery in the world!

More Details: Best of Britain >>>

Best of Britain Package – 11 Days

Price: from $2,825 USD per person

This trip will venture from London into Northern England, stopping at classic highlights including Stratford-upon-Avon and the Viking town of York. 3 days are spent in Scotland, with stops in the two big cities of Edinburgh and Glasgow, as well as time in the magnificent Scottish countryside. On your way back down south, you’ll drive through the Lake District and Wales. The trip also heads into South West England, stopping at Plymouth where the Pilgrim Father’s set sail to America.

More Details: Britain 11 Day Package >>>

Elegance of Britain Package – 13 Days

See Blenheim Palace on our small group tour from London

Trip Size: Large or Small Group

Price: from $4,370 USD per person

Departure Point: London or Edinburgh

Our 13-day package spends most of the time in England, with two nights in the Scottish capital of Edinburgh. We’ll explore the Lake District, a UNESCO region that was home to many English writers and poets including Beatrix Potter and William Wordsworth. We’ll stay 2 nights in the Viking city of York and use it as a base to explore the cathedral city and the nearby town of Lincoln. Highlights include a visit to the Brontë Parsonage Museum where the Brontë sisters – Charlotte, Emily and Anne lived. As we head down south, we’ll stop at Blenheim Palace, England’s version of the Palace of Versailles that was the birthplace of Winston Churchill. Plus there will be visits to Stonehenge, Shakespeare’s Stratford-upon-Avon and more!

More Details: Elegance of Britain >>>

England & Ireland Vacation Packages

Our picks of packages combining trips to England and Ireland.

10 Days Britain & Ireland >>>

15 Days England & Ireland >>>

20 Days Britain & Ireland** >>>

24 Days UK & Ireland Package** >>>

**Small group tour option

Britain & Ireland Highlights – 10 Days

Price: from $2,675 USD per person

Our whistlestop package tour combines a bit of England, Scotland, Wales, Northern Ireland and Ireland. Perfect if you are short on time but want to see a lot of places. You’ll head from London into Northern England to York and the Lake District. See Glasgow and Edinburgh before taking a ferry into Northern Ireland. See Belfast and Dublin and enjoy the delights of the Irish countryside. A ferry crossing takes you into Wales, where you’ll pass by Cardiff and return to London stopping at Stonehenge and Bath along the way.

More details: Britain & Ireland 10 Days >>>

England & Ireland Package – 15 Days

Price: from $3,795 USD per person

With 15 days there’s a little bit more time to explore England and Ireland in depth. On this package tour, you’ll spend 9 days in England, 2 days in Scotland and 4 days in Ireland. That’s a great way to get a feel for the beautiful landscapes and customs of this part of the world, as well as a taste of English, Scottish and Irish cultures, which are all quite different and unique. The trip also includes two short ferry rides between Britain and Ireland.

More Details: England & Ireland 15 Days >>>

Romantic Britain & Ireland – 20 Days

Trip Size: Small or Large Group

Price: from $6,950 USD per person

Our 20 day mega trip to Britain and Ireland is a wonderful way to explore the region. In England, you’ll visit towns including Plymouth, Oxford, Bath and York. In Scotland you’ll head to Loch Ness, venture onto the Isle of Skye and see the home of golf at St Andrews. Spend a day exploring the Northern Ireland capital city of Belfast before heading down south into Ireland. Here you’ll explore lots of spectacular countryside, as well as see the Irish capital of Dublin. There is even time spent in Wales and Cardiff. This trip has something for everyone – UNESCO World Heritage Sites, big cities, quaint villages and spectacular countryside.

More Details: Britain & Ireland 20 Days >>>

UK & Ireland Package – 24 Days

Price: from $7,195 USD per person

Spend 3.5 weeks exploring England, Scotland, Wales, Northern Ireland and Ireland in depth. This is quite possibly the trip of a lifetime, with the choice of a small or large group. It’s hard to sum this one up in just a short paragraph, but it’s probably the most in-depth vacation package we offer. It’s also the only tour that heads into the UNESCO Giant’s Causeway in Northern Ireland which was a Game of Thrones filming location, as well as visiting UNESCO Conwy Castle in North Wales.

More Details: 24 Day Package >>>

Vacation Packages for Special Events 2024

There are lots of special events taking place in England during 2024, and we’ve listed below some of the specialist vacation packages that coincide with these events. We also have garden packages that include the RHS Chelsea Flower Show. Many of these are once-in-a-lifetime events that are not to be missed!

3 Day Platinum Jubilee Weekend Package >>>

4 Day Edinburgh Military Tattoo Package >>>

15 Days English Gardens & Chelsea Flower Show >>>

Edinburgh Military Tattoo Package – 4 Days

Price: from £319 per person

Departure Dates: August

The Royal Edinburgh Military Tattoo is one of the most important events in Scotland, with military bands and performers descending onto the Scottish capital from around the world. There will be Highland Dancers, military pipes and drums, flybys of military jets, fireworks and more! The package also includes a visit to Loch Lomond in the Scottish Highlands.

More Details: Edinburgh Tattoo Package 2024 >>>

English Gardens & Chelsea Flower Show – 15 days

Price: From $5,559 per person

Our 15-day package takes you around the fabulous gardens of England. Starting in London you’ll spend a day at the Chelsea Flower Show, perhaps the biggest horticultural event in the world with spectacular displays from international exhibitors. It takes place in May for just 6 days every year, so this is a rare treat for flower lovers! Following your visit, you will then tour England visiting some of the finest gardens and country estates in the world! This includes The Lost Garden of Heligan, Wisley Gardens, Bodnant Garden, Blenheim Palace and more! Regions of England that are visited on this package include Cornwall, the Lake District, the Cotswolds and North Wales. The trip also includes a visit to Bampton, which was the real-life village used in the filming of the Downton Abbey TV Series.

More Details: Chelsea Garden Package >>>

Interested in more English garden packages? Check out our dedicated page for English Garden Package Tours .

Movie & TV Themed Packages

There are loads of blockbuster movies and TV shows that have been filmed and produced in the UK. American audiences have been wowed by series including Downton Abbey, Outlander and Game of Thrones. Here are some shorter and longer vacation packages dedicated to these shows!

5 Days Downton Abbey Mini-Package >>>

4 Days Game of Thrones Mini-Package >>>

13 Days Outlander Package >>>

Downton Abbey Vacation Package – 5 Days

Price: from £675 per person

Our Downton Abbey package visits the real-life locations used in the making of the hit TV series. You’ll visit Highclere Castle, the iconic country estate that will be instantly recognizable to fans of the show! Explore the majestic rooms and lavish gardens. The package will then visit a selection of manor houses and country estates that were typical of the Downton Abbey period of history. This includes Loseley Park, Hatchalnds Park, as well as a visit to the Bombay Sapphire Distillery, makers of the iconic drink!

More Details: Downton Abbey Package >>>

Game of Thrones Mini-Package – 4 Days

Price: from £499 per person

Game of Thrones fans will love this 4-day package that visits the filming locations in Northern Ireland! It includes flights from London to Belfast and free time to explore the city. You’ll visit the recently opened Game of Thrones Studio Tour where you’ll go behind the scenes to see how the TV series was brought to life. The next day, you’ll drive to the Giant’s Causeway and into the Northern Irish countryside to see locations used to portray the free city of Braavos, the Stormlands, the cost of Dorne and the background for Kingsroad.

More Details: Game of Thrones Package >>>

Outlander Inspired Package – 13 Days

Price: from $3,825 per person

Our 13-day Outlander inspired package takes you along the Highland trail to explore some of the most spectacular locations in the region. You’ll start the trip in Edinburgh and end in Glasgow, travelling through the Highlands in between. You’ll see Outlander filming locations for the village of Cranesmuir, Mrs Baird’s B&B, ‘L’Hopital des Anges’, as well as landscapes that were used as backdrops for some of the most important scenes in the show. You’ll visit the Orkney Island and the Isle of Skye, pass through Glencoe, Inverness, St. Andrews and much more!

More Details: Outlander Package >>>

Self-Drive & Private Vacation Packages

Self-Drive Packages

Looking to go solo? We can put together a once-in-a-lifetime self-drive package that can include inspirational driving roads in England, Scotland, Wales & Northern Ireland. We can arrange for car hire and can plan an itinerary according to your interests. Feel free to get in touch for more information.

Private Packages

Looking to travel in a group of 9 or more? A private vacation package can work out as a really cost-effective way of travelling. Take a look at our private tour pages for some inspiration. We can arrange private versions of the tour package listed above. Or we can tailor make a trip according to your interests with an expert guide. We can even arrange family heritage tours to trace the roots of your ancestors. Feel free to get in touch with us to find out more information.

Guide to Planning a Trip

There are so many different vacation packages to choose from when visiting England, let’s break it down and give you a few important things to consider!

Where to Visit? England, Scotland, Britain, UK, United Kingdom….

This can get confusing so let’s start out by getting a few things straight!

England is part of what is officially called The United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland . That’s a very long name to keep using! So to make things a little easier, we’ll just call it the UK.

The UK is made up of 4 regions – England, Wales, Scotland and Northern Ireland . And across the border from Northern Ireland lies the country of Ireland (which is totally independent from the UK.)

So the first question to ask when looking for an England vacation package. Are you looking just to visit England? Or do you also want to visit other parts of the United Kingdom as well?

There are a few ways to plan an England Vacation Package. You could visit:

100% England Packages (we’ve got plenty of amazing things to see here!)

England with Scotland Packages: Combine a trip and go to Scotland as well!

England, Scotland & Ireland Packages : The big trip! These vacation packages sometimes also include Northern Ireland as well. For this size of trip, we recommend packages that are at least 2 weeks long!

And what about Wales? Many of the vacation packages also include 1 or 2 days in Wales

So in this article, we’ll divide up our vacation packages into 4 – ‘100% England Packages’, ‘England & Scotland Packages’, ‘England & Ireland Packages’ & finally ‘Special Packages’

What are our special vacation packages ? Well… these are packages that are based around a specific theme or event. In 2024, we have the RHS Chelsea Flower Show in May and the Edinburgh Military Tattoo Parade in July.

Plus we’ve got some amazing vacation packages for Downton Abbey fans, Game of Thrones fans, Outlander fans, as well as some awesome walking trips, railway trips and even adventure trips!

That’s a lot of England vacation packages to sift through! So please use the contents at the top of the page to navigate directly to what interests you.

We hope you find this guide useful. Please contact the Tourist England team if you have any questions!

How much would a trip to England cost?

This really depends on the length of your vacation package and the size of the group. Prices can range anywhere from $1,800 per person for an 8 day trip in a large group to over $5,000 for a 14-day small-group tour of England.

How many days do you need in England?

We would say that at least 7 days is a good amount of time to explore many of the highlights of England and get a feel for the country. Of course, you could easily spend many more days exploring the best of England, Scotland and Ireland with our amazing vacation packages from London !

How Can I spend 10 days in the UK?

We have many package tours that are 10 days in duration. Typically these trips depart from London and you can expect to spend 7-8 days in England, with 2-3 days in Scotland. With these kinds of holidays, you will normally travel in a loop, travelling north from London along the east side of England, heading into Scotland and then returning to London via the west side of England, with a little bit of Wales as well. Regions you’ll visit include Yorkshire, the Lake District, Scotland and London.

Do these vacation packages include financing options?

Many of the packages offer financing options, allowing you to spread out the cost of the trip over multiple payments. Many of the tours also require a low-value deposit in order to secure your place on the tour.

Do all-inclusive vacations get cheaper closer to date?

Normally booking well in advance is a good way to get a great price on vacation deals, since travel companies like people to book early. Vacation packages will only get cheaper closer to the travel date if the travel company is struggling to fill up the tour.

Is there a package to London and Paris?

We have a 9-day London and Paris vacation package that’s perfect for you! Spend a few days in London before hopping over the English channel and spend some time exploring the French capital.

Do you have mini-vacation packages to England?

Yes, we also have a selection of multi-day tours from London that last 2-5 days, as well as Scotland minibreaks from Edinburgh . These are great options if you are looking to visit a lot of sights but are pressed for time.

more things to do

The Ultimate Guide to Exploring London on a Hop-On Hop-Off Bus

Musicals in London 2024

25 Things to do in London

Get Tickets to Harry Potter Studio Tour If Sold Out

Highclere Castle Opening Dates 2024

While I'm Young

Netherlands
Switzerland
New Zealand
North America
South America

The Ultimate Itinerary for 7 Days In England

Europe , Travel , UK | June 19, 2023

This post contains affiliate links, which means I may make a small commission if you buy anything mentioned here. It doesn't cost you anything extra.

Historic villages, rolling green meadows and charismatic cities ; the best attractions in England are diverse. If you’re planning a trip to see more of the country, you might be wondering exactly how to put together a full itinerary for a week in England.

In this article, guest blogger Claire will show you the highlights – the best places to visit if you have seven days in England!

Let’s hand over to Claire…

Best things to do on a weekend in Bristol itinerary

I’m an England local, and I’ve spent my life travelling up and down the country. So I know all of the best places to visit in England, and exactly what to do while you’re here!

One of my top tips is – don’t spend too long in London. It’s a great city, but there’s so much more to see in England!

If you only have one week in the country, you can see a lot of London in a jam-packed day, and then move on to some other British destinations.

Here’s all you need to know about visiting England!

7 days in England itinerary

What’s in this England travel guide?

When to visit England

Day one: london, day two: bath and bristol, day three: dartmoor and cornwall.

Day Four: Cornwall
Day Five: Cotswolds

Day Six: Manchester and Liverpool

Day seven: lake district, what to pack for your england trip, tips for visiting england.

The beauty of this England itinerary is that it works whatever the season!

England is at its best during the summer, but the weather is never really reliable here; even in the warmest months of July and August, you’ll still find rainy days and mild weather.

That being said, in the summer we have long days and generally warmer weather – it can be as low as 15°C or as high as 35°C (it even got up to 40°C in London last summer!).

So usually it’s not too hot to explore, although we do have the odd day when you’ll just want to laze in the sun and do nothing.

Tip: if it’s forecasted to be this hot while you’re here, schedule some time to bask on the best beaches in Cornwall – although expect there to be crowds!

Another perk of visiting in the summer months is that you have much longer days, with the sun not setting until 9pm in June.

In Spring, you’ll find lots of beautiful flowers and witness the days getting gradually longer, and in Autumn, there are incredible colours as the leaves turn orange, yellow and red.

There are quite a few places to visit in England in winter; while the weather is colder and the days are shorter, England’s attractions are adapted to cooler, wetter weather anyway!

Christmas is a particularly jolly time of year to visit the country and in January and February, rates for hotels are cheaper.

How to get around England

This England itinerary is technically completely manageable by public transport, but I would recommend hiring a car via TravelSupermarket if possible.

Having your own vehicle will make it easy to hop from location to location, and you can do stop-offs at smaller destinations that catch your eye (Cornwall is renowned for having so many amazing attractions that are just a little too far outside of public transport routes!).

Plus, taking the trains around England can actually add up to be very expensive.

Generally, driving in England is safe (although remember we drive on the left here!); just be mindful about driving around 5:00pm each day, as rush hour traffic can be substantial.

If you’re on a super tight budget, it’s worth looking into travelling via MegaBus . The journey times are typically long, but it’s probably the cheapest way to get around England if you don’t drive.

Being the capital of England, London is typically the place you’ll land if you fly into England to kick off your tour of the country.

I only recommend spending one day in London on this itinerary; it’s a fantastic city, and you could spend weeks exploring every corner – but if you only have one week in England, you need to remember that there’s so much more to see!

On your day in London, I’d recommend ticking off the following attractions:

1. Westminster Abbey

2. Guard Change at Buckingham Palace

3. Lunch in Camden, Spitalfields or Leadenhall Market

4. Tower Bridge

5. The Tower of London

6. St Paul’s Cathedral

7. Dinner at Mildred’s (vegetarian food), Caphe House (an incredible Vietnamese restaurant) or The Sun Camberwell (a traditional British pub)

Alternatively, book a one-day DIY tour of London using the Hop-On-Hop-Off bus .

For the next day, head to Bath and Bristol ! Two vibrant cities in the South West, Bath and Bristol have culture, street art and delicious food on offer.

Start your day in the city of Bath, where you can take in the Roman Baths ( this 90-minute walking tour will allow you to see the highlights and includes your entry ticket to the Baths), Bath Abbey and Georgian architecture like the Crescent and Circus.

Then, either drive or hop on a quick (ten-minute) train to Bristol, where you can climb on board the SS Great Britain , cross the Clifton Suspension Bridge to take in views of Avon Gorge and check out the street art of places like Stokes Croft and Southville.

For dinner in Bristol, head to Chilli Daddies for authentic Szechuan hotpot, Cargo Cantina for delicious Mexican cuisine or FISH restaurant for – you guessed it – seafood!

Once you’ve enjoyed some of the South West’s best cities, it’s time to engage in its nature! Devon and Cornwall are known for having some of the wildest, most dramatic landscapes in England.

Your first stop should be Dartmoor. This is England’s largest national park, and it’s famous for its jagged tors with epic views from the top, ancient sites like Grimspound, temperate rainforest and beautiful waterfalls, such as Becky Falls.

It’s the perfect place for a hike and to break up a long drive down to Cornwall. My favourite places on Dartmoor are Wistman’s Wood and Lydford Gorge.

Then, head down to Cornwall! This is the southwestern part of England; a peninsula that sticks out into the Atlantic Ocean.

Cornwall has a distinct culture and heritage, and even its own language, thanks to the fact that it was very isolated for centuries.

There are so many incredible things to do in Cornwall , but I’d recommend sticking to the eastern part of the region for this trip (it can take a while to drive all the way down to the west!).

Depending on your tastes, you might want to walk through a rainforest at the Eden Project , learn about ancient history at Tintagel Castle (allegedly where King Arthur was born!), go surfing in Bude or admire the quaint fishing village of Polperro.

I wouldn’t recommend driving any further than Newquay; in fact, the Fistral Beach Hotel and Spa is the perfect place to stay in! Alternatively, check out this list of the best areas to stay in Cornwall .

Day Four: Cornwall

Spend the next day on your itinerary focused on exploring Cornwall!

If you’ve stayed in Newquay, you could spend some time exploring the town’s best beaches.

Enjoy the gorgeous Towan Beach, famous for its rocky outcrop that sits next to the cliffs, or take a walk on the South West Coast Path to see the bright blue waters of Watergate Bay, a hotspot for surfing.

Alternatively, if you want a surfing beach closer to town, Fistral Beach has extensive sands and huge waves!

It’s a four-hour drive from Newquay to the Cotswolds, so you could visit some more spots in East Cornwall on the drive.

If you haven’t already seen them, head to Bodmin Jail, check out the moor for its hiking or head to the Lost Gardens of Heligan, fascinating gardens that were quite literally “lost” after World War One and then rediscovered in 1990.

Drive up to Bibury, where I recommend staying at The Swan Hotel .

Day Five: Cotswolds

Begin your day in the Cotswolds in Bibury. Explore the 14th-century Arlington Row, the impressive Arlington Mill and take in picturesque vistas of the River Coln.

Thatched roof houses in Kemerton, Cotswolds

Then, visit Bourton-on-the-Water, a picturesque village known as the “Venice of the Cotswolds” because of its series of small bridges over the River Windrush.

Next on your Cotswold road trip is Stow-on-the-Wold, a charming market town with a historic square and St. Edward’s Church, which is renowned for its fairytale-like look.

Then, head to Upper and Lower Slaughter, where you can see more adorable houses and visit the Old Mill Museum.

The Slaughters Inn is the perfect place for dinner, with hearty meals made from local ingredients.

You’ve spent a while in nature on this England itinerary, so now it’s time to see some of England’s best cities!

It’s well worth spending a day seeing the urban highlights of Manchester and Liverpool, two of the most exciting cities in the north of England .

Start your day in Manchester by visiting the trendy urban quarter. This part of the city is lined with independent shops, street art murals and boutique cafes.

Depending on your interests, you could visit one of the Manchester stadiums (either Old Trafford or Etihad Stadium , where Manchester City play!), head to the North Imperial War Museum or see the People’s History Museum.

For lunch in Manchester, there’s nowhere better than the Curry Mile, particularly Mughli which dates back to 1940.

Then, head to Liverpool – famous for being home of the Beatles! The Beatles Story and Beatles Museum both tell the tale of the iconic pop band.

Best cities in north of England to visit: Liverpool's Beatles statue

Finish your day with a cruise on the River Mersey , where you can take in the skyline of Liverpool.

There are plenty of excellent places to eat in Liverpool – to catch a view of the city, Panoramic 34 is a rooftop restaurant serving delicious dishes and plenty of drinks!

One day isn’t enough to explore all of the best places to go in Lake District , but as long as you head here early, you can certainly pack in as much as possible!

Read next: Tips for visiting the Lake District

Once you arrive in the national park, visit Lake Windermere , which is the largest natural lake in England. You can do the four-mile West Shore Walk to take in its most beautiful scenery.

It’s also worth hiking up Orrest Head, which is 240 metres high and takes around an hour and 20 minutes to walk up and down.

Afterwards, drive to Ambleside, a picturesque town located at the northern tip of Lake Windermere. Stroll through the streets lined with quaint shops and cafes, and enjoy a cup of tea with a view of the hills.

Next, head to Rydal Water, a serene lake that’s home to Rydal Cave, a manmade cavern that’s perfect for exploring.

In the afternoon, visit Wordsworth Grasmere, the former home of the famous English poet William Wordsworth, now home to a museum, gardens and a tea room.

The Albert gastropub is worth visiting for dinner, and depending on when you need to leave the country, you could stay in the Lake District for a night. I recommend Linthwaite House Hotel in Bowness-on-Windemere.

Along with the items that you’ll pack for any temperate-weather trip, here’s a list of specific things to remember for your trip:

Adapter : England uses a different type of plug to the U.S, the E.U, Australia and most other countries – so pack a multi-country adapter!

Comfortable walking shoes: Hikes feature throughout this itinerary, so be sure to pack comfortable (and waterproof!) walking shoes.

Rain gear: You might have heard that England has a tendency to be a little rainy – so pack a waterproof jacket or umbrella!

Layers: It’s best to wear layers that you can add or remove, as our weather can be very unpredictable!

Read next: What to pack for a UK road trip

As a local, here are my top tips for visiting England!

Keep an eye on the weather

The weather can be vastly different; it can drop ten (or more) degrees in just 24 hours! So it’s best to keep an eye on the weather forecast before your trip there.

Depending on the season, you might want to pack shorts, t-shirts and rain jackets and longer trousers!

Also, make sure you’re never too far away from an umbrella – rain can come at any time!

Check the opening times

Some attractions, especially in rural areas, have limited opening times, particularly in the winter months. So be sure to know exactly when the places that you want to visit open and close!

Avoid driving during rush hour

As England is quite a densely populated country, traffic can be a problem! I’d recommend avoiding driving during rush hour; personally, I make my longer trips quite late at night to avoid getting caught in motorway traffic.

Shop at the supermarkets (and eat meal deals)

If you want to save some money while you’re in England, go supermarket shopping! You can purchase items to make a sandwich here, or if you are staying somewhere with cooking facilities it’s easy to whip up a hot meal. Or, for lunch, you can purchase a meal deal, which includes sandwiches, a snack and a drink for around £3.50. Us Brits live on them!

Are you ready to spend a week in England?

With gorgeous countryside, historical cities that pulsate with culture and one historic village after another, there’s so much to enjoy on this England itinerary. I hope that it’s encouraged you to get out of London and see some more of this beautiful, charismatic land on your next trip here!

Pin this for your England adventure

The World As I See It

One Ontario lady with a passion for travel and inspiring others to get outdoors and explore more

England / Europe / Travel

Perfect England 2 Week Itinerary: How to Plan an England Itinerary

by Stephanie · Published February 18, 2019 · Updated February 6, 2024

England is one of those destinations that has so much to offer. Whether you are seeking history and heritage or gardens and the great outdoors, you’ll find what you’re searching for in England. But planning a trip to England can be daunting. So, I’ve created the perfect England 2 week itinerary to help you see all the top cities and sights.

In this guide I’ll share what to do in England, top attractions, as well as when to visit, how to get in and around, and even some cool facts. Let’s get planning your 2 weeks in England today!

This post contains affiliate links. By booking through these links I may make a small commission at no extra cost to you.

Best Time to Visit England

In my opinion there is no wrong time to visit England. But your interests, budget, and preferences could determine the best time to visit for you. Peak season is from June through August. This is also the warmest time to visit.

But if you want less crowds and still comfortable temperatures then the ideal time to visit is between April and early June or September through October. And if cooler temperatures and a wee bit of snow don’t bother you then winter in England can be perfect.

How to Get to England

A great and easy city to begin your England itinerary is in London. It is the central hub of travel from west to east and onwards with endless flights arriving every day.

Some budget travelers choose to fly into Gatwick, as flights are sometimes cheaper. But make sure to factor in travel time and budget to get you to central London.

If you do fly through Gatwick, be sure to purchase your transport in advance, whether through National Express or other services, which is cheaper than purchasing on arrival.

The easiest airport to fly into London is Heathrow. Don’t be overwhelmed, it may be big, but it’s easy to navigate and it’s in a convenient location right at the end of the Tube line. Having access to the Tube (London’s metro system) makes getting anywhere in the city a breeze, and it’s affordable.

How to Get Around England

With London the main city for your English vacation, I suggest getting an Oyster Card for use on public transit. You can load it with money for use on buses and the Tube.

Not only will you save money on your fares, but you can also return the card for your initial deposit back. The Oyster Card pairs well with a London Pass, which can be pre-ordered before your trip.

Many of England’s cities are easy to navigate on foot – even London. Public transit, like the Tube is also easy to navigate. Most transit systems have maps available in stations to help you find where to go.

One of the best ways to get around England is by train. They are affordable, efficient, and a scenic way to see the beauty of England’s countryside.

Where to Go in England + England 2 Week Itinerary

If you’re planning an England 2 week itinerary then I have the perfect guide for you! In this travel guide, you’ll discover the top places to go in England, how long to stay in each destination, plus where to stay. So, start getting ready for an epic trip with this ideal two weeks in England itinerary!

London, England is one of the most multi-cultural cities in the world. It is, in my opinion, a fascinating mix of 21 st century meets rich history dating back to the Roman times. So, it makes the perfect first stop on your England 2 week itinerary. And while there are endless things to do in London I recommend visiting for at least 5 days. This is an ideal amount of time to see some of London’s best attractions.

Related Post: Top 10 Tips for First Time Travelers to London

What can you do and see in London in 5 days?

Grab one of the city’s iconic double decker buses for a cheap way to enjoy the best of London, without paying for a proper sightseeing tour. A couple of great bus routes to choose from that will take you by London’s top attractions are, Route 11 and Route 9.

A few must visit attractions are; Westminster Abbey, Big Ben, St. Paul’s Cathedral, Covent Garden, Tower of London, Tower Bridge, and Kensington Palace. And don’t forget to check out one of the many free museums like the British Museum and the National Gallery.

For a slice of the great outdoors visit London’s top parks like Hyde Park, St. James Park, and Kew Gardens.

If you’re travelling the family, you’ll find plenty of attractions to entice the kids. One of the top places to add to your London with kids itinerary is the Natural History Museum. This massive museum is full of awe-inspiring sights and interactive exhibits to entertain the kids and adults alike.

And if you’re looking for a few purely London experiences consider the following. Indulge in high tea. Enjoy the views from a ride on the London Eye. Plus, visiting Little Venice isn’t complete without a ride along the canal on an old long boat.

I can’t forget one of the top picks for many royal fans, Buckingham Palace.

Where to Stay in London

There are a ton of great accommodation options for London! If you’re looking for great places to stay in London I have a few recommendations. The West End is great for first-time visitors. For a hotel, try The Z Hotel . They have various locations both in the West End, like one near Covent Garden and across London. Rooms are just what you need, small, modern, and en-suites.

Another top location is Westminster. Here, you can stay at the Sidney Hotel . It’s close to Victoria Station and the Gatwick Express train. Rooms are bright, modern, and have Hypnos beds. Or if you prefer the South Bank book your stay at The Wellington Hotel . The hotel is only a two-minute walk from The London Eye and has modern rooms and a pub.

For those looking for alternative accommodation try The Lincoln Suites . This aparthotel is close to Covent Garden and has both standard rooms as well as suites with kitchens.

Book your stay in London today!

Stonehenge or Avebury

For many Stonehenge is on their bucket list. This UNESCO World Heritage Site is filled with interesting stories and makes for a great day trip from London.

But did you know there is another mysterious stone circle that you can visit? Avebury is another sight of mysterious stones. And while both make a great day trip from London, which should you visit?

Stonehenge is busy, expensive (around £20), and you can only walk around a path laid out at a distance from the stones. But, Avebury is free, much less full of tourists, and you can walk amongst the stones.

After you enjoy a whirlwind tour of London head to Bristol, only a 2 hour train ride away. This will be your next base for four days. This hip city has been touted as the next London. And it makes for a great base as it’s much more affordable than London and is close to some of England’s best places to visit.

What can you do and see in Bristol in 4 days?

Some of the top things to do in Bristol include; Bristol Cathedral, Temple Church, exploring the historic harbour, climbing Cabot Tower, Bristol Museum & Art Gallery, and St. Nicholas Market.

I also recommend walking across the Suspension Bridge for epic views. And for all the street art fans, Bristol is home to Banksy, one of the most famous street art artists. It’s also Europe’s largest street art and graffiti festival. So street art is everywhere!

Where to Stay in Bristol

You’ll find a ton of great places to stay in Bristol. If you’re looking for accommodation that is central to attractions I have a couple of options for you! The Mercure Bristol Grand Hotel is a fun hotel that’s a stone’s throw from St. Nicholas Market. This four-star hotel is located in a historic building right in the heart of Bristol. Along with a pub on site, the hotel is full of awesome art, over 500 pieces, by local artists.

Another great option is the ibis Bristol Centre . This modern hotel is close to all the top Bristol attractions downtown. Plus, it’s located in the Harbourside area, where it overlooks Millennium Square. There’s also a 24-hour front desk and fabulous bar and café.

Book your Bristol stay now!

Day Trips from Bristol

Just outside Bristol are some incredible places to visit in England. Bath is only a 15 minute train ride from Bristol.

It’s easy to take in all the main sights during a day trip to Bath . Like the Roman Baths, Bath Abbey, Parade Gardens, Royal Crescent, and the Bath Guildhall Market. If you want to learn more about the history and details of Bath join one of the free walking tours.

Another great day trip from Bristol is to Glastonbury and Wells. You can easily do both in one day. Glastonbury is only a 1.5 hour bus ride from Bristol.

In Glastonbury you can wander around Glastonbury Abbey and hike up to Tor for incredible views of the English countryside.

On your way back to Bristol stop in Wells. Home to one of England’s most stunning cathedrals, Wells is full medieval. Don’t forget to visit the Wells Market, the Bishop’s Palace, and try one of their many walking tours.

What can you do and see in York in 2 days?

A visit to York usually starts with a visit to the Gothic York Minster Cathedral. But there is so much more to do. Some of the best things to do in York include, walking the walls of the city, wander the Shambles, Yorkshire Museum, Clifford’s Tower, and JORVIK Viking Centre.

Did you know that York is considered one of the most haunted places in the world? So its no surprise there are ample ghost walks to go on, if you dare!

Where to Stay in York

When looking for places to stay in York you’ll find a variety of options from grand hotels to charming bed and breakfasts. If you’re looking for an interesting place that is rich in history then The Roman Bath is for you! On the site of a historic Roman bath, this hotel has modern rooms, a bar, and is close to everything. The best part is that it’s within 300 metres of York Minster!

For those looking for something newer then book your stay at the Hampton by Hilton York . Overlooking York’s Roman walls, the Hampton has a great location. It’s across from the York Railway Station and is only a 10-minute walk to York’s historic centre. Plus, it has awesome views of town and York Minster! Another bonus, if you’re using a car for your UK road trip this hotel offers parking.

Other destinations to fill in your England 2 Week Itinerary

If you’re planning a week trip through the UK, the above itinerary can easily work within that timeframe. However, if you’ve got more time, the following places are my top picks to add to your England 2 week Itinerary.

The Lake District

England’s Lake District is one of those wondrous destinations that live up to everything you hope. Located a 3 hour scenic train ride from London, in North West England, the Lake District is known for its lakes, mountains, and forests.

As England’s largest National Park, it’s perfect for those seeking the wonderful world of nature with endless hikes.

But the Lake District is a magical place for literary travellers. You can visit Dove Cottage in Grasmere, the home of Wordsworth that is now a museum. Or head to Hill Top in Hawkshead, the home of Beatrix Potter.

Depending on what you want to do, you can spend anywhere from one or two nights or up to a week.

Or if you’re looking for an alternative to the Lake District, consider adding the Peak District to your itinerary. A favourite for outdoor adventurers, there is a wealth of things to do in the Peak District ! Along with epic hiking trails, there are charming small towns, interesting historic sites, and more!

Related Post: Top UK Literary Stops for Book Lovers

Where to stay in the Lake District

Whether you’re looking for a one-night stay or a cozy cabin, you’ll find some charming accommodation in the Lake District. One thing to note is that there are a lot of lodging options on the outskirts of the Lake District, so you’ll have to weigh where you’ll want to stay.

One lovely option is the Bower House Inn . Located in the Eskdale Valley, this Inn is set in a 17th-century building that is home to a restaurant with tasty food! It’s close to the Cumbrian coast and makes for an ideal base for those looking to enjoy countryside walks.

You can also stay at the Cuckoo Brow Inn . Located in the sleepy village of Far Sawrey, it has cozy rooms and a continental breakfast in its pub. A fabulous bonus is that the Inn is in the same area that inspired Beatrix Potter!

Another great place to add to your England 2 week itinerary is Canterbury. Located southeast of London, it’s only a 1.5 hour train ride.

Canterbury was a pilgrimage site in the Middle Ages. Home to ancient walls that encircle the medieval centre, it will have you feeling like you’re stepping back in time with its cobbled streets and timber framed houses.

A few things to do in Canterbury include visiting the Canterbury Cathedral, St. Augustine’s Abbey, Canterbury Roman Museum, the Beaney House of Art & Knowledge, Canterbury Castle and Westgate Gardens.

Where to Stay in Canterbury

You’ll find everything from contemporary hotels to historic lodgings in Canterbury. A great choice is Hampton by Hilton . With a location near Westgate, sleek spacious rooms, plus a continental breakfast, and views of Canterbury, it’s a win-win!

If you’re looking for unique places to stay in Canterbury then check out the Canterbury Cathedral Lodge . Located on the tranquil grounds of the Cathedral, it has an awesome location as it’s only a two-minute walk to the historic centre of Canterbury. The Lodge offers solid breakfasts and scenic views too!

If you’re after fun times and beaches then consider adding Brighton to your England vacation itinerary. This English seaside town is an hour south of London by train. But beyond the beach, what is there to do in Brighton?

It’s most famous for the Brighton Palace Pier . Home to rides, food kiosks, and full of entertainment. But don’t forget to visit the Royal Pavilion, the Brighton Marina and wander around to take in the beautiful Regency-era buildings.

Related Post: Cotswolds Best Villages – A Roadtrip Around Cotswolds

All you’ll need for Brighton is one or two nights. However, if you’re extending your England itinerary then making it longer allows for fun day trips like Arundel Castle, Rye, and The Seven Sisters.

Where to Stay in Brighton

Accommodation in Brighton is as varied as the city. Plus, there’s a ton of great waterfront hotels! One of which is the Jurys Inn Brighton Waterfront .

Located close to the Brighton Pier and the Royal Pavilion, Jurys Inn overlooks the sea. Another option is the Pink Pavilion . Set in the heart of Brighton, this boutique hotel is a five-minute walk to the sea and close to the Pier.

Related Post: 21 Best Things to do in Falmouth Cornwall

If you stay an extra day in London then Oxford is the perfect day trip to round out your 2 weeks in England. Only an hour and a half train ride from London, Oxford is a fantastic university city full of old-world charm.

Beyond visiting the prestigious Oxford University, which was established in the 12th century, there is plenty of other fun things to do in Oxford . Visit one or more of the historic museums. Go to the Oxford Castle. And don’t forget to climb one of the towers for awesome views of Oxford.

Many visit Oxford as a day trip from London. However, if you’d like to dig a little deeper into this old university town then I recommend staying at least one or two nights.

Where to Stay in Oxford

If you’re looking for places to stay in Oxford you’ll be surprised that the diversity. One lovely place is Head of the River . Set along the banks of the River Thames, it’s a short walk to the city centre. Along with a restaurant, Head of the River also has a riverside terrace.

For those wanting more amenities then consider staying at the Courtyard by Marriott in Oxford’s city centre. With a great location, this hotel also has a restaurant and bar.

Related Post: 14 Free Things to do in the West Midlands

Cool Facts about England

Some of the world’s most incredible people have come from England, like Shakespeare, The Beatles, Charles Darwin, Charlie Chaplin, and Alfred Hitchcock.

No matter where you are in England you are no more than 115 km away from the ocean.

Ontario, Canada is more than 8 times larger than England

Extended UK Road Trip Itinerary

If you’re looking for a proper UK road trip itinerary, consider adding Scotland and Wales. I once did a crazy road trip that took me from London to Scotland, then over to Ireland, and back through Wales. While I don’t recommend the speed of that week long trip, it can be done in two weeks.

Or you can add to this England 2 week itinerary, with another week in Scotland, a few days in Dublin, and a couple of days in Wales. Making the above two week England itinerary extended for another two weeks, for an epic four weeks in the UK and Ireland.

For those looking for castles and green rolling hills then add Wales to your England itinerary. Whether you’re travelling via public transport or by car, Wales has a scenic train system as well as incredible roads to drive.

Wales is known for its stunning coastline, quirky Welsh language (just look at those street signs!), and epic national parks. If you’re looking for what to do in Wales a few top attractions include Snowdonia National Park, the castle and National Museum in Cardiff, and the Pembrokeshire Coast National Park.

Snowdonia National Park is a must for outdoor adventures. The park is home to lakes, hiking trails, and a railway taking you up to the peak of Snowdon! A visit to Cardiff, the capital of Wales, is a must! Here, you’ll want to check out the Cardiff Castle and the National Museum.

How long do you need in Wales? A few days is ideal if you’re travelling by car to visit Cardiff and a few other small towns, like Caernarfon. However, if you’re using rail to see Wales then you may need more time. Same thing goes if you’re planning to explore Snowdonia!

The grandness of Scotland has so much to offer! With incredible cities, tons of castles, and picturesque roads, you could easily spend weeks exploring Scotland. However, if you’re adding Scotland to your England itinerary, I recommend five to seven days.

Scotland is known for its historic capital, Edinburgh, haggis, and creative locals! Plus, who can resist visiting a country that has the Unicorn as their national animal!

If you only have a week, a few top things to do in Scotland include sightseeing in Edinburgh and exploring Glasgow’s street art.

I also recommend taking a day tour to the Scottish Borders ! If you’re a Da Vinci Code fan like me, you’ll love this tour of the Scottish Borders and Rosslyn Chapel ! I loved it!!

How long do you need in Scotland? While you can do a quick visit of four days, I highly recommend staying for five to seven days.

The distance between Edinburgh and Glasgow is only an hour, so you can easily do that as a day trip from Edinburgh. There are a ton of great tours that will take you to the Scottish Borders. There’s this awesome Alnwick Castle and the Northumberland Coast day tour.

Or this history-driven tour of Hadrian’s Wall and Roman Britain .

Sample England 2 Week Itinerary

You can easily customize this England 2 week itinerary to suit your needs. Below you’ll find a few suggestions to help you plan your two weeks in England.

London – 7 days > Bristol – 4 days > York – 3 days

London – 4 days > Bristol – 2 days > York – 2 days > Lake Districk – 2 days > Canterbury – 1 day > Brighton – 1 day > Oxford – 1 day

London – 8 days with day trips to Canterbury, Brighton, Oxford > Bristol – 2 days > York – 2 days > Lake District – 2 days

LIKE IT? PIN IT FOR LATER!

Tags: England London travel

I'm a Canadian gal with a passion for travel, the great outdoors as well as coffee and books. I hope to inspire others to feel the same way! Traveling mostly solo, I love to explore my own backyard of Ontario as well as exotic cities around the world.

Bath in a Day

April 12, 2016

by Stephanie · Published April 12, 2016 · Last modified August 10, 2020

Discover Iceland

May 7, 2012

by Stephanie · Published May 7, 2012 · Last modified August 10, 2020

Book Review of The Frozen Thames

March 18, 2019

by Stephanie · Published March 18, 2019 · Last modified August 20, 2022

14 Responses

Comments 14
Pingbacks 0

England is on my bucket list!! What a great list of things to do while in England! How cool! Thanks for the tips!!

You’re so welcome Jaclyn! England has so much to offer and this will certainly get you started!

England has so much to offer! I live in Bristol and love a stroll over the suspension bridge or around the docks. We are off to Cardiff tomorrow so will be living your itinerary! Wales and Scotland are magnificent too and well worth adding on to any trip if possible.

That’s so awesome that you live in Bristol! I absolutely fell in love with the city when I visited! And you’re right, there’s so much to do and see in England. I hope you have a fabulous trip to Cardiff! I’d love to see more of Wales!

Great post. I like the idea of visiting Stonehenge as well as the less popular Avebury. Thanks for the tips.

Thanks so much! Stonehenge is so popular and can be expensive, so I always like offering up cheaper and more off the beaten path alternatives.

What an interesting itinerary! I have been to the UK a few times but never for such a long time. But you shared so many beautiful places that you make me wanna go again for more time!

I hope you get a chance to return and explore more! There are so many great places in England and the UK to visit!

What a lovely itinerary with loads of variety! I hope to visit all of these spots one day, but I’m especially interested in extending my trip to include Scotland and Wales. Thanks for the great insight.

If you can spare more time then adding Scotland and Wales will make for an epic itinerary!

That is such a comprehensive guide. I am planning to visit UK in summer this year, and it is going to be helpful. Thank you for sharing.

I’m thrilled you’re visiting the UK this summer and love that you were able to find some helpful tips in this guide! I hope you have an amazing trip!

This is such a great itinerary! I’ve been to most of these places and agree they’re great places to visit! And I love that you suggested going to Wales too! I think it’s so overlooked and it’s my favorite place in the UK 🙂

I’m so happy to hear you agree with my suggestions! And yes, I agree Wales is so incredible and sadly overlooked. I hope more people discover it!

What are your thoughts? Cancel reply

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed .

Next story Why You Should Attend a Travel Expo
Previous story Book Review No Regrets: Adventuring Through Life

Hey there, I'm Stephanie and am the gal behind The World As I See It. I have a passion for travel, hiking, and local travel in Ontario! Let me take you along on my journey exploring my own backyard - including Ontario small towns, cafes, and trails to cities around the globe. I hope you will be inspired to get out and explore your backyard and beyond!

For the Latest Sign Up Below

TOP ONTARIO BLOGGER

TOP CANADIAN TRAVEL BLOGGER

Privacy Overview
Strictly Necessary Cookies

This website uses cookies so that we can provide you with the best user experience possible. Cookie information is stored in your browser and performs functions such as recognising you when you return to our website and helping our team to understand which sections of the website you find most interesting and useful.

Strictly Necessary Cookie should be enabled at all times so that we can save your preferences for cookie settings.

If you disable this cookie, we will not be able to save your preferences. This means that every time you visit this website you will need to enable or disable cookies again.

Navigate forward to interact with the calendar and select a date. Press the question mark key to get the keyboard shortcuts for changing dates.

Navigate backward to interact with the calendar and select a date. Press the question mark key to get the keyboard shortcuts for changing dates.

England Trip Planner

Top destinations in england.

Top attractions in England

Other notable attractions

Explore nearby places

Stratford City
Waltham Forest
Richmond-upon-Thames
Kingston upon Thames
Worcester Park
West Wickham

All related maps of England

Map of England
Map of London
Map of Willesden
Map of Haringey
Map of Stratford City
Map of Mitcham
Map of Ealing
Map of Morden
Map of Wembley
Map of Waltham Forest
Map of Beckenham
Map of Richmond-upon-Thames
Map of Croydon
Map of Bromley
Map of Barking
Map of Ilford
Map of Twickenham
Map of Greenford
Map of Redbridge
Map of New Malden
Map of Kingston upon Thames
Map of Edgware
Map of Woodford
Map of Wallington
Map of Carshalton
Map of Isleworth
Map of Worcester Park
Map of West Wickham
Map of Enfield
Map of Harrow

England throughout the year

England in January
England in February
England in March
England in April
England in May
England in June
England in July
England in August
England in September
England in October
England in November
England in December

Q&A about England

Add places from guides with 1 click, collaborate with friends in real time, import flight and hotel reservations, expense tracking and splitting, checklists for anything, get personalized suggestions.

4.9 on App Store, 4.7 on Google Play

Join our Adventure: Get all my insider tips for motorhoming & road trips

England Road Trip: 50 Unmissable ideas (for every UK itinerary)

England road trip idea- Isle of wight road trip

Planning an England road trip? Here are some of the best itinerary ideas for all schedules, including London to Cornwall, the Cotswolds and Kent in southern England, National Parks like the Lake District or Peak District, Northern England and all the way up to the Scottish border.

Whatever your cup of tea, there’s a UK road trip idea here for you. We’ve also provided a helpful map so you can visualise your route.

*We work hard to make this the best motorhome travel blog and road trip website possible, full of helpful content for you. The website is supported by our readers, so if you buy through links on this site we may earn a commission- at no extra cost to you. All opinions remain our own .

If you find this post useful, you can also treat us to a coffee – we promise to enjoy it while creating more useful content like this- we might even indulge in a biscuit (or two!)

JUMP AHEAD TO...

UK Road Trips- How to Plan

Planning a UK road trip to England or elsewhere can be tough.

There are SO MANY places, ideas, options and reviews- how on earth are you supposed to choose the best way or most scenic drives?

Then, you have to factor in how long you have for your UK road trip (remembering that much of rural UK has smaller, slower roads, so it takes a lot longer to get there than you might expect.

So, if you’re planning a road trip around England (and the UK) and feeling overwhelmed, here are some of our favourite road trips and itinerary ideas to help you. We’ll discuss the best bits of each area, why and when you should visit, how far it is from London and where you should allow extra time to explore.

England Road Trip Ideas- Where to Start

The first thing to decide is where you want to visit on your road trip. Also, remember that England is only one section of the UK- there are several other countries to explore (England, Wales, Scotland and Northern Ireland make up the United Kingdom).

So, if you want to do a full UK road trip, you’ll need more time than if you were just doing an England road trip.

Our biggest tip is not to overface yourself. Whether you only have a long weekend for a quick trip from London or a week to get out on the open road and tour, make sure you leave time to actually get out of your vehicle and explore the places you’re visiting- you’ll find plenty of historic sites, sandy beaches and incredible routes to enjoy.

Roughly speaking, you can split England in half- the South of England and the North (the line roughly goes through Birmingham) or even further into quarters if you only have time for a one-week road trip.

Again, how far you can travel will depend on how much time you have, as well as how you are travelling (rental car, motorhome or public transport), but to do each half ‘properly’ we would recommend at least 2-3 weeks- especially if it’s your first time in England.

Having said that, you can see some of the best sights in less time than that- here’s our one week in England road trip itinerary .

Make planning your next road trip EASY (& fun!)

When you’re planning a road trip, keeping track & organising all your ideas is often the hardest part. Fix that TODAY with our printable pdf road trip planner. Grab yours FREE now

This form subscribes you to our mailing list. We share tips, itineraries, stupid mistakes and guides like this for road trippers and motorhomers.

We never spam (yuck) and you can unsubscribe at any time.

Where to stay during your England road trip

If you’re planning a motorhome or campervan trip , you’ll be able to travel and stop along the way, often without booking in advance, using schemes like Brit Stops or wild camping in your motorhome .

If you’re in a car or motorbike, there are PLENTY of hotels and BnBs to use en route. If you’re travelling in summer we recommend booking at least the first stop in advance- if you use Booking.com for all your accommodation you’ll find you can get a great deal and save a lot of money.

England Road Trip Map

I know how hard it can be to visualise places if you don’t know the country well, so here’s a map of England with several of the road trip destinations shown on it.

Out of interest, if you did this route, it’s about 1056 miles (1700km) long. You could technically do it in a week, but you’d barely have time to get out of the car!

England road trip itinerary ideas and map

Common England Road Trip Questions

How long does it take to drive the whole of england .

Many people wonder “ How long does it take to drive the whole of England ?” That’s a tough question, as there are so many places to go and depends a lot on your starting point.

Most people allow 2-3 weeks to drive through as much of England as they can, but that will involve a LOT of driving. Of course, you can take a look at the road trip itinerary ideas below and see which scenic route or quaint villages most appeal to you- and then plan your trip around that.

One common UK road trip idea is to drive from Land’s End in Cornwall all the way up to John o’Groats in Scotland, which is about 838miles (1350km). Obviously, this is a road trip which involves England AND Scotland, and that brings me to another important point.

Want to rent a vehicle for your road trip?

These might help:

Discover incredible deals for motorhome/ camper rentals
Find the best deals for car rental

READ: 10 essential questions to ask before you rent a motorhome

Can we go to England by road?

This is a common question for anyone who doesn’t live in the UK- and the short answer is yes, you can drive to England from mainland Europe.

Whether you’re enjoying a European road trip (here are some ideas for you ), or want to combine a trip to England with another country, you can drive to England from Europe via either the Eurotunnel or taking one of several car ferries (they also take motorhomes/ campervans on most of the ferry routes.)

If you’re planning a road trip from France to England, which route you take will depend on which part of France and England you want to visit- find out more in our Eurotunnel vs Ferry post.

And if you’re going the other way and will be driving in Europe, make sure you are aware of the new rules for driving in Europe after BREXIT .

If you’re like more help planning your trip, this post about how to plan an epic UK road trip will help.

Is England the UK or Great Britain?

Neither. And part of both 🙂

It’s common for people to confuse an England road trip with a UK road trip. England is just one country within the UK, along with Wales, Scotland and Northern Ireland. If you want to extend your trip and see more of those countries, you might enjoy our post on the best UK road trips and scenic drive ideas.

The UK is short for ‘The United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland’.

Great Britain is the LANDMASS of the largest island in the British Isles (the one which makes up England, Wales and Scotland). Northern Ireland, Isle of Man and the Channel Islands are not included in this.

And, to make things even more odd, the British Isles includes ALL the islands, including the whole of Ireland, which isn’t part of the UK at all.

Thoroughly confused? Ok, let’s just stick to England road trip ideas! 🙂

South England Road Trip Ideas

If you’re visiting London and want to explore part of the country for a few days, southern England is a good place to start. Of course, there are a HUGE number of places to explore in ‘South England’ (which is roughly classed as anywhere below Birmingham), so I’m just going to pick a few highlights to inspire you.

Cornwall- South West England

England road trip ideas and itinerary- South England cornwall road trip

Cornwall is one of my favourite places to road trip in England. I spent 2 years living there whilst I was in the Navy, and have been back many times since. There are plenty of things to do in Cornwall , but there are some important tips you need to know before you arrive!

Why is Cornwall one of the best England road trips?

If you want cute villages, incredible beaches and more history than you can shake a stick at, Cornwall is perfect. Also, they have some of the best ice cream IN THE WORLD (no kidding) and it’s perfectly acceptable to eat a scone with jam and clotted cream EVERY day and no one will judge you.

IMPORTANT NOTE : There is intense rivalry between Devon and Cornwall over whether jam or cream should go first on a scone. In Cornwall, they do jam and THEN cream, which is apparently the way the Queen preferred her scones .

(Don’t worry, they’re used to tourists and won’t stone you if you get it wrong. But be warned if you want to live there…!)

In Devon, they do it the other way. I’ve tried both, and I’m a jam first girl (because you can then put more cream on!)

When should you visit Cornwall?

Cornwall is best anytime between Easter and mid-October.

TOP TIP : Avoid July and August if you possibly can. The schools are on holiday and it feels like EVERYONE in England has travelled to the same small Cornish village as you.

Beaches are overcrowded, parking becomes a struggle and there’s a very real chance of shops running out of ice cream. Don’t do that to yourself. You deserve that ice cream.

Also, many businesses and attractions close after mid-October for the winter, so you might find you can’t do everything you want to outside the season.

Having said that, we find Cornwall one of the best places to enjoy Autumn in Europe – the weather is still warm, but everywhere is quieter and easier to get to.

How long should you spend roadtripping Cornwall?

How long is a piece of string!! But, as you can see on our Cornish road trip itinerary , we recommend 7-10 days minimum to see all the best places.

Where are the best places to visit in Cornwall on a road trip?

Did I mention that I used to live here? I have SO many recommendations for places to visit we could be here all week!!! Some of my absolute favourites (and this is like choosing my favourite child… or chocolate bar) include:

Tintagel Castle (the home of Arthur and the round table)
Minack Theatre (built onto the side of a cliff)
St Michael’s Mount
Boscastle (where one of the best witchcraft museums in the world is!)
Newquay beach (and bars!)

READ MORE: Discover our complete Cornwall road trip itinerary (45 places you HAVE to see!)

England road trip ideas and itinerary- Devon road trip south coast england travel

Recommended by Ben at Driftwood Journals

Famed for its endless rolling hills, craggy coastlines and clotted cream delights, Devon is unsurprisingly one of the most popular destinations in the UK – and a dream for rural road-trippers! With wild moors galore, cutesy towns and villages, and bountiful beaches, you don’t have to drive far in Devon to stumble upon scenes of unparalleled beauty.

Highlights and best places to visit in Devon

Dartmouth- one of the best towns in the county (and home of the Royal Naval Officer training. I spent a year here…running up those bl***y hills!) Hire a boat and explore the river.
Paignton- the beach with the red sand and is also known as the English Riviera.
Dartmoor National Park
Exmoor National Park
Exmouth with its beautiful painted houses
Salcombe Harbour – a holiday hotspot for all generations.
Dulverton- head to the Copper Kettle tearoom; you won’t regret it!

Devon road trip ideas

Pack up your motorhome/ camper (or car with tent) and find a site with views across the Devonshire cow-grazed hillsides of the Lyn Valley, or out over Dartmoor. You can wild camp in Devon, but not on the moors. Find out more about motorhome wild camping in the UK.

For a coastal trip, explore sea towns like Salcombe and Dartmouth (where you can take a boat up to Greenway, Agatha Christie’s summer home) and round to Exmouth, before heading north to Woolacombe, Dawlish and the fishing boat bobbing harbour of Ilfracombe. Enjoy the bustle and culture in the capital of Exeter or discover the notorious prison of Dartmoor.

Alternatively, head to North Devon and enjoy the wilder seas and views of the north coast. This is a great area for surfing and watersports.

If you have more time (and fuel) to burn, take to the A386 between Appledore and Plymouth, traversing through forested valleys to picture-perfect towns like Great Torrington and Tavistock, where you can tour the tearooms and plan the rest of your trip in the park while dangling your toes in the River Tavy.

But the true beauty of road tripping in Devon is that you don’t really need to plan too extensively. You’ll never be far from a cream tea pitstop, and the verdant country roads will offer up some of the most perfect picnic spots you’ll ever see. All you need is is a full tank, and a little patience when stuck behind tractor after tractor!

When is the best time to visit Devon on a road trip?

As with Cornwall, the best time to visit Devon is Spring to Autumn, but avoid the high summer months if you can, especially if you’re on a UK motorhome holiday .

Can you visit Devon on a day trip from London?

You can, but it’s quite a long drive. I’d say you’d need at least 2 or 3 days to really be able to explore anything.

Dorset- One of England’s Best Road Trips

England road trip itinerary ideas- best places to visit

Recommended by Paul | Anywhere We Roam

The Jurassic Coast stretches 95 miles across Dorset in southern England. With an iconic coastline of towering white cliffs, it’s an excellent destination for a classic road trip. Stunning scenery, historical sites and local breweries make the Jurassic Coast one of the best places to experience the beautiful English countryside.

Dorset road trip- best places to visit?

The main highlight of a road trip to Dorset in the area has to be Old Harry Rocks – a collection of white stone monoliths that have been carved out along the coast. It’s one of the most impressive stretches of scenery in the UK with dazzling chalk stacks assembled like a jigsaw puzzle waiting to be completed. If you get time, be sure to enjoy one of the many fabulous Dorset walks- you won’t regret it.

A thirty-minute drive away, Corfe Castle stands as a reminder of England’s 11th-Century past. It was one of the earliest Norman castles built and today it glows in its dilapidated glory overlooking the Dorset hills. It’s a stunning, photogenic inclusion on a UK road trip.

For another natural phenomenon, Durdle Door is possibly one of the most recognisable symbols of the Jurassic Coast. Over time, crashing waves have eroded limestone stacks in the sea leaving a glorious natural arch.

It’s a beautiful stretch of beach, ideal for a long summer stroll. It’s also next to the famous Lulworth Cove, which is a wonderful place to enjoy an ice cream!

Editors note: (I (Kat) actually jumped off the top of Durdle Door on my hen party!)

After soaking up the stunning scenery, head west to Lyme Regis, a quaint town with a vibrant independent retail scene. The historic Cobb Harbour set against moody cliffs is well-preserved and houses some of the best coffee in the area.

When is the best time to visit Dorset on an England road trip?

The best time to visit the Jurassic Coast on a road trip is from May to early July when the surrounding countryside will be verdant green and covered in wildflowers, but there’s not too much traffic!

Hampshire road trip

Hampshire is another county in England we know well, having lived here for 14+ years. There’s plenty to enjoy on a road trip to Hampshire, from beautiful cities to picturesque country houses.

Highlights of a Hampshire road trip

Some of our favourite places to visit in Hampshire include:

Winchester- be sure to visit the Cathedral where Jane Austen is buried and you can see one of the oldest Bibles in the world. If you’re lucky enough to be visiting in December, don’t miss the famous Winchester Christmas Market , held in the Cathedral grounds each December.
Highclere Castle (or Downton Abbey, as you might know it!)
Lymington – for the oldest open sea water baths in the UK – and the New Forest (check out the Wildlife park there and make sure to take some memorable photos).
Hinton Ampner- 18th century famous manor house known for its gardens.
Portsmouth (you MUST go to the Mary Rose museum and HMS Victory)
Isle of Wight (see below)

Isle of Wight road trip

Recommended by Darek | DarekandGosia

The Isle of Wight , famous for its beautiful views, is an island on the south coast of England, just below Southampton. Technically, it’s part of Hampshire, but feels like a different world.

With a motorhome or car, you can reach the island by ferry from either Southampton or Portsmouth – book in advance during summer. There are also a couple of foot passenger ferries and a hovercraft from Southsea.

Why is it one of England’s best road trips?

The Isle of Wight is like going back in time. It’s worth a road trip here for even a weekend, to escape the hustle and bustle of normal life, ride bikes and take a walk on the cliffs.

Also, there are some wonderful places to stay. If you’re on a road trip, check out these amazing Isle of Wight campsites – some with stunning sea views!

What is there to do?

You can start exploring the island in Shanklin – one of the coastal villages famous for its beautiful beaches. On the promenade along the sea you will find many restaurants and hotels – most of the Island is typically tourist-oriented.

From Shanklin drive to the western part of the island. The most characteristic point is The Needles – three chalk rocks emerging from the sea with a small lighthouse built at the end of one of the columns. You can get to Needles by car and then follow the path on foot to the cliff slope. It’s a fabulous place for a picnic.

Next to Needles is Old Battery, a military fortification dating from the nineteenth century. There you can find World War II memorabilia or visit one of the various exhibitions are also taking place.

While driving around the island make sure you get to Carisbrooke Castle near Newport. Its construction began in the 12th century. It is worth taking a moment to walk around the castle, relax in the Edwardian-style garden.

One of my favourite places on the Island is Osborne House- Queen Victoria’s summer home. You can walk around the gardens and the house and even enjoy an ice cream on her private beach. Osborne House is run by English Heritage.

When is the best time to visit the Isle of Wight?

The Isle of Wight is a must-see for anyone who wants to admire the British climate and above all fantastic views. It is worth going here all year round – it’s actually one of the best places to visit in Europe in October , when there are fewer tourists and you can enjoy the views & roads!

Norfolk Broads

England road trip ideas and itinerary- norfolk

Recommended by Mandi | Big Family, Little Adventures

Sometimes you want nothing more than to escape the hustle and the bustle of everyday life, the noise, the bright lights, the never-ending pace of life. If you want to get away, the Norfolk Broads is pure escapism; big skies, plenty of peace and quiet and an abundance of wildlife.

Best places to visit in Norfolk on a road trip

The Old Roman Fort at Burgh Castle with an elevated position and commanding views over the marshes – perfect for a walk in both winter morning frost or a hot and hazy mid-summer evening
If you prefer a bit of activity, Wroxham is a bustling Broads village- home to Roy’s of Wroxham, possibly the largest village shop you have ever seen
Plenty of riverside pubs and restaurants in Wroxham and all around the Broads- the perfect places to stop for a bite to eat
St Benet’s Abbey – an 11th century monastery defying time, standing in a stunning green valley.
If you are an animal lover, you will enjoy a visit to Wroxham Barns to feed the lambs or spot the grey seals on the Norfolk beaches

Norfolk Road Trip- when is the best time to visit?

You can explore Norfolk all year. In summer, if you would like to explore the best Norfolk beaches or Broads up close, why not hire a dayboat; these can be hired at various boatyards throughout the Broads. Waveney River Centre is another stunning place to stop and admire the view, either by boat or car.

The challenge is (as always in England!) the weather. In dry conditions, most paths are excellent, but it can get a bit more challenging in wet weather.

However, over the years, an increasing number of boardwalks have been developed, increasing safe access to the Broads whatever the weather. Also, seeing the windmills and rivers on a crisp winter morning is unforgettable.

Time does not stop in Norfolk, but it really does feel like it slows down. To be able to watch the sunset across the broads any time of year is a magical experience and the perfect place to enjoy a chilled road trip.

Sussex, Kent and Surrey

Ahhh, the picturesque south-east corner of England, which includes the Garden of England (that’s the other name for Kent). This area is lush, green and has some many historic buildings and castles you’ll find it impossible to avoid them.

It’s also home to plenty of gorgeous sandy beaches, white cliffs (such as Dover and Beachy Head) and some truly wonderful parks to walk in.

Even better, it’s all easily reached from London by car and train, so it’s easy to get away from the city for a few days if you’d like a countryside break or a trip to the beach.

Best Places to visit in Sussex include:

Sussex is actually split into East and West Sussex, but to make things easy on your road trip I’ve made one list for you. They’re not that far apart from each other!

Brighton : A vibrant seaside city famous for its pebble beach, iconic pier, and the Royal Pavilion with its distinctive architecture. Explore the Lanes for unique shops and enjoy the city’s lively arts and music scene. See below for more ideas
Arundel : Home to Arundel Castle, a medieval and Victorian castle that overlooks the River Arun. The town itself is picturesque with cobbled streets and antique shops.
Chichester : A historic cathedral city with Roman origins, Chichester offers a mix of history, culture, and shopping. The Chichester Cathedral and Pallant House Gallery are notable attractions.
Lewes : Known for its medieval architecture, Lewes Castle, and historic streets. The Lewes Bonfire Night is a famous annual event.
Eastbourne : A traditional seaside town with a Victorian pier, beautiful seafront, and the iconic Beachy Head cliffs nearby.
Rye : A charming medieval town with cobbled streets, half-timbered houses, and views of the surrounding marshland.
Battle : Famous for the Battle of Hastings in 1066, this town is home to Battle Abbey and the Battlefield. Explore the historic sites and learn about this pivotal event in English history.
Petworth House and Park : A stately mansion with an impressive art collection set in a vast deer park. The gardens are also worth exploring.
Seven Sisters Country Park : A stunning coastal area with dramatic chalk cliffs and rolling hills, perfect for hiking and enjoying breathtaking views.
Bodiam Castle : A 14th-century moated castle surrounded by water and picturesque landscapes.
Sheffield Park and Garden : A National Trust property known for its stunning gardens, lakes, and vibrant displays of plants.
Birling Gap and Beachy Head : More stunning chalk cliffs and coastal views, with the added beauty of the natural arch at Birling Gap.
Glyndebourne Opera House : Known for its world-class opera productions, the opera house is set in beautiful countryside and offers a unique cultural experience.

Best places to visit in Kent include:

Canterbury – home to the UNESCO World Heritage Site of Canterbury Cathedral
Dover : Known for the iconic White Cliffs of Dover, this coastal town is home to Dover Castle, which boasts a complex history and offers panoramic views of the English Channel.
Rochester : A charming town with a medieval castle and cathedral. It’s also the birthplace of Charles Dickens, and you can visit the Dickens World theme park.
Whitstable : This coastal town is famous for its oysters and seafood. Enjoy the quaint streets, beach huts, and seafood restaurants along the coast.
Margate : A seaside town with a revived artistic scene, featuring the Turner Contemporary art gallery and the scenic Margate Sands.
Leeds Castle : Often referred to as the “loveliest castle in the world,” Leeds Castle is set on an island in a lake and surrounded by beautiful gardens.
Hever Castle : The childhood home of Anne Boleyn, with historic architecture, gardens, and a maze.
Chatham Historic Dockyard : A maritime museum where you can explore historic warships, submarines, and learn about Britain’s naval history.
Biddenden Vineyards : If you’re a wine enthusiast, Kent has several vineyards. Biddenden is one of the oldest and most well-known.
Canterbury Tales Visitor Attraction : An interactive museum where you can step back in time to experience Chaucer’s famous tales.
St. Augustine’s Abbey : A UNESCO World Heritage Site, this abbey in Canterbury dates back to the 6th century and is a significant historical site.
Chartwell House : The former home of Winston Churchill, now a museum showcasing his life and legacy.

These are just a few highlights of what Kent has to offer. Whether you’re interested in history, nature, or culture, you’re likely to find something appealing in this diverse and beautiful county.

Best Places to Visit in Surrey

Box Hill : A National Trust site known for its stunning views and walking trails. It’s a popular spot for outdoor enthusiasts and offers panoramic vistas of the surrounding countryside.
Polesden Lacey : A grand Edwardian estate with beautiful gardens, Polesden Lacey is a National Trust property that offers a glimpse into the lives of the wealthy in the early 20th century.
Watts Gallery – Artists’ Village : Located in Compton, this unique attraction is dedicated to the works of Victorian artist George Frederic Watts and his wife Mary Watts. The village includes a gallery, chapel, and artist studios.
Hampton Court Palace : While part of the palace is in Greater London, the stunning Hampton Court Palace is right on the border of Surrey. It’s famous for its Tudor history, grand architecture, and beautiful gardens.
RHS Garden Wisley : A flagship garden of the Royal Horticultural Society, Wisley offers a wide variety of plants, landscapes, and garden designs to explore.
Brooklands Museum : A museum dedicated to motorsport and aviation history, located on the site of the world’s first purpose-built motor racing circuit.
Loseley Park : A grand Elizabethan manor house surrounded by beautiful gardens and parkland, open to the public during certain times of the year.
Denbies Wine Estate : England’s largest vineyard, Denbies offers tours, wine tasting, and beautiful views of the surrounding countryside.
Newlands Corner : Another viewpoint offering breathtaking views of the Surrey Hills, perfect for picnics and outdoor activities.
Epsom Downs : Known for Epsom Downs Racecourse and the famous Epsom Derby, this area offers open spaces and walking trails.
Virginia Water : Part of Windsor Great Park, Virginia Water features a lake, ornamental cascades, and woodland walks.

Surrey’s mix of historic sites, natural beauty, and cultural attractions make it a delightful destination for a variety of interests. Whether you’re into history, outdoor activities, or simply enjoying scenic landscapes, Surrey has something to offer.

Brighton – East Sussex

I’ve given Brighton it’s own section because it’s one of my favourite cities in England and you should try to add it to your England road trip itinerary, especially if you’re heading toward East Sussex.

Brighton is a city renowned for its diverse communities and innovation, the quirky shopping areas, its music and art scene, and its large LGBT population. Read more about Brighton in Autum .

Why is Brighton one of the best England road trips?

Brighton is less than an hour away from London (76 km) and on a direct train line. It offers plenty of fun and exciting activities to enjoy (more than just fish and chips at a pier!)

Brighton has been famous as a cultural centre for over a century. It’s home to the world’s oldest operating aquarium (which opened in 1872- now called ‘’Brighton Sea Life’’), and you can even ride the world’s oldest operating electric railway, the Volks Railway, built in 1883.

Other Brighton Highlights include:

See the Palace Pier
Catch the latest release in the Duke of York Picturehouse, Britain’s oldest cinema.
Have a stroll down the North Lane- home to over 400 independent shops
Discover the Victorian innovations still in operation in the city.

How long should you spend in Brighton?

You will want to spend at least two days in Brighton to truly take in the city, but you can easily make a week of your itinerary if you want to explore more places in Sussex, Kent and Surrey.

What is the best month to visit Brighton?

The sunniest (and therefore warmest!) time of the year in Brighton is from May to September. July and August are peak tourist season, with hotel prices skyrocketing, so be aware of that and plan your stay accordingly.

Cambridgeshire & Cambridge

Cambridgeshire is a county in the East of England with plenty to do. The jewel of the county is Cambridge, with a historical, 800-year-old centre you should definitely not skip.

Why should you include Cambridge on your England road trip?

Only 1 hour and 30 minutes away from London via M11, Cambridge offers so much: a rich history of English heritage, a buzzing local community, and a picturesque setting. You’ll even find a gift Henry VIII gave to Anne Boleyn!

Cambridge Highlights

See the King’s College Chapel
Enjoy breakfast at Fitzbillies
Go punting in the River Cam
Have a picnic by the river.
Enjoy walking the historic streets

Cambridge Trip Itinerary idea

Leaving London, head up to Cambridge via the M11.

Start the day with drinks and a meal in one of the many deli and brunch places in Market Square before setting off to explore the city. I highly recommend the famous Fitzbillies- the food is delicious.

From there, you can choose from a variety of activities: visiting King’s Chapel, punting in the River Cam (pass under the Bridge of Sighs), hiking on the Cam Towpath (lots of hidden gems if you know how to look for trails!), or taking in the city views from St. Mary’s Tower.

If you’re staying overnight, end the day by attending the Evensong at the King’s College Chapel (select days only)

When is the best (and worst) time to visit Cambridge ?

Cambridge is beautiful all year round. However, the worst time to visit would be spring – the university students sit their finals between April and June, which means many of the college sites are closed to visitors.

What are some of the best places to visit in Cambridge?

The King’s College Chapel in the University of Cambridge is the third-oldest university in operation and the most iconic and instantly-recognisable building in the county.

Don’t miss out on an opportunity to drink at the Eagle, a historic pub in the heart of Cambridge’s city centre famously linked to Watson and Crick’s discovery of DNA.

If you are feeling adventurous and are ready to brave the British winter, visit Cambridge in December. It’s off-peak season and features one of the best UK Christmas markets you should visit. Read all about the Cambridge Christmas market here.

How long should you spend in Cambridge?

One day in Cambridge is usually enough time to visit the majority of the main sights, especially if you are visiting during the summer. You’ll need tickets for most of the chapels and university buildings, so go first to buy those.

Wiltshire & Cotswolds Road Trip – 3 day trip from London

Recommended by Ann | The road is life

The Cotswolds is the largest Area of Outstanding Natural Beauty (AONB) in England and Wales. If you look at a map of England, find Bristol (west coast, just below the indent of southern Wales) and the Cotswolds is the area north-east of Bristol.

There is so much beauty and fascinating history to discover around the Cotswolds region and luckily you don’t have to travel far from London to get there! You can reach Bath or Bristol easily in a day from London, but we recommend at least 3 days to really explore the area by car/ motorhome, plus explore Stonehenge and Salisbury on the way back to London. If you’re travelling with children, don’t worry- there’s plenty of things to do in the Cotswolds with kids.

Highlights & Best Places to Visit in the Cotswolds and Surrounding Area

Explore the charming stone villages of the Cotswolds
visit the historic city of Bath
marvel at the mysterious ancient stones of Stonehenge
Indulge in some shopping at Daylesford farm
stop at the magnificent Salisbury Cathedral.

When is the best time for a Cotswolds road trip?

Although the Cotswolds can be visited all year, this road trip is best completed in the spring or summer months to ensure warmer and sunnier sightseeing weather.

The days are also longer- allowing you to see more each day. However, unlike Cornwall and Devon, most places to NOT shut during winter, so feel free to explore whenever suits you!

Wiltshire & Cotswolds road trip itinerary from London

Departing London, drive out to the Cotswolds. This is where you should spend 3-4 days exploring as many lovely little towns and villages as you wish to.
A few of the prettiest Cotswolds villages include Bibury, Stow-on-the-Wold, Lower Slaughter, Bourton-on-the-Water, Castle Combe and so many more! The beauty of the Cotswolds region is that the villages are all located in close proximity with minimal driving time in between them.
Once you have seen your share of lovely English villages , carry on to Bath which is only a 30-minute drive from the village of Castle Combe- well worth a visit.
Spend a full day and night in Bath visiting the Roman baths.
From there continue to Stonehenge. A visit to this incredible ancient site can easily take half a day. We camped overnight at Stonehenge and saw the most INCREDIBLE sunrise we’ve EVER seen. (Seriously, watch the video. It’s breathtaking)
From Stonehenge, it’s only a short 20-minute drive to the medieval town of Salisbury which brings you to the final stop of this road trip.
The highlight of Salisbury is the stunning Salisbury Cathedral which has the tallest spire in all of Britain! Spend one night in Salisbury before making the final 2-hour road trip back to London.
Another option is to return to London via the historic city of Oxford. Don’t miss a meal in Sticks and Sushi- one of the best restaurants in Oxford and with incredible views over the city.

North England Road Trips- Why You Should Visit

It’s easy when planning an England road trip to get sucked into famous places like Cornwall, Devon or the Cotswolds- and those are all AMAZING places to visit.

However, I strongly encourage you to visit the north of England as well if you have time. You’ll find villages just as pretty, delicious food (chips, pie and gravy is the best thing in the world) and incredible history.

Again, we were lucky to live up here for 4 years- here are some of our absolute favourite places to road trip, although there are of course many more we have yet to discover! I hope they give you some ideas and inspiration for your next trip.

Don’t forget to Grab your ULTIMATE road trip planner here – it has everything you need to help you pack for your road trip.

Peak District National Park

The Peak District is a huge and stunning area in Derbyshire, just to the east of Manchester. It’s a perfect place for a road trip because there are so many things to see!

A car or motorhome makes it easy to travel between the sites and there are plenty of campsites or hotels to use as you explore.

There are a multitude of hikes, walks and tors to climb and the area is famous for its caves, which people still lived in as recently as 1910!

The Peak District was the UK’s first National Park and is also considered the real ale capital of the world! If you’re exploring the Peak District with kids , there are steam trains, tramways, cycle paths and even a cable car taking you up to see some stunning views! There’s also Alton Towers theme park – one of the best in the UK.

Best places to explore in the Peak District

Some of the highlights include:

Chatsworth House
Ladybower reservoir
Alton Towers theme park
Heights of Abraham cable car

Lake District road trip

Recommended by Fiona/ Passport & Piano

The Lake District National Park is a UNESCO heritage site that makes for the perfect road trip. Walking around the lakes and fells to see the magnificent scenery is one of the many pleasures of the area.

Quintessential villages are plentiful as are traditional English pubs with real ale and hearty food. Don’t just rush by on your way from England to Scotland; take a few days and enjoy all that the lakes have to offer.

Best places to visit on a Lake District Road Trip

Most people arrive from the south via Windermere, but to explore the areas hidden gems its worth spending at least three days here. The Lake District has some of the worlds best scenic drives and a trip along the Honister Pass and Kirkstone Pass are a must.

In the South Lakes, I’d highly recommend a visit to Grasmere . Here you can visit several homes of the famous poet William Wordsworth and enjoy Sarah Nelson’s delightful gingerbread.

If you love Beatrix Potter, you can follow in her footsteps at Beatrix Potter World in Bowness- on- Windermere. Her home near Hawkshead is open to visitors, and Wray Castle is a beautiful spot where she enjoyed her family holidays.

In the North Lakes, the towns of Keswick and Cockermouth have plenty to explore. The Castlerigg stone circle, with its stunning views across the fells, is worth stopping at, and the “Surprise View” across Derwent Water is spectacular.

If you’re not exploring in a motorhome or campervan, accommodation throughout the area is plentiful. There are boat rides and water-based activities to enjoy on most of the lakes and a plethora of outdoor pursuit centres for the more adventurous.

When is the best time for a Lake District road trip?

In the summer months, the National Park can be rather busy particularly on the main A66 road which runs through the centre. Hence if you want to avoid the crowds, consider visiting in the spring or autumn.

While you’re not guaranteed sunshine at any time of the year, the weather is probably at its best between April and September.

England Road Trip- Yorkshire & The Dales

England road trip ideas and itinerary- england to Scotland road trip yorkshire

Recommended by Sinead | Map Made Memories

England’s largest county, Yorkshire, is a perfect destination for a road trip. There are so many diverse attractions to see within a relatively short drive of each other.

Highlights and some best places in Yorkshire to visit

Hardraw Force–England’s highest single-drop waterfall
White Scar–The longest show cave in England
Visit the ‘Best Street in Britain’
Visit the cobbled Shambles, named ‘the Best Street in Britain’.
Marvel at the Ribblehead Viaduct, the 24 arches that span the Yorkshire Dales, a true masterpiece of Victorian engineering.
Castles and ruins all over the place
Stand on Hogsmeade station (or at least the station which played it in Harry Potter!)

Yorkshire Road Trip Itinerary

Start your road trip in the rolling hills and river valleys of the beautiful Yorkshire Dales. Visit the 11th century Skipton Castle or descend underground to marvel at the formations in White Scar Caves, the longest show cave in England.

Clamber over Brimham Rocks or hike the stunning landscape around Malham Cove. Browse the independent shops in the Victorian spa town of Harrogate.

Places to visit on the Yorkshire Dales

The Yorkshire Dales are packed with attractive waterfalls. Choose between the plunging falls around Ingleton, popular Aysgarth Falls or, my favourite waterfall, Hardraw Force which is England’s highest single drop waterfall. Before leaving the Dales, visit the impressive monastic ruins and landscaped gardens of Fountains Abbey.

Continue your road trip by exploring the historic city of York . This compact city is easily navigated on foot and is an ideal location for history buffs. You can visit Viking, Roman, Georgian and Victorian sites all in one day!

See the iconic York Minster, walk the city’s medieval city walls and stroll along the cobbled Shambles, which has been voted the ‘ Best Street in Britain’ and was the inspiration behind Diagon Alley from the movie adaptation of the Harry Potter series!

Road trip over the Yorkshire Moors

End your Yorkshire road trip with a drive across the wild Yorkshire Moors. Take a scenic trip on a steam train across the Moors to visit charming Goathland train station which doubled as Hogsmeade station in the Harry Potter movies. Alternatively, your legs with a hike at the Hole of Horcum, a huge ancient natural amphitheatre.

How long should you spend exploring Yorkshire on a road trip?

You could ‘cover’ Yorkshire in a couple of days but to truly appreciate all it has to offer I would recommend at least one full week.

When is the best time to road trip to Yorkshire?

Yorkshire can be explored all year around- and expect rain at any time! But Spring is incredible on the moors- with the wildflowers blooming and the days getting longer, it’s a perfect time to visit. Autumn also offers spectacular views with the leaves turning colour, providing an incredible backdrop.

England Road Trip Idea – North East Coast

England road trip ideas and itinerary- england to Scotland road trip saltburn

Northern England’s east coast is full of charming towns and villages, and is the perfect destination for a road trip.

Best places to visit on a North East coast England road trip

Saltburn-by-the-Sea (to search for fossils)
Lemon top ice-cream – Its legacy goes back over 100 years!)
Staithes- picturesque fishing village
Whitby Abbey – the inspiration behind Bram Stoker’s Dracula
Robin Hood’s Bay (where smuggling was commonplace
Scarborough Castle

North East England road trip itinerary

Start in Saltburn-by-the-sea. Be sure to search for fossils throughout your visit. I actually found one in Saltburn-by-the-Sea, but you can get lucky in any of the places on this list! Saltburn-by-the-Sea is home to the historic Saltburn Cliff Tramway and affords beautiful views from the bluffs above town.

You can walk along The Cleveland Way, a historic trail that runs through each of the 5 locations mentioned. I’d also recommend trying Lemon Top Ice Cream, or vanilla ice cream with a dollop of lemon sorbet on top.

Staithes is a quaint fishing village laden with narrow pathways and quirky cottages.

The Whitby Abbey towers above the town, giving it an eerie feeling – it’s even credited as the inspiration behind Bram Stoker’s Dracula!

Robin Hood’s Bay has a long history with smugglers, and its red rooftops and crowded buildings conceal hidden routes. In Scarborough, you can enjoy rides at the Luna Park amusement park or visit the historic Scarborough Castle!

When is the best time to road trip England’s north-east coast?

Although you can visit this area all year round, I’d suggest visiting in the summer or fall. It rains much of the year in this region of England, but there’s a higher likelihood of sunshine from July through October.

How long to spend on this England Road trip?

You can complete this road trip in less than 2 hours, but I’d suggest spending at least a few days exploring the region. Each Yorkshire coastal town has its own charm and activities to offer, so you certainly don’t want to rush!

How far is it from the North east coast to London?

Scarborough to London takes about 5 hours by car. Avoid travelling Friday afternoons or Monday morning- those are the peak road traffic times.

Don’t miss Durham

We spent a lovely couple of days exploring the city of Durham. There are so many wonderful places to explore, but one of the highlights for us was Durham Cathedral. This incredible building was built in the 11th Century and is the largest surviving stone vaulted ceiling of its size.

However, if I’m honest, I was more excited by the fact that several scenes in Harry Potter were filmed here, including in the cloisters and many of the covered walkways.

It was also in Durham Cathedral that Harry, Ron and Hermione encounter ‘Fluffy’- the forbidden corridor was also part of the cathedral.

Other fantastic things to see in or near Durham include:

Durham Castle
High Force Waterfall (one of the best waterfalls in Europe )
Finchale Priory

Northumberland Coast

England road trip itinerary- North england places to visit- lindisfarne priory

Recommended by Tracy | Travels in Time

The Northumberland Coastal route stretches for over 35 miles from Alnmouth in the south to the Holy Island of Lindisfarne in the north.

The drive takes you through an area of outstanding natural beauty with many beautiful villages and places of interest to visit along the way.

How long to spend on a Northumberland coast road trip

This itinerary covers a day trip but you could spend a few days exploring the area or even walk the Northumberland Coastal Path along the same route if you are feeling up to it!

Northumberland road trip itinerary

The first village to visit is Craster – famous for its kippers and overlooked by Dunstanburgh Castle. If you’re looking for impressive castles in England , Northumberland is the place to go- there are more castles here than any other county in England!

After exploring Craster and the castle, head to Seahouses. A popular seaside town for families with lots of arcades and fish and chip shops this is the place to stop for a bite to eat.

If the weather is good why not hop on a boat over to the Farme Islands? With large colonies of seals and puffins the islands are popular with nature lovers.

Bamburgh Castle dominates the horizon and is worth exploring. It was once the home to the Royal Seat of the Kings of Northumbria and also has a ghost or two!

After Bamburgh head to the Holy Island of Lindisfarne. Make sure you check the tides before you go- the island is tidal and is only accessible during certain times.

Once on the island take a stroll up to the castle. Don’t miss exploring the ruins of Lindisfarne Priory. This is the place famous as the home of Christianity in England until Viking raids eventually led to the abandonment of the priory.

When is the best time for a Northumberland road trip?

The best time to visit Northumberland and places in North East England is in the summer – the days are long and the sun will hopefully be shining! Be aware that on occasions during the summer a sea fret (mist) can hang over the coast and cool temperatures and decrease visibility. Make sure to check the weather forecast before you travel.

Wow- anyone else want to jump in their motorhome/ camper/ car/ bike and head off to start exploring? What a fantastic list of England road trip destinations!

As you can see, it really doesn’t matter where you go or how long you have to explore England- you’ll have plenty of places to enjoy. And who knows- next time we set off for Norfolk, we might even make it there without swinging by Cornwall first!! 🙂

Planning an England road trip? You might find these posts useful:

How to plan an epic UK road trip
How to create a road trip itinerary with Google Maps
100 best road trip driving songs
How to plan a motorhome trip to UK or Europe

See all our UK travel ideas and tips

Planning England travel and road trips? Looking for itinerary ideas and the best places to visit? Here are 12 BREATHTAKING places to see in England, including Cornwall, Devon, south coast, Salisbury and the Lake District. These England travel tips are all you need to plan your perfect UK road trip itinerary.

Kat never planned to buy a motorhome. She also never planned to quit her job as an air traffic controller, go touring around Europe in said motorhome, start one of the UK’s largest motorhome travel websites… or get a cocker spaniel.

Find out how she went from stuck in the rat race to being a digital nomad and inspiring thousands of people to have their own epic adventures here.

If you’d like to connect with Kat, send her an email or follow her adventures on social media.

Sharing is caring!

Transfagarasan, Romania (driving The top gear road)

Tintagel Castle & Merlin’s Cave

10 best & biggest Christmas Markets in Europe

15 essential Europe road trip tips you need to know

Panoramic Mont Blanc Cable Car Ride, Chamonix

21 Best UK Christmas Markets You MUST visit

Cornwall is such a beautiful part of the UK to visit in a motorhome, although it can be a little tight around those country roads.

So true- some of those roads are tiny, but worth it for the incredible views and places to visit.

Have you been on the welsh coast much

Our very first motorhome trip EVER was to the Welsh coast. We’ve put together some of our favourite Welsh road trips here if you want some ideas: https://wandering-bird.com/wales-road-trip/

Although all road trips are lovely, I particularly enjoy traveling in a campervan through Devon in the UK. I appreciate you sharing this list of road trip suggestions.

Fantastic article for anyone travelling England on a road trip

See the best of Britain by train (2 week itinerary + maps & tips)

By: Author Tracy Collins

Posted on Last updated: August 10, 2023

Follow our 14-day itinerary to see the best of Britain by train including top destinations in England, Wales and Scotland. We’ve done all the planning so you don’t have to!

Do you have 14 days to explore Britain but are struggling to put together an itinerary? Not sure what places to include or how to get around? You will find everything you need to know to see the best of Britain by train in this article.

We have included 5 of Britain’s most popular destinations in 3 countries – London, Bath, Cardiff, Edinburgh, and York with the option of choosing between 2 others -the Lake District and Liverpool – on days 7 and 8.

For each destination included in the itinerary, you will find recommendations of what to do and see, accommodation suggestions, and logistics plus practical details and tips to ensure your 14-day train trip around England, Wales and Scotland is everything you dream of.

I have also included a map illustrating the points of travel, the distance between destinations, and the estimated travel time for each leg of the journey.

Good to know! For non-UK citizens we recommend purchasing a BritRail Pass or the Eurail Global Rail Pass for this 2-week itinerary – click to find out more about BritRail passes & Eurail Global Rail Passes or here to read our comparison guide.

Britain by train - 14 day itinerary map.

Days 1 – 3 London

🌟 highlights of bath, 🗺 logistics london – bath, 🏨 accommodation options in bath, ☂️ day tour options from bath, 🗺 logistics – bath to salisbury (stonehenge), 🌟 highlights of cardiff, 🗺 logistics bath – cardiff, 🏨 accommodation options on cardiff, 🗺 logistics cardiff – liverpool, 🏨 accommodation in liverpool, 🗺 logistics cardiff – lake district, 🏨 accommodation in the lake district, 🌟 highlights of liverpool, 🌟 highlights of the lake district, 🗺 logistics – liverpool to edinburgh, 🗺 logistics – windermere to edinburgh, 🏨 accommodation in edinburgh, 🌟 highlights of edinburgh, ☂️ best day trips from edinburgh, scotland by rail itinerary, 🗺 logistics edinburgh – york, 🏨 accommodation in york, 🌟 highlights of york, 🗺 logistics york – london, listen to our introduction to uk train travel podcast, what train cards or passes are recommended for this uk train travel itinerary, where can i buy train tickets, what do i need to know about travelling the uk by train, can i take luggage on uk trains.

Are any of the UK's scenic train routes included in this itinerary?

Enjoy your UK train travel adventure

See Britain by train with our 14 day itinerary

A minimum of 3 days in London is recommended especially if it is your first visit to the city . This will give you enough time to see the main London landmarks and tick some attractions off your London bucket list.

This 14-day best of Britain by train itinerary begins with Days 1/2 & 3 in London and ends on Day 14 back in the capital. This may provide some flexibility to add on a few more sights in London depending on your flight or onward travel itinerary.

London Day 1

I recommend spending your first day visiting some of the most popular London attractions, landmarks, and sights.

If you are feeling energetic a self-directed walking tour of the main sights located in central London is one option.

Alternatively consider booking a guided tour. We recommend the London In a Day: Tower of London, Westminster Abbey & Changing of the Guard tour from Take Walks . This comprehensive tour is dedicated to the quintessential sights of the city: Westminster Abbey, Tower Bridge, Changing of the Guard, a Thames river cruise, and a full Tower of London tour with access to the Crown Jewels.

If you prefer to take it easy on your first day (don’t discount the effects of jetlag) a hop-on hop-off bus tour is another option and a great way to orientate yourself with the city.

London Day 2

If you did not visit the Tower of London on Day 1 I would recommend starting your morning by exploring this ancient and historic landmark.

Afterwards, walk to the 43rd floor of the Walkie Talkie building for lunch at the Sky Garden (London’s highest public garden). Entry to the Sky Garden is free but it is essential to book tickets ahead of your visit.

In the vicinity of the Sky Garden are 4 other landmarks and buildings worth visiting – St Dunstan in the East Church Garden, Pudding Lane, St Paul’s Cathedral, and Leadenhall Market.

After exploring the area jump on the Central Line at St Paul’s changing at Holborn for the Piccadilly Line to Covent Garden. Enjoy the street entertainment, shops, and attractions around Covent Garden before dinner and a show.

London Day 3

Today I recommend visiting the British Museum in the morning. The museum is always busy so try to arrive as early in the day as possible. I recommend purchasing a ticket that enables you to skip the line so you don’t waste precious vacation time in a queue.

If you are visiting with children we recommend this private customised family-friendly tour of the museum with a special children’s guide. During the 2 hour tour, you will enjoy favourite displays such as the Egyptian mummies and the Rosetta Stone with your guide.

For your final afternoon in the city, I have a few alternatives depending on your interests.

If you enjoy shopping head to Harrods. If you enjoy history a trip to Churchill’s War Rooms is a great option. If you have young kids head to London Zoo or – if they are up for another museum – the Natural History Museum in South Kensington. If you have visited London previously and are seeking something different I highly recommend jumping on the Thames Clipper to Greenwich.

For those of you with specific interests, this may also be a great time to do a themed tour – Harry Potter, James Bond, Jack the Ripper are some examples of the themed walking tours available in London .

These are just a few ideas for your first 3 days in London – please see our detailed itinerary posts for more.

View of 2 people standing with umbrellas opposite the Houses of Parliament in London.

Day 4 London – Bath

Britain by train - 14 day itinerary map showing day 4 of 14 - London to Bath.

On Day 4 depart London for the South West of England and one of England’s most beautiful and oldest cities – Bath!

For centuries Bath’s naturally warm and mineral-rich waters attracted those who sought its curative powers and potential for rejuvenation.

Roman Baths constructed nearly 2000 years ago, stunning Georgian architecture, a museum dedicated to Jane Austen and numerous boutiques, independent shops and tea houses are just some of the attractions of the city.

Tip – Take an early train from London and you will have most of the day to explore.

Roman Baths
Royal Crescent
Jane Austen Centre

Read more – One day Bath Itinerary – follow our one day in Bath itinerary to see the cities sights, attractions and landmarks.

Read more – Bath Travel Guide – our complete guide to visiting Bath including accommodation suggestions, where to eat, and what to read before you visit.

London to Bath travel time by train is approximately 1 hour 20 minutes
Depart London Paddington (Platform 5 typically) arrives Bath Spa (Platform 1 typically)
This is a direct train service with Great Western Railways
Best luxury spa hotel in Bath – The Gainsborough Bath Spa is a luxury 5* hotel and the only UK hotel to have access to naturally heated thermal waters within its Spa Village.
Best mid-range hotel in Bath – Eight is a small independent boutique hotel in the centre of Bath.
Best budget option in Bath – Grays is a boutique B&B situated in an imposing semi-detached Victorian villa located 15 minutes from the centre of Bath.
Find more options in my guide to the best places to stay in Bath

Day 5 Bath (Day trip – Cotswolds or Stonehenge)

On day 5 you have a few options. Bath is close to two of England’s most popular destinations and I highly recommend including at least one of them in your itinerary.

Your options are

Spend another day exploring Bath OR

Take a day tour from Bath and explore the beautiful Cotswold villages and/or Stonehenge OR
Travel independently taking the train from Bath to Salisbury and catch the Stonehenge tour bus from there.

We will explore these options in more detail so you can decide which you prefer.

I have picked the best day tour options to the Cotswolds available from Bath. Stonehenge is also included in some of these tours.

If you decide to include both destinations (Cotswolds & Stonehenge) in one tour bear in mind that you will have less tim e to explore the Cotswolds but this may be the best option if you really want to see both.

It is possible to travel to Stonehenge independently using public transport from Bath to Salisbury (and onto Stonehenge) but I have included some day tours too so you can choose the best option for your needs.

Day tours from Bath to the Cotswolds

‘Stonehenge & Secret England’ Private Full-Day Tour from Bath – Private tour to Stonehenge then personalize your sightseeing to visit castles or gardens, or take a film location tour of medieval villages featured in ‘Harry Potter,’ ‘Downton Abbey,’ and other hits.
Full-day private Cotswolds tour from Bath – Explore idyllic villages and famous Cotswold towns on this 9-hour full-day tour. This will give you a wonderful overview and experience of what the Cotswolds is all about.

Day tour from Bath including Stonehenge

Stonehenge, Avebury stone circles & stunning Cotswold Villages – Full-day tour which includes the beautiful villages of Lacock and Castle Combe.

Day tours from Bath to Stonehenge

Stonehenge Private Tour (Half-Day Tour from Bath) – Includes a detailed guide to Stonehenge and private end-to-end transportation from your Bath hotel.
Bespoke private tours of Stonehenge and Avebury by car with a local guide – Half or full-day tour to the prehistoric stone circles at Stonehenge and Avebury.

Bath to Salisbury travel time by train is approximately 1 hour
Depart Bath Spa arrives in Salisbury

Day 6 Bath – Cardiff

Britain by train - 14 day itinerary map showing day 6 of 14 - Bath to Cardiff.

On day 6 hop on the train for a journey of just over an hour to a new country – Wales . The Welsh capital of Cardiff is the buzzing centre of this Celtic nation.

Crammed with cultural hotspots, charming Victorian architecture, a rich history, impressive castles, and modern urban hangouts, Cardiff has a whole heap of things for visitors to do and see.

Cardiff Castle
Sail Cardiff Bay
Stroll the Centenary Walk through the city
Take a themed Dr Who or Gavin & Stacey tour

Day 7 Cardiff – Liverpool or Lake District

On Day 7 you can choose to either spend a few days exploring the city of Liverpool or alternatively a rural experience in the beautiful Lake District.

If you are a fan of the Beatles Liverpool is the must-visit destination. Take the Magical Mystery tour and visit the childhood homes of Paul and John before dancing the night away at the Cavern Club.

Alternatively head to the Lake District and explore its stunning lakes and mountains, quaint towns and villages , from your base in Windermere .

Britain by train - 14 day itinerary map showing day 7 of 14 - Cardiff to Liverpool.

Cardiff Central to Liverpool Lime Street travel time by train is approximately 3 hours 25 mins.
Depart Cardiff Central (Platform 1/2 typically) arrives Crewe (platform 6 change trains and depart at platform 6) to Liverpool Lime Street (Platform 9 typically)
There is one change required at Crewe. Transport for Wales trains from Cardiff to Crewe and then Crewe to Liverpool on Avanti West Coast
Best Liverpool Hotel for Beatles fans – The Hard Days Night Hotel is decorated with Beatles memorabilia and located around the corner from the Cavern Club – our number one choice when staying in Liverpool.
Best mid-range hotel in Liverpool – The Titanic Hotel is located in a historic warehouse in the UNESCO World Heritage Stanley Dock. Spacious rooms in a unique setting.
Best budget option in Liverpool – The Resident Liverpool offers affordable accommodation in a central location.

⭐️ Find more options in my area & accommodation guide to Liverpool

Lake District

Cardiff to Windermere in the Lake District train time is approximately 6 hours with 2 changes required.
Depart Cardiff arrives Windermere
Change at Crewe (arrive and depart platform 6) and catch the Avanti West Coast to Lancaster (arrive and depart from platform 3) on Northern Trains to Windermere (Platform 1).
Best luxury hotel in Windermere – Macdonald Old English Hotel and Spa is a luxury 5* hotel and spa perched on the shores of Lake Windermere.
Best mid-range hotel in Windermere – Cragwood Country House Hotel is located in stunning gardens on the shores of Lake Windermere. It offers spacious rooms, exceptional food, and a relaxing experience for guests.
Best budget (ish) hotel in Windermere – The 3* Windermere Manor Hotel is an 1850’s stone manor house offering dog-friendly accommodation.

Tip – More accommodation options can be found in my guide to the best places to stay in Lake Windermere

Day 8 – Liverpool or Lake District

Liverpool versus the Lake District illustration.

Albert Dock
Beatles Tour
Tate Modern
Enjoy a football match

Read more – Liverpool Travel Guide (including tips, itinerary & map

Boat trip across Windermere
Take a Hike and enjoy stunning views
Visit Hill Top the former home of Beatrix Potter
Enjoy a drink in an English pub

Read more – Lake District Travel Guide

Day 9 Liverpool or Lake District to Edinburgh

UK rail trip itinerary- 14 day itinerary map showing day 9 of 14 - Lake District or Liverpool to Edinburgh.

On day 9 travel from Liverpool or the Lake District to Edinburgh. Journey time from both departure points is around 3 – 4 hours so you will arrive in plenty of time to start exploring the sights of Edinburgh.

Top tip – Book a hotel near the train station, drop your bags, and head out to the Royal Mile and soak in the atmosphere of the Scottish capital. This hop-on-hop-off bus pass is great to explore Edinburgh at your own pace with a 3-route tour ticket.

Liverpool Lime Street to Edinburgh travel time by train is approximately 3 hours 45 minutes
Depart Liverpool Lime Street arrives Edinburgh
One change at Preston in Lancashire.
Windermere to Edinburgh travel time by train is approximately 3 hours 10 minutes.
Depart Windermere arrives Edinburgh Waverley
Depending on time of travel 1 or 2 changes at Oxenholme in the Lake District (and possibly an additional change at Carlisle) .
Best luxury hotel in Edinburgh – The Balmoral is a luxury 5* hotel
Best mid-range hotel in Edinburgh – Radisson Blu Hotel Edinburgh City Centre
Best budget option in Edinburgh – Elder York Guest House

Day 10 Edinburgh

Scotland’s capital is historically rich and scenically beautiful. The winding cobblestone streets of its Old Town offer quaint medieval charm which is contrasted by the New Town, the very epitome of Georgian style.

There is culture and history around every corner and numerous landmarks, sights, and attractions to explore.

Edinburgh Castle
Walk the Royal Mile
Shop on Princes Street
Enjoy the views from Arthur’s Seat

Day 11 Edinburgh (or day trip)

Day 11 provides a couple of options. You could spend more time exploring Edinburgh OR take a day trip to see more of Scotland’s famous sights, landmarks, and attractions.

There are some fantastic day trips you can do from Edinburgh. You could hire a car for the day but we recommend either jumping on the train or taking an organised tour especially if you want to fit as much as possible into your day.

Destinations which can be reached easily by train from Edinburgh in 2 hours or less include:

St Andrews (1½ hours)
South Queensferry (30 mins)
The Kelpies & Helix Park (1 hour)
Glasgow (1 hour)
Pitlochry (2 hours)
Linlithgow Palace (20 mins)
Dundee (1 hour 30 mins)
Stirling Castle (1 hour)
Loch Lomond (1 hour 40 mins)

We recommend the following day tours from Edinburgh:

Hogwarts Express and Scottish Highlands Tour – Escape the city for the day and head to the Scottish Highlands. Follow in the footsteps of the world’s most famous wizard, Harry Potter, and jump on board the Hogwarts Express on an unforgettable journey on the Jacobite Steam Train.
Loch Ness, Glencoe & the Highlands Tour from Edinburgh – Enjoy a full-day tour and experience some of the most dramatic scenery the Scottish Highlands has to offer. Spend time at mysterious Glencoe and have the chance to enjoy a cruise on Loch Ness and a visit to Urquhart Castle.
Loch Lomond, Kelpies, and Stirling Castle Small-Group Tour – Discover the Scottish Highlands on a full-day small-group tour, and see forests, lochs, and stunning mountains. Explore Scotland’s history and learn about its greatest heroes with visits to Stirling Castle, Loch Lomond, and more.
Loch Ness, Highlands & Whisky Distillery Tour – Experience the natural beauty of the Scottish Highlands on a full-day coach tour to Loch Ness, Glencoe, and the Trossachs National Park. Go to a working whisky distillery for an optional tasting. Stop for lunch in Fort Augustus and more.

Why not combine this best of Britain by rail itinerary with our Scotland rail itinerary?

We have done the work for you and produced a 21 day + plus complete UK rail itinerary which includes the best of England, Scotland and Wales.

Day 12 Edinburgh to York

UK rail trip - 14 day itinerary map showing day 12 of 14 - Edinburgh to York.

On Day 12 depart Edinburgh for York. This ancient city is located halfway between Edinburgh and London and its medieval city walls, museums, and shops make this the perfect destination for the last stop on your 14-day tour of Britain.

Journey time is around 2½ hours.

Good to know – Book a seat on the left side of the train (facing direction of travel) for views of the beautiful Northumberland coastline as you journey towards Newcastle and look out for the iconic Angel of the North after departure.

The train passes through Durham and Darlington before arriving in York.

Edinburgh Waverley to York travel time by train is approximately 2 hour 25 minutes
Depart Edinburgh Waverley arrives York
This is a direct train service with London North Eastern Railway (LNER)
Best luxury hotel in York – The Grand York is the only 5* hotel in York. Chic, luxury rooms in a grand Edwardian hotel.
Best mid-range hotel in York – The Bar Convent is England’s oldest living convent and one of the most unique places to stay in York.
Best budget option in York – Wheatlands Lodge offers good value accommodation only 5 minutes walk away from York train station.

Day 13 – York

York Minster
Walk the Walls
The Shambles
The Jorvik Viking Centre

Day 14 – York to London

UK rail trip - 14 day itinerary map showing day 14 of 14 - York to London.

Day 14 is the final leg of this UK train itinerary and will take you from York back to London.

Journey time is a little over 2 hours which means (depending on your flight time) there is the possibility of spending a few more hours exploring London.

York to London Kings Cross travel time by train is approximately 2 hours 10 minutes
Depart York arrives London King’s Cross
This is a direct train service with LNER

FAQs – Travelling the UK by train

If you are considering following this UK rail trip itinerary the easiest and most cost-effective way to travel is to either purchase a BritRail Pass or a Global Eurail Pass . These tickets are only available for overseas visitors so buy them before you arrive.

What are the advantages of purchasing a BritRail Pass?

The Britrail M-Pass is an electronic rail pass that can be downloaded directly onto your phone. Also available to print as a PDF copy if you prefer.
No need to stress over searching for ticket prices and booking each leg of your journey separately.
No need to stick to a rigid timetable as you can travel as much as you like on each day your BritRail Pass is valid.
Easier than searching for ticket prices for every leg of the journey.
Cheaper than buying individual tickets.
Children travel free with most passes. A family of 4 will only pay for 2 adults.
No queuing at ticket offices to purchase your ticket – just head to the platform and hop on the train.
Airport transfers by rail are included (Heathrow Express, Gatwick Express, and the Stansted Express)

For the itinerary above I recommend purchasing a Britrail GB M-Pass or a Global Eurail Pass as these passes enable unlimited travel across the full length of England, Wales, and Scotland.

I recommend comparing these passes before you buy as you may find one is more cost-effective for your trip.

Click for more information and to purchase BritRail Passes

Click for more information and to purchase a Global Eurail Pass

For this 2 week itinerary, I recommend purchasing a Britrail Pass or a Global Eurail Pass .

If you are planning to take a limited number of train trips purchasing individual tickets may be more cost-effective.

🗓 Purchase prior to travel for the cheapest train tickets .
🚆 Bookings open 12 weeks (84 days) before the date of travel.
🎫 Tickets can be purchased online via thetrainline.com
⚠️ Reservations are compulsory on many services.
😷 Check regulations in regard to Covid-19 prior to travel.

Our complete guide to travelling the UK by train details everything you need to know including how and where to buy tickets, tips for your day of travel and what to expect from your UK train trip.

You can take up to 3 pieces of luggage for free on UK trains including 2 large items such as suitcases or rucksacks.

Store luggage in overhead luggage racks, under the seats at in the luggage compartments at the end of each carriage.

Are any of the UK’s scenic train routes included in this itinerary?

Some of the most scenic train journeys in the UK are included in this itinerary including the East Coast Mainline from Edinburgh to York.

If you are planning a UK rail trip itinerary for the first time you will find our comprehensive guide to using the UK train network an invaluable resource.

Written by Doug Collins who worked on UK railways for over 25 years it contains practical information, tips, and advice to ensure you make the most of your UK rail adventure.

Read more – Complete guide to travelling the UK by train

13 Tips to save money on rail travel in the UK
9 tips for those planning to travel the UK by rail
Guide to the 9 regions of England
UK trip planner
Guide to English drinks

Skip to main content
Keyboard shortcuts for audio player

Solar eclipse 2024: Follow the path of totality

Thinking of taking a last-minute drive to see the eclipse here's what to know.

Geoff Brumfiel

RV traffic sits at a standstill along a two-lane road near Madras, Ore., a few days before the 2017 total solar eclipse. Experts say traffic could be heavy, but eclipse watchers shouldn't necessarily be deterred. AFP Contributor/AFP via Getty Images hide caption

NASA says that roughly 31.6 million people live in the path of this year's total solar eclipse, and a little under half of the U.S. population lives within 200 miles driving distance of the path of totality .

That could mean many millions of Americans will hit the road to get a better view on April 8. If you're still pondering whether or not you want to make the journey, here's what to consider.

Have some destinations in mind, and check the weather and cloud cover forecasts in advance

It's a good idea to scout out one or more locations within driving distance, so that you have some flexibility if traffic or weather is threatening your plans, says Jonathan Upchurch, a professor emeritus of civil engineering at Arizona State University who has studied travel around solar eclipses.

There are several interactive tools that show the path of totality, including Eclipse2024.org and the National Solar Observatory . You can use them to figure out what sites might work best for you.

In terms of weather, check not just the weather forecast, but also the cloud cover forecast. Some websites, such as Windy.com will predict cloud cover ahead of time, giving you a sense of whether you'll actually be able to see the eclipse in all its glory.

Everything you need to know about solar eclipse glasses before April 8

During the total solar eclipse in 2017, Upchurch says he chose to go to Idaho "because there were some great chances of having sunny skies, and I had the opportunity to be nimble and relocate if I wanted to."

Before driving into the path of totality, make sure your gas tank is full and that you've got everything you need

During the last total solar eclipse in 2017, it's estimated some 5 million people took to the roads, and those numbers will potentially be much higher this year.

Given all that, Upchurch says it's important to make sure you're taking what you need into the path of totality. You should make sure your car is gassed or charged up, and that you have plenty of snacks and water with you in case you get stranded for a while, especially when trying to leave.

Solar Eclipse 2024: Totality stretches from Texas to Maine

Simple tips to safely photograph the eclipse with your cellphone.

Also don't forget to bring eclipse glasses, which must be worn anytime you're looking at the sun, except for the few minutes when it is completely blocked by the moon.

Some state emergency planners also recommend bringing a paper map or road atlas in case cellular networks become overloaded with visitors seeking directions from their phones.

Don't forget your eclipse glasses everyone! Erika Goldring/FilmMagic hide caption

Don't forget your eclipse glasses everyone!

Arrive early and stay late

Once you figure out where you're going to watch the eclipse, and you've got your supplies, try to get there early. Although traffic is likely to be heavier than normal on the morning of eclipse day, it still should be possible to reach many destinations without too much hassle, says Upchurch.

"Leaving is definitely going to be more of a problem," he says. As the eclipse concludes, people will take to the roads all at once to try and get home as fast as they can. In 2017, that led to traffic jams that lasted many hours in some areas. If possible, Upchurch says, people should stay put for a while to try and avoid the worst of the post-eclipse rush, which in 2017 stretched even into the following day in some parts of the country.

Here's what time the eclipse will be visible in your region

And one more thing: If you do find yourself on the move near the time of the eclipse, state officials stress that you should not simply pull over to the side of the road or highway you're driving on. It's important to be parked legally and safely at the moment of totality.

If you're already in the path of totality: Relax and enjoy!

Several major metropolitan areas including Dallas, Indianapolis, Cleveland and Buffalo are already inside the path of totality, so there's no need to seek a better view, Upchurch says. You'll probably have the most fun simply staying where you are.

Shots - Health News

Watching a solar eclipse without the right filters can cause eye damage. here's why.

If you're on the edge of the path of totality, however, you might consider making a short trip to get closer to the center of the eclipse's path.

"If you're within about 40 miles of the center line, you'll have two-and-a-half minutes or more" of complete totality, Upchurch says. It's up to you to decide whether it's worth making the trip to a more central location.

Despite studying the potential hassles of traveling extensively, Upchurch says he's still looking forward to seeing the 2024 eclipse, which he plans to watch from Texas.

"Totality is absolutely spectacular," he says. "If you have a chance to witness it, I would do it."

2024 solar eclipse
eclipse 2024
2024 eclipse
Traffic patterns
total eclipse

Money latest: How your neighbour could wipe up to £57,000 from your house price - and what you can do to prevent it

Messy neighbours can slash tens of thousands of pounds off the value of your home, research has found. Read about this and the rest of today's consumer and personal finance news in the Money blog, and tell us your thoughts on any of the stories we cover in the form below.

Friday 12 April 2024 11:28, UK

UK economy grows slightly for second month in a row
How your neighbour's garden could wipe up to £57,000 from your house price
Prescription costs are rising - here's how to beat the hike
At what age do you reach peak earnings?
Authentic or Greek-style? Your guide to getting healthier yoghurt for less
'WTF is going on with the price of olive oil?'
Could I build a home gym for less than my gym membership?
Basically... Tax codes
Cheap Eats : Great British Menu legend shares ultimate toastie recipe

Ask a question or make a comment

Messy neighbours can slash tens of thousands of pounds off the value of your home, according to new research.

A survey of estate agents by Churchill Home Insurance found that more than four in five (82%) believe it's important for homeowners to chat to their neighbours about their poorly maintained property before putting the house on the market.

Some 22% said an overgrown garden is likely to have the biggest impact, while 20% said rubbish or junk in the driveway or front garden could affect the cost.

Overflowing gutters (20%), several cars parked on or around the property (19%) and garden ornaments and statues (18%) also cut the value of neighbouring homes, estate agents said.

The research also revealed that some sellers deliberately time viewings to make their houses seem more attractive, avoiding issues next door such as loud music or pets - or even avoiding the neighbours altogether.

Sarah Khan, head of Churchill home insurance, said: "First impressions count when it comes to selling homes, with the sale price often negatively impacted when the neighbouring property looks scruffy.

"Investing a few hundred pounds in a gardener to tidy up next door's front garden could pay huge dividends when it comes to selling your home, a win-win for both you and your neighbour."

What do estate agents say?

We spoke to people in the industry about the risk of having messy neighbours when it comes to moving - and what their advice is for those seeking to avoid any effect on their sale.

James Stevenson, south and south west area director at Foxtons, agrees it can make the process more difficult.

"Gardens that are unkept or full of clutter, pavements and frontages that have fallen into disrepair or where your neighbours are showing little care for their property are all a negative flag for buyers," he said.

"Additionally, any disruption that has become a neighbourly dispute must be declared to prospective buyers, so it's always better to have a great relationship with your neighbours and try to resolve any existing issues amicably."

Messy neighbours are "frustrating" at any time, but become a "more pressing issue" when it comes to putting a home up for sale, says Sarah Cull, senior associate director Strutt & Parker Salisbury.

"Before you get your own gardening shears out, the first step should always be to try to have a frank conversation with your neighbour – you can even explain that you’re looking to sell and you want to give prospective buyers the best first impression possible."

If a friendly chat doesn't do the job, Sarah suggests heading to a local garden centre to pick up some screening.

"Where the neighbour's garden is considered a nuisance – for example there's lots of rubbish which could attract pests, or weeds are damaging groundwork – then you can report it to your local council," she added.

By Sarah Taaffe-Maguire , business reporter

The continued return to growth with GDP - a measure of everything produced in the economy - up 0.1% has been welcomed by markets.

The FTSE 100 - the index of most valuable companies on the London Stock Exchange - is up 0.86% and near its all-time high.

Pushing up the index is Fresnillo, the precious metals mining company with its share price up 6.91%.

Potentially putting a dampener on the global economy is the fact oil prices have remained elevated, with a barrel of the benchmark Brent crude oil costing $90.57.

Currency wise, one pound buys $1.256 and €1.17.

Jeremy Hunt says the latest economy figures are a "welcome sign".

The chancellor said GDP growth of 0.1% shows "that the economy is turning a corner, and we can build on this progress if we stick to our plan".

"Last week our cuts to national insurance for 29 million working people came into effect across Britain, as part of our plan to reward work and grow the economy," he said in a statement.

The UK economy has grown slightly for the second month in a row, official figures show.

Gross domestic product (GDP) grew just 0.1% in February, the Office for National Statistics (ONS) said.

It's another signal that the UK economy is working its way out of recession.

Growth of 0.3% was recorded last month - and that figure has been revised upwards from a previous estimate of 0.2%.

A recession was declared in February after data showed two quarters of economic contraction.

If the economy expands for three months, the UK will be officially out of recession.

It can be hard to balance getting nutritious foods that make you feel good without emptying your wallet.

In this series every Friday, we're trying to find the cheapest ways to identify the healthiest options in the supermarket.

We've asked Sunna Van Kampen, founder of Tonic Health , who went viral on social media for reviewing supermarket products in the search of healthier choices, for his input.

The series does not aim to identify the outright healthiest option, rather how to get better nutritional value for as little money as possible.

This time we're looking at yogurt - specifically the differences between some of the most popular: authentic Greek and Greek-style.

"You have to watch out for Greek-style yoghurt masquerading as the authentic variety," Sunna says.

Typical Greek-style yoghurt has around 4.6g of sugar per 100g, he says.

But swivel your cart towards the authentic Greek yoghurt, and you'll find only 3.3g per 100g.

"That's an impressive 28% reduction in sugar content, or a teaspoon of sugar a day if you have a 300g portion."

To be clear - this isn't added sugar, this is the naturally-occurring kind from lactose in the milk.

Protein is the building block of our bodies, and something around 66% of Brits don't get enough of.

"Authentic Greek yoghurt boasts around double the protein content of its Greek-style cousins - with branded versions having 9g per 100g compared to just 3.7g per 100g," Sunna says.

This means in a typical 300g bowl, you are getting 27g of protein versus only 11.1g in Greek-style.

Here's the bottom line - it is more expensive, but the investment is worth it, Sunna says.

Greek-style yoghurt – supermarket own label – 22p per 100g
Authentic Greek yoghurt - supermarket own label – 46p per 100g
Authentic Greek yoghurt – branded versions – 50-58p per 100g

"Okay, so we are talking double the price, but you get what you pay for with double the protein," Sunna says.

Think of it this way - every 300g bowl is an extra 72p per day for nearly 16g of extra protein and nearly 30% less sugar.

"Far cheaper than what you'd pay for a protein bar with the same amount of protein," Sunna notes.

The key here: value isn't exclusive to the price tag - and investing in your health is more important than ever.

So, next time you're navigating the dairy aisle, remember that not all yoghurts are created equal - opting for authentic Greek yoghurt can be a small but effective step towards a healthier diet without breaking the bank.

The nutritionist's view - from Dr Laura Brown , senior lecturer in nutrition, food, and health sciences at Teesside University...

Yes, absolutely for a source of protein.

Yogurt is better than protein bars and powders that are full of protein, as they come along with a long list of other potentially artificial ingredients that are not necessary.

If we are looking at yoghurts from a health perspective, then you're definitely wanting to look for this style - natural, Greek, low sugar or sugar free but not fat-free!

Families should avoid investing in sugar-laden yoghurts that do not serve any nutritional purposes.

If someone is eating yoghurt specifically as a source of protein, then there are much better sources like beans and lentils which are affordable and will provide other additional benefits including fibre.

The price of a prescription is set to to rise from £9.65 to £9.90 in England in May - but there are ways you can save money on your medicines.

Fee-free options remain in place for some, such as those who are pregnant, have certain disabilities, students or the elderly.

But if you're not exempt, there are still some means of cutting the costs of treatments.

Prepayment certificates

Prescription prepayment certificates (PPC) cover NHS prescriptions over a given time period, no matter how many medicines you need.

There are two options: A three-month PPC (£32.05 from May), which will start to save you money if you buy four or more prescriptions in that period, or a 12-month PPC (£114.50), which pays off if you buy 12 or more in a year.

Ask for a larger prescription

Doctors may agree to prescribe a longer course of medicine - such as two months' worth instead of one, halving the cost.

Just ask the question - they might say yes, especially if there's no danger of overuse.

Menopause medication

The NHS offers a particular PPC for hormone replacement therapy.

It lasts for 12 months and costs £19.30, rising to £19.80 from 1 May.

Women can use the PCC as many times as they need within the year.

You might not need a prescription

For some ailments, there are over-the-counter options sold cheaper than their prescribed alternative. You can ask your doctor or pharmacist for advice.

People are 47 before they reach peak earnings, data for 2023 shows - a huge increase from five years ago.

Office for National Statistics figures show the age for the highest average wage had risen from 38 in 2013 and 40 in 2018.

It comes as Britons retire later and younger people struggle on the lowest wages.

In 2023, this highest average wage (gross median hourly earnings, including overtime) was £18.78 per hour.

The ONS said: "While the age at which earnings peak has changed, the overall trends in earnings throughout a person’s working career have remained very similar.

"Young people earn the lowest hourly wage, people aged between 30 and 50 earn the most and median hourly earnings fall from around age 50 until retirement.

"Whilst median earnings fall between age 50 and retirement, this does not mean that individuals' pay will decrease.

"Higher earners may retire early, reducing the median wage of those remaining in employment, and people may change roles and hours worked."

Yesterday we reported on ONS data showing the age at which people reach life milestones - with all of them being pushed later in life except one...

Fake flights and caravans are the two most common items being sold by fraudsters in relation to travel, Lloyds Bank's research has found.

As Britons head online to book deals for the upcoming bank holidays and summer, they have been urged to "remain vigilant", with the average holiday scam victim being conned out of £765.

Amid rising flight costs post-COVID, people have been flocking to social media and other lesser-known websites to secure cheaper deals.

A food delivery company claims to have created an "unshakeable bag" to avoid spillage in transit.

Bolt, which owns the Bolt Food delivery platform, said its design is based on gyroscope technology and will keep food stable "during the most abrupt movements".

In a post to its website, the firm said it would make the design available to its competitors as it is "too powerful to be owned by any one company".

"We believe everyone should enjoy a perfect meal, regardless of which app they order it from," it said.

Assaulting a shopworker is to be made a separate criminal offence after a government U-turn following pressure from campaigners.

The government previously said "more legislative change" was not needed to tackle the "intolerable violence and abuse" faced by shopworkers, arguing it did not think it was "required or will be most effective".

But Rishi Sunak is now set to announce his government will be amending the Criminal Justice Bill to bring in the new offence.

The drugmaker was on its knees when Sir Pascal Soriot took over in 2012.

But under his leadership it now does just about everything the UK wants from a business - creating high value-added jobs and developing products that improve people's lives.

The FTSE 100's performance has lagged that of many of its peers, both in the United States and Europe, more or less since the Brexit vote in 2016.

That poor performance has reflected the poor valuation of many UK-listed companies - resulting in numerous foreign takeovers of UK businesses in recent months and years.

It has also led to a scarcity in the number of companies floating on the London Stock Exchange, most notably the Cambridge-based chip designer ARM Holdings , which last year opted to list in the US instead.

The situation has alarmed the government, which has announced a number of reforms aimed at raising the UK's attractiveness .

An imminent shareholder vote on Sir Pascal's pay makes a particularly interesting test case because few would dispute that he has been the most outstanding FTSE 100 chief executive of his generation.

This rise could take his potential earnings to £18.5m this year - which critics say is excessive.

Read my full piece here ...

England's average house price has risen by £103,000 over the last decade, while the average annual wage has risen by £7,734.

But some areas have seen homeownership affordability decline more than others...

The London borough of Barking and Dagenham has seen the most significant fall, according to moving platform Getamover.

The platform found the area has seen house prices more than double to £380,000 in the last 10 years - but wages have only risen by £2,182.

Hillingdon in West London took the second spot, with the average property shooting up by £230,000 to £495,000, while the average income increased by just £143.

While London remains the most unaffordable region, the East Midlands has also seen a notable fall.

Oadby and Wigston in Leicestershire ranked fifth in the table, with the average house price increasing by £129,000 and the median annual income growing by £2,644.

Gedling ranks sixth among the areas of England where the affordability of buying a home has declined most.

The Nottinghamshire region has seen house prices soar by 84.8% to £231,000, while the average income has risen by just 13.11% to £33,454.

You can see how other areas fared in the table below...

Be the first to get Breaking News

Install the Sky News app for free

IMAGES

See the Best of England: A Three Week Itinerary
London Attractions Map
The Ultimate Road Trip Map of 26 Places To See Across Great Britain
England Tour: The Best of England in 14 Days
The Ultimate UK Road Trip Itinerary
England Itinerary: Where to Go in England by Rick Steves

VIDEO

Ashwin Superb Bowling & India Master Plan Shocks England|IND vs ENG 1st Test Day 1 Updates
Ben STOKES Ke Master Plan Ne Uda Di Hai Bharat Ke Captain ROHIT Sharma Ki Nind ?#rohitsharma #bcci
England Master Plan For 2nd ODI Against Team India|Virat Kohli|ENG vs IND 2nd ODI latest Updates
McCullum talks on England’s attacking plan
"Exploring England: The Top 20 Must-See Destinations"
🔴BAZBALL के खिलाफ BUMRAH का SPECIAL PLAN, ENGLAND से आई INDIA को WARNING- IND VS ENG TEST

COMMENTS

England Itinerary: Where to Go in England by Rick Steves
Rick's Best Three-Week Trip to England by Car. This 20-day itinerary covers the top sights in England. Day 1: Arrive in London, connect to Bath (sleep in Bath) Day 2: Bath (sleep in Bath) Day 3: Pick up car, visit Stonehenge, Wells, and Glastonbury (sleep in Bath) Day 4: Avebury, Blenheim Palace (sleep in Oxford) Day 5: Oxford, to the ...
One Week in England: The Perfect Itinerary
Day 2: London and Windsor. Windsor makes for a great half-day trip out of London, so grab a train from Paddington station to Windsor, via Slough, in the morning. Windsor Castle welcomes visitors for tours most days of the year, but you need to book a timed ticket in advance, either online or by phone.
2 Weeks in the UK
Hi there, we are planning a trip to England, Scotland, and Ireland at the beginning of July. We are thinking about 16-18 days. ... (4 member) in LONDON and then accompany them to this tour plan. we wish to know approx budget in INR apart from AIR Ticket required for this kind of tour. Consider AIR BnB stay, Home cooking where ever possible, car ...
Your Trip to England: The Complete Guide
Planning Your Trip. Best Time to Visit: England makes for an amazing holiday destination any time of year, but take advantage of the warmer weather and long days during the summer, especially July and August, to make the most of your trip. If you prefer to avoid crowds, visit in May or September. Christmas is also very popular all over England ...
10 Day England Itinerary: The Best Sights And Attractions In England
Kynance Cove, Cornwall - one of the most stunning spots on this 10-day England itinerary. Bedruthan Steps, Cornwall. Alternatively, you could focus on Cornwall's food scene. There are lots of great restaurants dotted around the county, but the most famous town for gastronomy is Padstow.
The best itineraries for exploring England
Day 5: Feel a natural symphony in the Cotswolds. Travel through central England, via Elgar's beloved Malvern Hills, to reach the classic English countryside of the Cotswolds. Named for its famous rolling hills, this lovely landscape is worth meandering through slowly, by car or bicycle, on foot or on horseback.
The Ultimate 10-Day England Itinerary: 3 Perfect Routes
There are so many options of places to visit and things to see during your 10 days in England but, hopefully, these three great routes are able to help you plan the trip of your dreams! From historic cities, gorgeous natural scenery, inviting pubs and a wonderful coastline, England has so much to offer visitors — so make sure to see more than ...
How to Plan a Trip to the UK: 10 Questions to Ask
10 Questions to Ask Yourself Before You Plan Your UK Trip. Planning Your First UK Trip. Planning a trip to the United Kingdom (UK) probably seems pretty easy. The language is almost never a problem, the visa requirements are not particularly onerous for vacationers from North and South America, Australasia or Europe, and there's a good choice ...
Great Britain Itinerary
To help you get started, I've listed my top picks for where to go in Great Britain and outlined my plan for your best three-week trip. (If you're planning a more focused trip, see my recommended itineraries for England and Scotland.) Depending on the length of your trip, and taking geographic proximity into account, here are my recommended ...
England Tours and Itineraries
England to France: London, English Countryside, Paris & Lyon - 14 Days. This action-packed, two-week tour spans from England to France. Start by enjoying the best of London—from Buckingham Palace to high tea to a private tour of the Tower of London—along with day trips to the southeast coast and countryside.
Ultimate 2 Weeks in England
Belgium, Germany, France, Denmark, Norway, Netherlands, and the Faroe Islands share maritime borders with England. In this collection of travel itineraries for 2 weeks in England, there are three options for you to choose from depending on what you prefer to see. There is a travel plan for first-time visitors, hiking itinerary, and a guide for ...
[2024] PERFECT 3 WEEKS IN ENGLAND ITINERARY with map
Average cost of 20 days in England. On an average budget, a 20-day trip to England could cost roughly $2,500-$3,500 per person. This includes mid-range accommodations, meals at casual restaurants, public transportation, and regular tourist attractions. For backpackers, expect to spend around $1,200-$1,800.
England Tour Packages & England Travel Guide
3 Countries. Explore the Best of Britain on this incredible trip across England, Scotland and Wales, and travel over the sea to the Isle of Skye. Imagine life as a Benedictine monk at Buckfast Abbey, feel the hope of brave pilgrims in Plymouth and be inspired by the beauty of Lake Windermere. FROM. $3,925.
UK trip planner (How to plan your UK Trip
Step 1 - Decide when to visit the UK. Spring in England, Summer in St Ives Cornwall, Autumn in the Lake District and Winter in Scotland. Visiting the UK is wonderful at any time of year but it is important to be aware of the possible impact of the seasons on your travel plans. If you have set dates when you have to take your vacation it is ...
5 Days in England
Itinerary #1: Explore History & Culture in London. Take a step back in time with a historical trip to London that lets you walk in the footsteps of kings and queens. Five days in England's capital takes you to famed palaces and castles, iconic abbeys, well-known museums, and much more. Walk London's 19th-century Tower Bridge.
England Vacation Packages 6-Days and More
There are a few ways to plan an England Vacation Package. You could visit: 100% England Packages (we've got plenty of amazing things to see here!) England with Scotland Packages: Combine a trip and go to Scotland as well! England, Scotland & Ireland Packages: The big trip! These vacation packages sometimes also include Northern Ireland as well.
The Ultimate Itinerary for 7 Days In England
Once you arrive in the national park, visit Lake Windermere, which is the largest natural lake in England. You can do the four-mile West Shore Walk to take in its most beautiful scenery. It's also worth hiking up Orrest Head, which is 240 metres high and takes around an hour and 20 minutes to walk up and down.
Perfect England 2 Week Itinerary: How to Plan an England Itinerary
Sample England 2 Week Itinerary. You can easily customize this England 2 week itinerary to suit your needs. Below you'll find a few suggestions to help you plan your two weeks in England. London - 7 days > Bristol - 4 days > York - 3 days.
England trip planner: make a England itinerary & map
Plan on the go with our free travel app. With Wanderlog's mobile travel planner on Android and iOS, access and edit your trips wherever you go — even while offline. Keep your places to visit, flight/hotel reservations, and day-by-day itineraries for your trip to England in our web and mobile app vacation planner.
England Road Trip: 50 Unmissable ideas (for every UK itinerary)
Best places to visit on a North East coast England road trip. Saltburn-by-the-Sea (to search for fossils) Lemon top ice-cream - Its legacy goes back over 100 years!) Staithes- picturesque fishing village. Whitby Abbey - the inspiration behind Bram Stoker's Dracula.
See the best of Britain by train (2 week itinerary + maps & tips)
This 14-day best of Britain by train itinerary begins with Days 1/2 & 3 in London and ends on Day 14 back in the capital. This may provide some flexibility to add on a few more sights in London depending on your flight or onward travel itinerary. London Day 1. I recommend spending your first day visiting some of the most popular London ...
Southern England Itinerary: Your Guide to an Epic British Road Trip
Discover the ultimate Southern England road trip with this itinerary that takes in the major gems of South England.
We didn't plan it but an impromptu trip to Morrison Haunted Yard
37 likes, 0 comments - halloweennewenglandOctober 30, 2023 on : "We didn't plan it but an impromptu trip to Morrison Haunted Yard Display in Ashland, MA fit in ...
Last-minute travel tips to see the total solar eclipse
Last-minute travel tips to see the total solar eclipse : Solar eclipse 2024: Follow the path of totality Experts say you should gas up before you go, and plan to stay for a while afterward.
Money latest: At what age do you reach peak earnings?
Areas of England where affording to own a home has declined the most England's average house price has risen by £103,000 over the last decade, while the average annual wage has risen by £7,734.

2 Weeks in the UK – My Perfect UK Trip Itinerary

A 2 week UK Trip itinerary

Days 1 & 2: London

Days 3 & 4: Oxford & the Cotswolds

Days 5 & 6: Peak District and Manchester

Day 7: York

Days 8 & 9: Edinburgh via Northumberland

Days 10 – 12: Ireland

Day 13: South Wales and Cardiff

Day 14: Bristol & Bath

Day 15: Back to London, via Stonehenge!

2 Weeks in the UK: Road Trip Map

2 Week UK Itinerary Summary

Can you do this 2 Week UK itinerary by public transport?

What About Touring the UK With A Tour Company?

When to Visit the UK

Where to Stay in the UK:

How to Get Around the UK

Further reading for your UK Trip

There are 219 comments on this post

Leave a Reply Cancel reply

10 Day England Itinerary: The Best Sights And Attractions In England

10-Day England Itinerary: The Best Sights And Attractions In England

1 Day In Brighton

1 Day In Dorset

1 Day In Cornwall

1 Day In Bath

1 Day In The Cotswolds

2 Days In The Lake District

1 Day In Cambridge

1 thought on “10 Day England Itinerary: The Best Sights And Attractions In England”

Leave a comment Cancel reply

3 perfect England itineraries for every type of traveler

Essential England – a 10-day itinerary

Day 1: Tour the streets of the capital

Day 2: Captivating cathedral cities

Day 3: A literary day in Bath

Day 5: Study the beauty of Oxford

Day 6 & 7: Find an outdoor paradise in the Lake District

Day 8: Discover the delights of York

Day 9: Punt around Cambridge

Day 10: Back to London

The wild side of England – a 10-day itinerary

Day 1: Ramble along Hadrian’s Wall

Day 2: Unleash your inner poet in Lake District National Park

Day 3: Find literary inspiration at Yorkshire Dales National Park

Day 4: Take a spa break in Peak District National Park

Day 5: Feel a natural symphony in the Cotswolds

Day 6: Unravel the mysteries of Salisbury Plain

Day 7: Find fossils on the Jurassic Coast

Day 8: Track down wild ponies in Exmoor National Park

Day 9: Get uplifted on the moors of Dartmoor National Park

Day 10: Finish is cozy coves in Cornwall

Introducing Roman England – a 7-day itinerary

Day 1: Hello Londinium

Day 2: The villas of Fishbourne Palace

Day 3: Take a bath in Bath

Day 4: Stand in the amphitheater of Chester

Day 5: Enjoy Eboracum (aka York)

Day 6: Patrol along Hadrian’s Wall

Day 7: Back to Londinium

Explore related stories

The Ultimate 10-Day England Itinerary: 3 Perfect Routes

Getting To & Around England

London and Southwest Itinerary

Days 1-3: London

Where to Stay in London

Days 4-5: Bristol

Where to Stay in Bristol

Days 6-8: Cornwall

Where to Stay in Cornwall

Days 9-10: Brighton

Where to Stay in Brighton

London and North England Itinerary

Days 4-5: York

Where to Stay in York

Days 6-7: Lake District

Where to Stay in the Lake District

Days 8-10: Liverpool

Where to Stay in Liverpool